Cineo 2560servicemanual

Self-Service
Systems
CINEO C2560
Service Manual
Questions and suggestions
Do you have ...
... any questions or suggestions

regarding this manual?
Please contact the following address

giving the order number of this manual
in your message:
Address:
WINCOR NIXDORF International GmbH
Handbuchredaktion R&D ACT 12
D - 33094 Paderborn
Germany
Fax: +49 (0) 52 51 693-62 09
E-mail: manuals.hardware@wincor-nixdorf.com
CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

CINEO C2560
Service Manual
May Edition 2014

Copyright Information and trademarks
WINCOR NIXDORF International GmbH 2014
All rights, including rights of translation

and rights of reproduction by reprinting,
copying or similar methods, even of
parts, are reserved.
Any violations give rise to a claim for
damages.
All rights, including rights created by

patent grants or registration of a utility
model or design, are reserved. Delivery
subject to availability; right of technical
modifications reserved.
All names of hardware and software

products mentioned in this manual are
trade names and/or trademarks of their
respective manufactures.
This manual was

produced using paper
treated with chlorine-free bleach.
CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

I Contents/Abbreviations .................
1 Introduction .....................................
2 Function and Integration ................
3 Basic Components .........................
4 PCs and PC Cards ..........................
5 Card Readers and Keyboards........
6 Monitors ..........................................
7 Printers and Scanners ....................
8 Cash Components ..........................
9 Multimedia .......................................
10 Miscellaneous .................................
11 Removal/Installation .......................
12 Maintenance and Service ...............
II Index ................................................
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 0-1

0-2 CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C
Contents
Introduction .................................................................................................. 1-1
Symbols used in this manual ......................................................................... 1-1
Important Safety Instructions ......................................................................... 1-1
Installation note ........................................................................................ 1-2
General safety precautions....................................................................... 1-2
General power interruption ............................................................................ 1-5
Structure of the manual.................................................................................. 1-8
Outline ...................................................................................................... 1-8
Supplementary documentation ................................................................. 1-8
Manual release ......................................................................................... 1-9
Description of the device................................................................................ 1-9
Function and use ...................................................................................... 1-9
Service functionings ..................................................................................... 1-10
HW Inventory .......................................................................................... 1-10
Complex components ....................................................................... 1-12
Simple Components .......................................................................... 1-13
CrypTA ................................................................................................... 1-14
Testsoftware for systems with ProBase ............................................ 1-14
Access protection for T/SOP functions and test software ................. 1-14
D&S ........................................................................................................ 1-15
Trusted computing / Safe channel .......................................................... 1-15
Procedures ........................................................................................ 1-16
Initial start-up ............................................................................... 1-16
Complete PC replacement ........................................................... 1-18
Replacement of the system board (motherboard) ....................... 1-19
Hard disk replacement ................................................................. 1-19
Component replacement (e.g. RM3 Controller) ........................... 1-19
Smart card replacement .............................................................. 1-19
Importing the truststore ................................................................ 1-21
Basekey replacement .................................................................. 1-22
Handling the TPM ............................................................................. 1-23
BIOS setting ................................................................................. 1-23
Affected PCs ................................................................................ 1-25
Qualifying Plus ............................................................................. 1-25
Technical Data ............................................................................................. 1-26
General Installation Conditions............................................................... 1-26
Electrical characteristics of the supply network ................................. 1-26
Device conditions .............................................................................. 1-27
Installation specifications .................................................................. 1-29
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-I

Contents
Environmental conditions .................................................................. 1-31

Compliance with Standards and Certifications ............................................ 1-33
Standards met ........................................................................................ 1-33
Conformity .............................................................................................. 1-34
Notes concerning radio interference suppression and electrical
safety ...................................................................................................... 1-34
Certification for data transmission .......................................................... 1-34
FCC rules and Canadian Standard ICES - 003 ...................................... 1-35
UL 291, Level 1 (security Container) ...................................................... 1-35
Environmental protection ............................................................................. 1-36
Environmentally and recycling-friendly product development ................ 1-36
Saving energy ........................................................................................ 1-36
Disposing of used consumables............................................................. 1-36
Labels on plastic case parts ................................................................... 1-36
Returning, recycling and disposing of used units and consumables ...... 1-37
Function and integration ............................................................................. 2-1

Block diagrams .............................................................................................. 2-1
System wiring diagram .................................................................................. 2-1
Journal printer .......................................................................................... 2-3
Receipt printer .......................................................................................... 2-3
Cash Media Dispenser (CMD) ................................................................. 2-3
Cash Media Dispenser with printing cassette TH60................................. 2-4
Check/Cash Deposit Module .................................................................... 2-4
Audio loudspeakers/headphones ............................................................. 2-5
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ........................................................ 2-5
Voltage supply ............................................................................................... 2-6
Supply voltage .......................................................................................... 2-6
DC power supply ...................................................................................... 2-7
Connection of cash media dispenser, receipt printer and journal
printer .................................................................................................. 2-7
Special Electronics CTM................................................................................ 2-8
Console Electronics CTM ............................................................................ 2-10
Connected sub-assemblies .................................................................... 2-11
Assignment of optical indicators ............................................................. 2-12
Audio loudspeakers/headphones ................................................................ 2-13
Camera monitoring ...................................................................................... 2-13
System unit (PC) .......................................................................................... 2-14
Overview ................................................................................................ 2-14
USB assignment..................................................................................... 2-14
Protection against reading of ID cards by third parties ................................ 2-15
'Remote Status Indicator' ............................................................................. 2-15
Door switch .................................................................................................. 2-16
I-II CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Contents
SOP button/SOP switch ............................................................................... 2-16

Monitors ....................................................................................................... 2-17
Touchscreen for LCD monitor ................................................................ 2-18
Protective screens .................................................................................. 2-18
Soft key pads .......................................................................................... 2-19
Operating the flat displays ........................................................................... 2-19
Relay panel for external features USB......................................................... 2-20
Printer .......................................................................................................... 2-21
Coin dispenser module ................................................................................ 2-21
Card readers ................................................................................................ 2-22
DC/DC converter for CIM ............................................................................. 2-22
Optical indicator ........................................................................................... 2-23
DC/DC converter for CIM ............................................................................. 2-23
Keyboards .................................................................................................... 2-24
Operator panel ............................................................................................. 2-24
Cash Media Dispenser................................................................................. 2-25
Temperature control ..................................................................................... 2-25
Ventilation ............................................................................................... 2-25
Heater ..................................................................................................... 2-26
Power supply unit CMD 01750160689 ........................................................ 3-1

Description ..................................................................................................... 3-2
Output voltages ........................................................................................ 3-3
Stand-by voltages of the first part ....................................................... 3-3
Voltages of the second part ................................................................ 3-4
Voltages of the third part ..................................................................... 3-4
Input signal POWER-ON-NOT ................................................................. 3-5
Input signal SERVICE1-NOT.................................................................... 3-5
Output signal POWER-FAIL-NOT ............................................................ 3-5
Output signal OVERTEMP-FAN-FAULT-NOT ......................................... 3-6
Output signal OVER-VOLTAGE-OVER-CURRENT-NOT ........................ 3-6
Technical data................................................................................................ 3-7
Pin assignments............................................................................................. 3-8
Connector A.............................................................................................. 3-9
Connector B1, B2 ................................................................................... 3-10
Connector B3.......................................................................................... 3-10
Connector C1, C2 ................................................................................... 3-11
Connector D1, D2 ................................................................................... 3-12
Power Supply Unit CMD-CCDM 01750160690 ......................................... 3-13

Description ................................................................................................... 3-14
Output voltages ...................................................................................... 3-15
Stand-by voltages ............................................................................. 3-15
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-III

Contents
Voltages of the second part .............................................................. 3-16

Voltages of the third part ................................................................... 3-16
Voltages of the fourth part ................................................................. 3-17
Input signal POWER-ON-NOT ............................................................... 3-17
Input signals SERVICE1-NOT and SERVICE2-NOT ............................. 3-18
Output signal OVERTEMP-FAN-FAULT-NOT ....................................... 3-18
Output signal OVER-VOLTAGE-OVER-CURRENT-NOT ...................... 3-18
Technical data ............................................................................................. 3-19
Pin assignments .......................................................................................... 3-20
Connector A ........................................................................................... 3-21
Connector C1, C2 ................................................................................... 3-22
Connector B1, B2 ................................................................................... 3-23
Connector B3 ......................................................................................... 3-23
Connector D1, D2 ................................................................................... 3-24
Connector E ........................................................................................... 3-24
Power supply unit 2x38 V/395 W 01750203483 ....................................... 3-25

Description ................................................................................................... 3-26
Output voltages ...................................................................................... 3-27
Input signal POWER-ON-NOT (PON) .................................................... 3-28
Output signal POWER-FAIL-NOT (PFN) ............................................... 3-28
Output signal OVERTEMP-FAN-FAULT-NOT (OTP/FF) ....................... 3-28
Output signal OVER-CURRENT-NOT (OCN) ........................................ 3-28
Technical data ............................................................................................. 3-29
Pin assignments .......................................................................................... 3-30
Connector A ........................................................................................... 3-31
Connectors E1, E2 ................................................................................. 3-31
Power distributor 01750150107 ................................................................ 3-33

Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 3-34
Technical data ............................................................................................. 3-34
Dimensions and weight .......................................................................... 3-34
Special Electronics CTM 01750147868 .................................................... 3-35

Introduction .................................................................................................. 3-36
Functions of the special electronics ............................................................. 3-37
Behavior in connection with power supply unit and UPS............................. 3-38
Power supply unit / voltage supply ......................................................... 3-38
Status signals power supply unit ............................................................ 3-39
Power-on behavior after mains voltage supply ...................................... 3-39
Power-on behavior after pressing the on/off switch ............................... 3-40
Emergency power device ....................................................................... 3-41
Power-on behavior in UPS mode after reestablishment of the power
I-IV CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Contents
supply ..................................................................................................... 3-41

Switching off via software or restart........................................................ 3-41
Switching off via on/off switch................................................................. 3-42
SOP function with disconnection from supply ........................................ 3-42
SOP function without any influence on the voltage ................................ 3-43
Further functions .......................................................................................... 3-43
Fan control .............................................................................................. 3-43
Firmware download ................................................................................ 3-44
Overview of LED signal situations ............................................................... 3-44
Technical data.............................................................................................. 3-45
Plug positions ......................................................................................... 3-45
Pin assignments ..................................................................................... 3-46
X1 Power Supply In ........................................................................ 3-46
X10 I/O 1 (IDCU Box) ..................................................................... 3-47
X11 Power Distribution ................................................................... 3-47
X15 I/O 2 (Door) ............................................................................. 3-48
X13 Switch Extern .......................................................................... 3-48
X14 - Universal .................................................................................. 3-49
X17 - Fan .......................................................................................... 3-50
X18 I/O 3 (MEI / Reserve) .............................................................. 3-51
X19 Power I/O (Switched Light) ..................................................... 3-52
X21 - I/O 4 (CMD) ............................................................................. 3-52
X22 - UPS ......................................................................................... 3-53
X24 Operating Unit ......................................................................... 3-53
IC-Bus .............................................................................................. 3-53
USB ports .......................................................................................... 3-54
Console Electronics CTM / CTM II ............................................................ 3-55

Introduction .................................................................................................. 3-56
Fan control ................................................................................................... 3-56
Display illumination ...................................................................................... 3-57
Audio outputs ............................................................................................... 3-57
Firmware download ...................................................................................... 3-58
Overview of LED signal situations ............................................................... 3-59
Technical information ................................................................................... 3-60
Plug positions ......................................................................................... 3-60
Pin assignments ..................................................................................... 3-61
X2 Supply In ................................................................................... 3-61
X3 - Supply A (Display) ..................................................................... 3-62
X4 - Supply B (12V / 24V) ................................................................. 3-62
X11 LCD Light ................................................................................ 3-63
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-V

Contents
X15- I/O 2 (ASKIM / DIP) .................................................................. 3-63

X13 I/O 1 (Door) ............................................................................. 3-64
X14 - Universal ................................................................................. 3-65
X16 Current Source (MEI) ............................................................. 3-66
X17 - Fan .......................................................................................... 3-67
X18 Power I/O 1 (Switched Light) .................................................. 3-68
X19 I/O 3 (SOFTKEYS) ................................................................. 3-69
X21 - Audio In ................................................................................... 3-69
X22 - Audio Out Speaker .................................................................. 3-70
X23 Audio Headphone ................................................................... 3-70
X30 / 2A to 2F - USB ........................................................................ 3-70
Embedded PC A4 ......................................................................................... 4-1

Swap PC versions overview .......................................................................... 4-1
Technical data ............................................................................................... 4-3
Front side ....................................................................................................... 4-5
Device rear .................................................................................................... 4-6
Controls ......................................................................................................... 4-7
ATX system board ......................................................................................... 4-8
Lithium battery .......................................................................................... 4-9
Service concept for the EPC A4 .................................................................. 4-10
TPM ............................................................................................................. 4-12
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 4-14
COM 1 / COM 2 ...................................................................................... 4-14
USB ........................................................................................................ 4-15
DVI ......................................................................................................... 4-16
VGA ........................................................................................................ 4-17
Audio Line-In .......................................................................................... 4-18
Audio microphone .................................................................................. 4-18
Audio Line-out ........................................................................................ 4-18
BIOS setup .................................................................................................. 4-19
BIOS default settings:............................................................................. 4-19
USB Multi DVD drive 01750199695........................................................... 4-21

Description ................................................................................................... 4-21
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 4-22
USB port ................................................................................................. 4-22
Power supply .......................................................................................... 4-22
Technical data ............................................................................................. 4-23
Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT 01750107095 ................................ 4-25

Introduction .................................................................................................. 4-25
Card settings ................................................................................................ 4-27
I-VI CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Contents
Installation .................................................................................................... 4-27

Problems ...................................................................................................... 4-28
Technical data.............................................................................................. 4-28
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 4-29
FireWire card PCIe x1 FWA2414A 01750167156 ..................................... 4-31

Delivery package ......................................................................................... 4-32
Malfunctions ................................................................................................. 4-32
Technical Data ............................................................................................. 4-33
Cable connection ......................................................................................... 4-34
Anti-Skimming module II ............................................................................. 5-1

Components................................................................................................... 5-2
How the scanner works.................................................................................. 5-7
Connecting the ASKIM 2 base unit ................................................................ 5-8
Block diagram ........................................................................................... 5-8
Circuit diagram of the ASKIM 2 base unit................................................. 5-9
Functions used............................................................................................. 5-10
General information on the functions...................................................... 5-10
Suppression of the alarm evaluation ...................................................... 5-10
Alarm delay (Time frame) ....................................................................... 5-10
Switch-on/switch-off characteristics........................................................ 5-11
Basic calibration/Start-up ........................................................................ 5-12
Normal operation .................................................................................... 5-12
Standby operation .................................................................................. 5-12
Setting the function of the alarm output .................................................. 5-13
Resetting the alarm and calibration ........................................................ 5-14
Function elements........................................................................................ 5-14
Status messages ......................................................................................... 5-15
LED on the ASKIM 2 base unit .................................................................... 5-16
Basic calibration/Start-up ............................................................................. 5-18
Resetting the alarm ...................................................................................... 5-19
Saving / not saving the alarm....................................................................... 5-20
Calibration .................................................................................................... 5-20
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 5-21
USB ........................................................................................................ 5-21
Connector X2, ASKIM button / status LED connection .......................... 5-22
Connector X3, power supply connection ................................................ 5-22
Connector X4, switching signals card reader / reserve in-/output
connection .............................................................................................. 5-23
Connector X5, suppressor coil sensor connection ................................. 5-23
Test .............................................................................................................. 5-24
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-VII

Contents
Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)........................................................... 5-27

Trusted computing / Safe channel ............................................................... 5-29
Device views ................................................................................................ 5-30
Overall view ............................................................................................ 5-30
Front view ............................................................................................... 5-32
Rear view ............................................................................................... 5-33
Device version used .................................................................................... 5-34
Firmware ................................................................................................ 5-35
Position of components ............................................................................... 5-36
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 5-37
I/O Port ................................................................................................... 5-37
USB ........................................................................................................ 5-38
Voltage supply ........................................................................................ 5-38
External capacitor................................................................................... 5-39
Technical Data ............................................................................................. 5-39
Test .............................................................................................................. 5-40
Malfunctions................................................................................................. 5-40
Checking after a card has been arrested ............................................... 5-40
Removing an arrested ID card ............................................................... 5-41
Checking the ACT functionality .............................................................. 5-42
Remedy of card jams or removal of foreign objects ............................... 5-44
Version until approx. 04-2011 ........................................................... 5-44
Version since approx. 05-2011 ......................................................... 5-45
Maintenance and service ............................................................................. 5-47
Maintenance ........................................................................................... 5-47
Cleaning and test resources................................................................... 5-48
Accessories ............................................................................................ 5-48
Hybrid DIP reader ICM330 ......................................................................... 5-49

System connection ...................................................................................... 5-51
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 5-52
Simplified diagram ....................................................................................... 5-53
Function elements ....................................................................................... 5-54
Power supply .......................................................................................... 5-54
Plan view ................................................................................................ 5-55
Technical data ............................................................................................. 5-56
Contactless card reader Multi-ISO compact ........................................... 5-59

Card reader modules ................................................................................... 5-59
Connections ................................................................................................. 5-61
Description ................................................................................................... 5-62
Firmware ................................................................................................ 5-62
I-VIII CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Contents
Cable connection ......................................................................................... 5-63

USB ........................................................................................................ 5-63
Technical Data ............................................................................................. 5-63
Test .............................................................................................................. 5-64
Contactless card reader EMV/NFC ........................................................... 5-65

Contactless card reader modules ................................................................ 5-66
Controls........................................................................................................ 5-67
Description ................................................................................................... 5-67
RF interference ............................................................................................ 5-68
Connections ................................................................................................. 5-68
Technical Data ............................................................................................. 5-69
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 5-70
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 5-71
Test .............................................................................................................. 5-72
MM/CIM86/CIM06 ........................................................................................ 5-73

Circuit diagram ............................................................................................. 5-74
MM.......................................................................................................... 5-74
CIM86 ..................................................................................................... 5-74
CIM06 ..................................................................................................... 5-74
Test procedure ............................................................................................. 5-75
Card Reject Module ................................................................................... 5-77

General description ...................................................................................... 5-77
Views ........................................................................................................... 5-78
Card reject module with short transport path.......................................... 5-78
Card reject module with long transport path for 100 cards ..................... 5-79
Card reject module with long transport path for 200 cards ..................... 5-80
Function elements........................................................................................ 5-81
How to test the card reject module .............................................................. 5-81
Photosensor ........................................................................................... 5-81
Motor ...................................................................................................... 5-82
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 5-83
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 5-84
Technical data.............................................................................................. 5-84
EPP V6 ........................................................................................................ 5-85

Description ................................................................................................... 5-86
EPP V6 Standard ................................................................................... 5-87
EPP V6 Vario.......................................................................................... 5-89
Reset button ........................................................................................... 5-91
Service LEDs .......................................................................................... 5-92
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-IX

Contents
Green LED ........................................................................................ 5-92

Red LED ........................................................................................... 5-92
Tamper switch ........................................................................................ 5-93
SAM Board ............................................................................................. 5-94
Smartcard interfaces.................................................................................... 5-95
Replacing the EPP in the event of an error ................................................. 5-96
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 5-97
Maintenance work........................................................................................ 5-97
Softkeys ...................................................................................................... 5-99

Description ................................................................................................... 5-99
Pin assignment .......................................................................................... 5-100
Dimensions and weight ........................................................................ 5-101
12.1 LCD-Box DVI ....................................................................................... 6-1

Connections ................................................................................................... 6-2
Important safety precautions ......................................................................... 6-3
Structure and function.................................................................................... 6-4
Circuit diagram............................................................................................... 6-5
Cable connection ........................................................................................... 6-6
DVI-I connection ....................................................................................... 6-6
Voltage connection and backlight on/off................................................... 6-7
Technical Data ............................................................................................... 6-8
General ..................................................................................................... 6-8
LCD .......................................................................................................... 6-8
15 LCD-Box DVI .......................................................................................... 6-9

Connections ................................................................................................. 6-10
Important safety precautions ....................................................................... 6-11
Structure and functions ................................................................................ 6-12
Technical data ............................................................................................. 6-13
General ................................................................................................... 6-13
LCD ........................................................................................................ 6-13
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 6-14
DVI-I connection ..................................................................................... 6-14
Voltage connection and backlight on/off................................................. 6-15
15" DVI High Bright TFT monitor.............................................................. 6-17

Important safety precautions ....................................................................... 6-18
Connections ................................................................................................. 6-19
Technical data ............................................................................................. 6-20
General information ................................................................................ 6-20
LCD ........................................................................................................ 6-20
I-X CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Contents
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 6-21

DVI-I connection ..................................................................................... 6-21
24 V voltage supply on the monitor ........................................................ 6-22
12 V power connection and backlight on/off ........................................... 6-22
Brightness control connection ................................................................ 6-23
Touchkit for LCD monitor ......................................................................... 6-25

Structure ...................................................................................................... 6-25
How it works................................................................................................. 6-26
LED display on the touch controller ............................................................. 6-27
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 6-29
Technical data.............................................................................................. 6-30
Journal Printer TP06/NP06 .......................................................................... 7-1

Connecting the printer.................................................................................... 7-2
Power supply ............................................................................................ 7-2
Data interface ........................................................................................... 7-2
Views of thermal printer TP06........................................................................ 7-3
Overall view .............................................................................................. 7-3
Control panel and connectors................................................................... 7-5
Position of sensors ................................................................................... 7-6
Views of matrix printer NP06 ......................................................................... 7-7
Overall view .............................................................................................. 7-7
Control panel and connectors................................................................... 7-9
Position of sensors ................................................................................. 7-10
Functions ..................................................................................................... 7-11
Power-on procedure ............................................................................... 7-11
Status indicators .......................................................................................... 7-12
Indicators at power-on ............................................................................ 7-12
Indicators when online ............................................................................ 7-12
Functions of keys ......................................................................................... 7-13
Normal operation .................................................................................... 7-13
Internal test ............................................................................................. 7-14
Internal test with paper ...................................................................... 7-14
Internal test without paper ................................................................. 7-14
Internal test .................................................................................................. 7-15
Calling and exiting the 'internal test with paper'...................................... 7-15
Calling and exiting the 'internal test without paper'................................. 7-17
Displaying the selected test level ........................................................... 7-18
Description of the test programs ............................................................. 7-19
Test level 1 (paper sensor test) ......................................................... 7-19
Test level 2 (printer test) ................................................................... 7-19
Test level 3 (statistical information) ................................................... 7-19
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-XI

Contents
Test level 4 (reset EEPROM parameters to default values) ............. 7-23

Test level 5 (test of the take-up reel) ................................................ 7-23
Test level 6 (carrier test (NP06 only)) ............................................... 7-24
Test level 7 (set EEPROM sensor values to factory default) ............ 7-24
Paper control ............................................................................................... 7-25
Loading paper ........................................................................................ 7-25
Remaining paper supply ......................................................................... 7-25
Error handling .............................................................................................. 7-26
Error indicators ....................................................................................... 7-26
ERROR LED blinking pattern ................................................................. 7-27
Recoverable errors ........................................................................... 7-27
Unrecoverable errors ........................................................................ 7-28
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 7-29
Temperature error in the print head or thermal array ........................ 7-29
High voltage / low voltage error ........................................................ 7-29
Printer error ....................................................................................... 7-29
Paper motion error ............................................................................ 7-29
Controller ..................................................................................................... 7-30
Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 7-31
24 V connector ....................................................................................... 7-31
Data connector ....................................................................................... 7-31
Maintenance counter .............................................................................. 7-32
Remedying poor print quality .................................................................. 7-32
Matrix printer NP06 ........................................................................... 7-32
Thermal printer TP06 ........................................................................ 7-33
Technical data ............................................................................................. 7-34
Electrical characteristics ......................................................................... 7-34
Matrix printing unit NP06 ................................................................... 7-34
Thermal printing unit TP06 ................................................................ 7-34
Interface to the host................................................................................ 7-34
Room classification ................................................................................ 7-35
Print head ............................................................................................... 7-35
Ribbon cartridge ..................................................................................... 7-36
Paper feed unit ....................................................................................... 7-36
Print function .......................................................................................... 7-37
Paper specifications ............................................................................... 7-38
Journal roll dimensions ..................................................................... 7-39
Dimensions and weights ........................................................................ 7-40
I-XII CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Contents
Removing / installing the components ......................................................... 7-41

Print head ............................................................................................... 7-41
Thermal array ......................................................................................... 7-42
Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A ................................................................... 7-45

Printer connection ........................................................................................ 7-46
Voltage supply ........................................................................................ 7-46
Data interface ......................................................................................... 7-46
Views of thermal printer TP.......................................................................... 7-47
Entire device ........................................................................................... 7-47
TP07A ............................................................................................... 7-47
TP07A-2 ............................................................................................ 7-48
Detail views ............................................................................................ 7-49
Control panel .......................................................................................... 7-51
Connections ............................................................................................ 7-52
Views of matrix printer NP ........................................................................... 7-54
Entire device ........................................................................................... 7-54
Detail views ............................................................................................ 7-55
Control panel .......................................................................................... 7-56
Connections ............................................................................................ 7-57
Paper path monitoring.................................................................................. 7-59
How the unit works....................................................................................... 7-60
Power-on procedure ............................................................................... 7-60
Status indicators .......................................................................................... 7-61
Indicators at power-on ............................................................................ 7-61
Display when online................................................................................ 7-61
Key functions ............................................................................................... 7-62
Normal mode .......................................................................................... 7-62
Internal test ............................................................................................. 7-63
Internal test with paper ...................................................................... 7-63
'Internal test without paper' ............................................................... 7-63
Internal test .................................................................................................. 7-64
Calling and exiting the 'Internal test with paper' ..................................... 7-64
Calling and exiting the 'Internal test without paper' ................................ 7-66
Indicators for the selected test level ....................................................... 7-67
Description of the test programs ............................................................. 7-68
Test level 1 (paper sensor test) ......................................................... 7-68
Test level 2 (printer test) ................................................................... 7-68
Test level 3 (statistical information) ................................................... 7-68
Test level 4 (reset EEPROM parameters to default values) ............. 7-72
Test level 5 mark test or cutter/presenter test ................................... 7-73
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-XIII

Contents
Test level 6 (carrier test) (only NP) ................................................... 7-75

Test level 7 (set EEPROM sensor values to factory default) ............ 7-75
Paper control ............................................................................................... 7-76
How paper control is performed ............................................................. 7-76
Loading paper ........................................................................................ 7-77
Remaining paper supply ......................................................................... 7-77
Mark detection ........................................................................................ 7-77
Setting the printer to the paper type (TP only) ............................................. 7-78
Reset at power on........................................................................................ 7-81
Calibration of sensors .................................................................................. 7-81
Calibration of the control mark sensor.................................................... 7-83
Calibrating the TOF sensors .................................................................. 7-83
Mark control ................................................................................................. 7-84
Switching on the mark control ................................................................ 7-84
Disabling mark control ............................................................................ 7-84
Positioning the control mark sensor ....................................................... 7-85
Changing the position of the control mark sensor on the thermal
print side (TP only) ............................................................................ 7-85
Changing the position of the control mark sensor on the print
side (NP only) ................................................................................... 7-86
Changing the position of the control mark sensor on the rear (TP
only) .................................................................................................. 7-87
Changing the position of the control mark sensor between the
thermal print side and the rear (TP only) .......................................... 7-88
End of paper ................................................................................................ 7-92
Physical end of paper ............................................................................. 7-92
End of paper during printing ................................................................... 7-92
End-of-paper detection ........................................................................... 7-92
Paper-low detection ................................................................................ 7-92
Error handling .............................................................................................. 7-93
Error indicators ....................................................................................... 7-93
Blinking pattern of the ERROR-LED ...................................................... 7-93
Recoverable errors ........................................................................... 7-93
Unrecoverable errors ........................................................................ 7-96
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 7-97
Paper jam .......................................................................................... 7-97
Mark control detection error ............................................................ 7-101
Cutter .............................................................................................. 7-101
Temperature error in the print head or thermal array ...................... 7-101
High voltage/low voltage error ........................................................ 7-101
Printer error ..................................................................................... 7-102
Controller ................................................................................................... 7-103
Pin assignments ........................................................................................ 7-104
I-XIV CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Contents
24V connector ...................................................................................... 7-104

Data connector ..................................................................................... 7-104
Maintenance and service ........................................................................... 7-105
Maintenance counter ............................................................................ 7-105
Eliminating poor print quality ................................................................ 7-106
Matrix printer NP ............................................................................. 7-106
Thermal printer TP .......................................................................... 7-107
Technical Data ........................................................................................... 7-108
Electrical data ....................................................................................... 7-108
Interface to the host .............................................................................. 7-108
Room classification............................................................................... 7-108
Print head ............................................................................................. 7-109
Matrix printing unit NP ..................................................................... 7-109
Thermal printing unit TP .................................................................. 7-109
Ribbon cartridge ................................................................................... 7-109
Paper transport unit .............................................................................. 7-110
Print functions ....................................................................................... 7-110
Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 7-111
Paper specification..................................................................................... 7-112
Matrix printer NP ................................................................................... 7-112
Thermal printer TP ................................................................................ 7-112
Receipt roll dimensions ........................................................................ 7-113
Control mark print ................................................................................. 7-113
Control mark dimensions ................................................................ 7-114
Preprinted receipts .......................................................................... 7-115
Removing/installing the components ......................................................... 7-116
Print head ............................................................................................. 7-116
Thermal array ....................................................................................... 7-117
Forms Printer TP20/TP22 ........................................................................ 7-119

TP20 .......................................................................................................... 7-119
TP22 .......................................................................................................... 7-120
Printer versions .......................................................................................... 7-121
Description............................................................................................ 7-121
How the automatic paper feed switch works ........................................ 7-122
Operator control panel ............................................................................... 7-123
Description of the operator control panel ................................................... 7-124
EJECT key............................................................................................ 7-124
TEST key .............................................................................................. 7-125
Test printout TP20 ..................................................................................... 7-125
Advanced test printout TP20...................................................................... 7-126
Test printout TP22 ..................................................................................... 7-132
Advanced test printout TP22...................................................................... 7-133
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-XV

Contents
Tables with error messages....................................................................... 7-140

Reactions in the event of an error ........................................................ 7-140
Messages, warnings and error messages of the printer ...................... 7-140
Messages at the beginning ............................................................. 7-140
Warning messages ......................................................................... 7-141
Error messages ............................................................................... 7-141
Loader messages ................................................................................. 7-144
Load function (printer)................................................................................ 7-145
Features of thermal printing unit ................................................................ 7-146
Collecting function ................................................................................ 7-147
Retract/reject function .......................................................................... 7-147
Control logic ............................................................................................... 7-147
Technical Data ..................................................................................... 7-147
Control logic connector arrangement TP20 .......................................... 7-149
Control logic connector arrangement TP22 .......................................... 7-150
TP20 sensors ....................................................................................... 7-151
TP22 sensors ....................................................................................... 7-152
Paper specification .................................................................................... 7-153
Intermediate transport TP20 ................................................................... 7-155

Functions ................................................................................................... 7-155
Retract transport ................................................................................... 7-155
Output (eject) transport ........................................................................ 7-155
Shutter .................................................................................................. 7-156
Electronics/sensors .............................................................................. 7-156
Motors and sensors ................................................................................... 7-157
Position of the motors and sensors ...................................................... 7-157
Shutter .................................................................................................. 7-158
Output transport ................................................................................... 7-159
Reject transport unit ............................................................................. 7-160
Reject transport indoor .................................................................... 7-160
Reject transport outdoor ................................................................. 7-161
Sensors ................................................................................................ 7-162
Electronics ................................................................................................. 7-163
Pin assignment ..................................................................................... 7-163
Passbook module PUxx .......................................................................... 7-165
Reiner scanner ......................................................................................... 7-167
Barcode Reader 2D BR 02 ...................................................................... 7-169

Important safety precautions ..................................................................... 7-171
Description ................................................................................................. 7-171
I-XVI CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Contents
Connecting the barcode reader ................................................................. 7-174

Factory defaults ......................................................................................... 7-175
Programming ............................................................................................. 7-175
Faults ......................................................................................................... 7-176
Test ............................................................................................................ 7-176
Technical data............................................................................................ 7-177
Electrical characteristics ....................................................................... 7-177
Optical characteristics .......................................................................... 7-177
Light source for image sensor ......................................................... 7-177
Projection (DOE) ............................................................................. 7-177
Image sensor .................................................................................. 7-178
Physical characteristics ........................................................................ 7-178
Ambient conditions ............................................................................... 7-178
Safety standards................................................................................... 7-178
Decoding .............................................................................................. 7-179
2D barcode reader ED40 ......................................................................... 7-181

Overview .................................................................................................... 7-182
Description ................................................................................................. 7-183
Technical Data ........................................................................................... 7-184
Electrical characteristics ....................................................................... 7-184
Optical characteristics .......................................................................... 7-184
Light source for the image sensor ................................................... 7-184
Projection (DOE) ............................................................................. 7-184
Image sensor .................................................................................. 7-184
Physical characteristics ........................................................................ 7-185
Ambient conditions ............................................................................... 7-185
Safety standards................................................................................... 7-185
Malfunctions ......................................................................................... 7-185
Decoding .............................................................................................. 7-186
Cash Media Dispenser (CMD-V4) ............................................................... 8-1
Cash media dispenser (CMD-V5) ................................................................ 8-3
Shutter CMD horizontal ............................................................................... 8-5

Installation ...................................................................................................... 8-6
Views ............................................................................................................. 8-7
CMD-V4 shutter ........................................................................................ 8-7
CMD-V5 shutter ...................................................................................... 8-10
Function ....................................................................................................... 8-12
Banknote removal area CMD-V4 ............................................................ 8-13
Banknote removal area CMD-V5 ............................................................ 8-13
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-XVII

Contents
Meaning of the hybrid photosensors ...................................................... 8-14

Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 8-15
Maintenance ................................................................................................ 8-15
Technical Data ............................................................................................. 8-16
Check/Cash Deposit Module (CCDM) ...................................................... 8-17
Deposit unit ................................................................................................ 8-19
Coin Dispenser Module CM2-O-4H/8H ..................................................... 8-21
Camera IDS................................................................................................... 9-1

Camera versions ............................................................................................ 9-2
Camera drivers .............................................................................................. 9-3
Technical Data ............................................................................................... 9-4
Pin assignment .............................................................................................. 9-5
Relay Panel for External Features USB 01750083012 ............................ 10-1

Description ................................................................................................... 10-1
Technical data ............................................................................................. 10-2
Description of connectors ....................................................................... 10-2
Terminal diagram ................................................................................... 10-4
Sample connection of customer feedback ............................................. 10-4
Pin assignment ....................................................................................... 10-5
Replacement................................................................................................ 10-8
Technical data ............................................................................................. 10-8
Remote Status Indicator ........................................................................... 10-9

Description ................................................................................................... 10-9
Indicators and controls............................................................................... 10-10
Pin assignment .......................................................................................... 10-11
Remote status indicator - standard ...................................................... 10-11
Remote status indicator - audio ............................................................ 10-12
Operator Panel USB (OP 04) ................................................................... 10-13

Introduction ................................................................................................ 10-13
Description of keys and indicators ............................................................. 10-16
Keys and indicators for operator panel functions ................................. 10-17
Keys and indicators for functions of the external control unit ............... 10-18
Replacing the label strips........................................................................... 10-20
Technical specifications ............................................................................. 10-22
Pin assignment ..................................................................................... 10-22
Technical data ...................................................................................... 10-24
I-XVIII CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Contents
Operator Panel 05 .................................................................................... 10-25

Connections ............................................................................................... 10-26
Operator panel 05 - with/without keypad .............................................. 10-26
Operator panel 05 - small housing ....................................................... 10-27
Important safety precautions...................................................................... 10-28
Structure and functions .............................................................................. 10-29
Settings ...................................................................................................... 10-30
Circuit diagram ........................................................................................... 10-30
Operator panel 05 with keypad .................................................................. 10-31
Keys and indicators .............................................................................. 10-31
Technical specifications ............................................................................. 10-34
Pin assignment ..................................................................................... 10-34
Technical data ...................................................................................... 10-36
General ........................................................................................... 10-36
LCD ................................................................................................. 10-37
Interfaces ........................................................................................ 10-37
Operating system support ............................................................... 10-37
Operator Panel 06 .................................................................................... 10-39

Connectors................................................................................................. 10-40
Operator Panel 06 ................................................................................ 10-40
Important safety precautions...................................................................... 10-41
Structure and functions .............................................................................. 10-42
Operating settings ...................................................................................... 10-43
Circuit diagram ........................................................................................... 10-43
Specifications of the keys .......................................................................... 10-44
Technical information ................................................................................. 10-46
Pin assignments ................................................................................... 10-46
Technical data............................................................................................ 10-48
Keyboard for the operator panel ........................................................... 10-50
Keys and indicators ......................................................................... 10-50
Pin assignments .............................................................................. 10-52
Plug-in Media Entry Indicators ............................................................... 10-53

Structure .................................................................................................... 10-53
Pin assignment .......................................................................................... 10-54
Heating control 01750190720.................................................................. 10-55

Pin assignments......................................................................................... 10-56
Control actuation points ............................................................................. 10-57
Fan control ................................................................................................. 10-57
Operational readiness display.................................................................... 10-58
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-XIX

Contents
Temperature sensor .................................................................................. 10-58

Maintenance .............................................................................................. 10-58
Test ............................................................................................................ 10-58
LED display................................................................................................ 10-59
Status and error displays...................................................................... 10-59
Pin assignments ........................................................................................ 10-60
Temperature sensor ............................................................................. 10-60
Fan connections 1, 2 ............................................................................ 10-60
UPS Powerware 5115 .............................................................................. 10-61

Important safety precautions ..................................................................... 10-62
Function elements ..................................................................................... 10-63
Front view ............................................................................................. 10-63
Rear view (120 V version) .................................................................... 10-64
Rear view (230 V version) .................................................................... 10-65
Initial operation .......................................................................................... 10-66
Switching on .............................................................................................. 10-67
Switching off .............................................................................................. 10-67
Standby mode............................................................................................ 10-68
Self-test...................................................................................................... 10-68
Voltage selection switch ............................................................................ 10-69
Indications/Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 10-70
Resetting the alarm .............................................................................. 10-70
Malfunctions ......................................................................................... 10-71
Pin assignments ........................................................................................ 10-76
V.24 ...................................................................................................... 10-76
USB ...................................................................................................... 10-77
Technical data ........................................................................................... 10-78
Maintenance .............................................................................................. 10-79
Replace the battery.................................................................................... 10-80
Removal/installation of components ....................................................... 11-1

Device views ................................................................................................ 11-1
Power supply .......................................................................................... 11-2
Customer panel pulled out ..................................................................... 11-3
Door of operating unit open .................................................................... 11-4
Safe opened ........................................................................................... 11-5
Pulling out / pushing in the Cash Media Dispenser ................................ 11-6
Lock of the Operator Panel window ............................................................. 11-7
Door lock of the operating unit ..................................................................... 11-7
Fan in the operating unit door ...................................................................... 11-8
Fan in the operating unit .............................................................................. 11-8
Gas pressure spring of operating unit door ............................................... 11-10
I-XX CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Contents
Power distributor ........................................................................................ 11-11

External DVD drive .................................................................................... 11-12
Central power supply unit .......................................................................... 11-14
System unit (PC) ........................................................................................ 11-15
Receipt printer............................................................................................ 11-16
Journal printer ............................................................................................ 11-17
Capacitor.................................................................................................... 11-18
Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x) .......................................................... 11-19
Disassembling the CIM board .............................................................. 11-20
Operator panel 05 ...................................................................................... 11-22
24 V distributor ........................................................................................... 11-23
Special Electronics CTM ............................................................................ 11-24
Heating unit ................................................................................................ 11-26
Heating unit (left side)........................................................................... 11-26
Heating unit (right side) ........................................................................ 11-27
Heating control ..................................................................................... 11-28
Relay panel for external features ............................................................... 11-28
CMD output transport................................................................................. 11-29
CMD stacker .............................................................................................. 11-30
CMD controller ........................................................................................... 11-33
CMD distributor board ................................................................................ 11-33
CMD dispensing units ................................................................................ 11-36
Lower dispensing unit ........................................................................... 11-37
Upper dispensing unit ........................................................................... 11-38
CMD chassis .............................................................................................. 11-40
Logo lighting............................................................................................... 11-42
Audio loudspeakers ................................................................................... 11-43
Customer panel light .................................................................................. 11-44
System loudspeaker .................................................................................. 11-44
Console Electronics CTM .......................................................................... 11-45
Portrait camera .......................................................................................... 11-46
Cash slot camera ....................................................................................... 11-46
Monitor fan ................................................................................................. 11-47
LCD monitor ............................................................................................... 11-48
Pane/Soft keys ........................................................................................... 11-48
Touch controller ......................................................................................... 11-50
Headphone jack ......................................................................................... 11-52
Optical indicator ......................................................................................... 11-53
CMD shutter ............................................................................................... 11-54
Keypad (EPP V6) ....................................................................................... 11-55
ASKIM module ........................................................................................... 11-56
ASKIM sensor ....................................................................................... 11-56
Anti-skimming base unit ....................................................................... 11-57
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-XXI

Contents
Scanner ..................................................................................................... 11-58

Shutter of presenter ................................................................................... 11-59
CCDM shutter ............................................................................................ 11-60
CCDM head module .................................................................................. 11-62
Safety Shutter form printer TP20 ............................................................... 11-65
Forms printer TP20 .................................................................................... 11-66
Shutter .................................................................................................. 11-67
Reject transport unit ............................................................................. 11-68
Output transport ................................................................................... 11-70
Logic board........................................................................................... 11-72
Power supply unit ................................................................................. 11-73
Uninterruptible Power Supply .................................................................... 11-74
Barcode reader .......................................................................................... 11-74
Hybrid DIP reader ...................................................................................... 11-75
Alpha combi keyboard with trackball ......................................................... 11-76
Passbook module PMxx ............................................................................ 11-76
Card reject module .................................................................................... 11-76
Forms printer TP20 .................................................................................... 11-76
Installing/removing the printer .............................................................. 11-77
Installing/removing the logic board ....................................................... 11-78
Installing/removing the control panel .................................................... 11-81
Installing/removing the thermal array ................................................... 11-82
Maintenance and service .......................................................................... 12-1

Test options ................................................................................................. 12-2
Maintenance ................................................................................................ 12-2
Journal printer ........................................................................................ 12-2
Receipt printer ........................................................................................ 12-3
Card reader ............................................................................................ 12-3
Hybrid DIP reader ................................................................................... 12-3
Keypad (EPP) ......................................................................................... 12-4
Soft key keypads and operator panel ..................................................... 12-4
CIM ......................................................................................................... 12-4
System unit (PC) .................................................................................... 12-5
Housing .................................................................................................. 12-5
Portrait camera/cash slot camera/IDCU camera .................................... 12-5
Heater ..................................................................................................... 12-5
Optical indicators .................................................................................... 12-5
Fan ......................................................................................................... 12-5
Monitors, LCD boxes .............................................................................. 12-6
General ................................................................................................... 12-6
Approved maintenance products............................................................ 12-7
I-XXII CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Contents
Index.............................................................................................................. II-1
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-XXIII

Contents
I-XXIV CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Abbreviations
CE Communaut Europenne
A (European Community)
Declaration of Conformity
AC Alternating Current
CEE Certification of Electrical
ACPI Advanced Configuration
Equipment
and Power Interface
CEN Comit Europen de
ACT Advanced Card Trap
Normalisation (European
ASKIM Anti-skimming module Committee for
AT Advanced technology Standardization)
ATAPI AT bus attachment packet CFR Code of Federal
interface Regulation
ATX AT bus extended CHD Card Handling Device
CIM Card Identification Module
B (security module)
BIOS Basic Input Output System CMD-V4 Cash Media

Dispenser Version 4
BoF - Bottom of Form Paper out
sensor CMD-V5 Cash Media
dispenser version 5
bps Bits per second
CMOS Complementory Metal
BSMI Bureau of Standards, Oxide Semiconductor
Metrology and Inspection
CNS Chinese National
Standards
C
COM Communication Port of PC
CCDM Check/Cash Deposit cpi Characters per inch
Module
cpl Characters per line
CCDM Check / cash deposit
CPU Central Processing Unit
module
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
CD-ROM Compact Disk -
Read-Only Memory CSA Canadian Standards
Association
CD-ROM Compact Disk -
Read Only Memory CTS Clear To Send
CD Compact Disk
CDRH Center for Devices and
Radiological Health
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-XXV

Abbreviations
D E
D-SUB Connector series D, ec eurocheque
subminiature ECP Extended Capability Port
DC Direct Current EEC European Economic
DCD Data Carrier Detect Community
DDC Display Data Channel EEPROM Electrical
DDR Double Data Rate Erasable Programmable
Read Only Memory
DIMM Dual Inline Memory
Module EMA Intruder alarm system
DIN German Institute for EMC Electromagnetic
Standardization Compatibility
DIP Dual-in-line package EMV Europay, MasterCard,
Visa
DMI Desktop Management
Interface EN European standard
DOE Diffractive Optical Element EPLD Erasable Programmable
Logic Device
DOS Disk Operating System
EPP Encrypted PIN Pad
dpi Dots per inch
EPP Enhanced Parallel Port
DPS Digital photosensor
EPROM Erasable Programmable
DSP Diagnostic and Service
Read Only Memory
Package
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
DSR Data Set Ready
DT Data Transmission F
DTR Data Terminal Ready
FCC Federal Communications
DVD-ROM Compact Disk -
Commission
Read Only Memory
FCK Firmware Compatibility
DVD-ROM Digital Versatile
Key
Disk - Read Only Memory
fps Frames per second
DVD Digital Versatile Disk
FRU Field Repair Unit
DVI-D Digital Visual Interface,
Digital only out-/input FW Firmware
DVI-I Digital Visual Interface,
Integrated, analog and
G
digital out-/input GmbH Limited liability company
DVI Data terminal ready GND Ground
DVI Digital Visual Interface
I-XXVI CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Abbreviations
H LCF Light Control Film

LED Light-Emitting Diode
HDD Hard Disk Drive
LINUX Linus Torvalds UNIX
HiCo High Coercive (high-
coercive cards)) LVDS Low Voltage Differential
Signaling
HW conf Hardware
configuration
M
I MEI Media Entry Indicator
IBM International Business MK Mark detection
Machines MM Modular Marker of ID card
IC Integrated Circuit (evaluation by means of
security modules like MM
ICES Interference Causing
box or CIM 86)
Equipment Standards
MM Modular Marker of ID card
ICES Interference-Causing
(evaluation by means of
Equipment Standards
security modules like MM
ID Identification box or CIM86 or CIM06)
IDCU ID Card Unit MM Modular Marker of ID card
IDE Integrated Drive (evaluation by means of
Electronics security modules such as
IEC International MM box or CIM 86)
Electrotechnical
Commission N
IP International Protection NC not connected
IRQ Interrupt Request ND Matrix printer
ISO International Organization NP Needle (Matrix) Printer
for Standardization
NTSC National Television
IT Information Technology System Committee
NVRAM Nonvolatile Random
K Access Memory
KDIAG Components Diagnostics
O
L OCCT OEM Component
LAN Local Area Network conversion table
LCD Liquid Crystal Display OEM Original Equipment
Manufacturer
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-XXVII

Abbreviations
OP Operator Panel RoHS Restriction of the use of

certain Hazardous
P Substances (directive on
restricting the use of
PAL Phase Alternation by Line certain harmful
PC Personal Computer substances in electrical
(system unit of the device) and electronic equipment)
PC Personal Computer ROM Read Only Memory
(system unit of device) RSI Remote Status Indicator
PC Personal Computer RTS Request To Send
(system unit of the device)
RxD Receive Data
PC Personal Computer
RxD Received Data
(Systemeinheit des
Gertes)
S
PCI Peripheral Component
Interconnect SAM Security Access Module
PCS Print Contrast Sensitivity (part of cashless payment)
PDIAG Peripheral Component SDIAG System (PC) Diagnostics
Interconnect SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic
PDIAG Periphery Diagnostics Random Access Memory
PE Paper-out sensor SE Special Electronics
PGA Programmable Gate Array SELV Safety Extra-Low Voltage
PIN Personal identification SLE Systemic Lupus
number Erythemosus
PnP Plug and Play SOP Service and Operating
Program
PrA Presenter output
SRAM Static Random Access
ProPxD Platform Extended
Memory
Diagnostic
SVGA Static random access
PS Photosensor
memory
PWE Weekend sensor
SVGA Super Video Graphics
Adapter
R
R/W Read/Write T
RAM Random Access Memory T/SOP Technical Service and
RGB Red, Green, Blue Operating Program
RI Ring Indicator TFT Thin Film Transistor
I-XXVIII CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Abbreviations
TH Thermal printer ZKA Zentraler Kreditausschuss

TMDS Transition Minimized (Wide area network)
Differential Signaling ZSE Central Special
TN network Power supply Electronics Module
network in accordance
with EN 60950
TOF Top of Form (TOF mark:
black mark for paper
control)
TP Thermal Printer
TxD Transmit Data
TxD Transmitted Data
U
UL Underwriters Laboratories
Inc.
UPS Uninterruptible Power
Supply
USB Universal Serial Bus
V
VGA Video Graphics Adapter
W
WN WINCOR NIXDORF
WN WINCOR NIXDORF
International GmbH
X
XGA Video graphics adapter
XGA Extended Graphics
Adapter
Z
ZKA Central Credit Committee
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-XXIX

Abbreviations
I-XXX CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Introduction
This service manual has been compiled for authorized service personnel only.
The operating and installation instructions should also be read since certain
details are only described in these instructions.
Symbols used in this manual

Text following a dash represents an item in a list.
" " Text in quotation marks refers to other chapters or sections in this
document.
Text following this symbol describes actions to be performed in the
specified order.
Text following this symbol should be given special attention in order to

avoid damage and injury.
i Text following this symbol contains general information to facilitate use

of the device and help avoid operating errors.
Important Safety Instructions

Please read the following notes carefully before conducting any work
on the device.
Be careful not to injure your head when the customer panel or the
operating unit door are lifted up!
Be careful not to injure your head when the customer panel is raised!
Be careful not to injure your head when the operating unit door is lifted up!
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 - Service Manual 1-1

Important Safety Instructions Introduction
Make sure no water/liquids (e.g. rain, snow, etc.) get into the open
device and the exposed components, especially under adverse
weather conditions, as this could pose a danger to your life.
Make sure you take suitable precautions when working on an open
device (e.g. by covering components where necessary) so that fluid
cannot enter the open device.
Installation note
When installing the device or doing any work on the device make sure that
the device is not connected to power.
Remove the shipping restraints inside the unit which secure its components
during transportation if necessary for the installation (see enclosed
information sheet).
General safety precautions

This device complies with the relevant safety regulations for information
processing equipment.
For reasons of stability, the device must be screwed to the load-bearing
substructure of the installation site or mounted on a suitable base.
When moving the device from a cold to a warm environment, do not
operate it for at least two hours to prevent possible damage caused by
condensation. do not operate it for at least two hours to prevent possible
damage caused by condensation.
Use only the original packaging material to transport the device.
Note the warning and information labels on the device.
Unless otherwise stated, grasp the components only by the green ledge
when handling them.
The device is equipped with a safety-tested power cable. The. which must
be connected only to a suitable grounded outlet.
Always hold the plug when removing the power cable. Never pull the cable
itself.
Lay all connecting cables in such a way that they will not be stepped on or
tripped over, damaged or crushed in any way.
1-2 CINEO C2560 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Introduction Important Safety Instructions
Have damaged power cables replaced immediately.

Make sure that there is always free access to the sockets used or to the
electrical circuit-breakers of the house installation.
In case of an emergency (e.g. damaged housing, controls or power cables,
water or foreign objects in the device), proceed as follows:
Deactivate the device immediately by:
Switching off the automatic circuit breaker or removing the fuse insert
from the fuse holder in the distribution box of the buildings electricity
distribution cabinet.
Disconnecting the plug of the power supply cable from the grounded
socket in the building installation;
Switching off the ON/OFF switch on the power distributor.
Interrupting the power connection, if there is one, between the UPS
(uninterruptible power supply) and the device (see section "General
power interruption").
Never connect or disconnect data transmission lines during a

thunderstorm.
Always keep the devices vents free from obstruction to ensure proper air
circulation and to prevent malfunctions resulting from overheating.
Only use accessories and extension components that have been approved
by us. Nonobservance can result in damage to the system or violations of
regulation concerning safety, radio interference and ergonomic
requirements.
Note that there are only safety extra-low voltage circuits (SELV circuits) if
you want to feed voltage from an external source into prepared cables to
install additional electronics (e. g. EMA connection, relay panel for external
features).
Only use cleaning agents approved by WINCOR NIXDORF
International GmbH for cleaning and maintenance (see chapter
"Maintenance and service").

Important Safety Instructions Introduction
Repairs
Repair work may only be carried out by authorized personnel.
Unauthorized opening of the device or repair work carried out

improperly could result in considerable danger to the user.
In case of noncompliance, WINCOR NIXDORF International GmbH

excludes all liability.
Lithium batteries
The handling and the replacement should only be performed by

authorized service personnel who were trained by the
WINCOR NIXDORF International GmbH.
There is danger of fire or explosion if the batteries are handled

improperly. It is therefore important to note the following points:
Avoid short circuits

Never recharge the battery
Avoid temperatures above +100 C (+212 F).
Do not try to open the battery by force
Do not allow the battery to come in contact with water or fire
The battery should only be replaced with the same or an equivalent

type recommended by WINCOR NIXDORF International GmbH (see
chapter Appendix, section Consumables).
Dispose of used batteries in compliance with national regulations and
the manufacturer's specifications.
Start-up
i Before operating the device, remove all parts inside of it which secure
its components during transportation or check whether they have been
removed (see info sheet supplied with the device).

Introduction General power interruption
General power interruption

i A general power interrupt has the following effects:
Transactions in progress are canceled immediately (exception: ID
card transport).
Dispensed banknotes remain in the transport routes of the cash
media dispenser. They will be transported to the collecting tray or
the reject cassette of the cash media dispenser after the device has
been turned on again.
Depending on the parameter setting, ID cards are either output,
retained or transported to the card reject tray. This transaction will
be properly completed.
i If the devices heating unit is out of service, be sure to comply with the
environmental conditions for storage (see chapter Appendix, section
Environmental conditions).
Levels must not fall below or exceed these conditions because
irreparable damage may be caused to the device otherwise. In the
event of non-compliance, WINCOR NIXDORF International GmbH
shall not assume liability for any damage that is caused to the device.
Be careful not to injure your head when the door of the operating unit
is raised!

General power interruption Introduction
Open the door of the operating unit (see chapter "Basic Operation).
Switch off the power switch on the power distributor (1).

Detach the rubber plug of the power cable (power supply input) from the
power distributor (2).

Introduction General power interruption
Open the safe door (see chapter "Basic Operation", section

"Opening/closing the safe door").
In order to disconnect the entire
device from the network, disconnect
the coupling of the power cable (1) in
the safe.
To ensure the entire device is disconnected from the power supply you
should also disconnect the power supply cable from the electrical socket
installed onsite, or interrupt the power supply by switching off the circuit-
breaker or removing the fuse from the distributor box of the house
installation.
For devices with UPS (optional):
Switch off the UPS.

How to switch off the UPS depends on the UPS unit used.
The exact power-off procedure is described in the chapter
"Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)".

Structure of the manual Introduction
Structure of the manual
Outline
The chapter "Introduction" describes the important safety precautions and the
general power interruption. It also gives an overview of the possible functions
of the device.
The features are also described in the chapter "Introduction" in the section
"Technical data".
In the chapter "Function and Integration" you will find the block diagrams and a
short description of the main functions of the device.
This is followed by the chapters describing the components which are used or
can be used.
The next chapter "Removal/Installation of Components" provides detailed
information on how to remove and install each component.
Finally, the chapter "Maintenance and Service" contains information on
maintenance work to be carried out regularly.
Supplementary documentation
For the operation and installation of the device, separate manuals are
available in several languages.
These manuals can be ordered from our print partner. They are also available
in the intranet.
Usually the manufacturers' original manuals for OEM components are included
in the shipment. They may contain more detailed information.

Introduction Description of the device
Manual release
Since production began, some components have been replaced for various
reasons (e. g. progress in technology).
Often the hardware replacement does not result in a changed construction of
the device (mechanical or electrical) or the functional integration.
In this case, the new component is added to the service manual and the
previous component remains in the respective chapter.
If the integration of a new component results in changes, the corresponding
chapters will be adapted (e. g. block diagrams, removal/installation, preventive
maintenance, etc.).
Description of the device
Function and use

The CINEO C2560 is an automated teller machine which has been designed
for outdoor installation. The device is equipped with a safe with different
security levels and a cash media dispenser (CMD) for a maximum of five cash-
out cassettes and one reject/retract cassette. The CINEO C2560 is supplied
with a CMD V4 or a CMD V5 and the ProCash 8150 is supplied with a CMD
V4. The operation of the devices is identical for the most part. Differences in
the procedure for the various systems will be pointed out.
The CINEO C2560 is based on a modular system which, apart from the basic
functions of the cash output and information display, can be extended with the
following functions:
Loading and unloading electronic purse data
Processing passbooks
Printing receipts or other documents
Depositing banknotes and papers (envelope deposit or CCDM)
Reading of bar codes

Service functionings Introduction
The functions are implemented by the use of components which can be

combined as needed. They are described in detail in the following
chapters.
Service functionings
i The tests of the components are performed via the Diagnostics &
services plattform (D&S) or via the T/SOP.
KDIAG Qualifying plus is only used transitionally or for test tool
specialists.
HW Inventory
A considerable increase of efficiency in the service processes is the goal of
the HW Inventory function (electronically readable inventory data of the FRU).
Nearly all field-replaceable units (FRU) are electronically identifiable via the
stored data in the component.
HW Inventory data should be available for operators or technicians in remote
supervised systems as well as on-site at the system.
The data quantity depends on the type and on the manufacturer of the
component.
This data or a subset of it is also printed on the new module label as plain text
/ 1D barcode and 2D data matrix code. The WNS 60414 standard describes
the new FRU module labels.
The data is saved on the system unit (PC) in the form of an encrypted xml file.
This file can be displayed on the device via T/SOP and is used for data
transmission to the CRM system.

Introduction Service functionings
With respect to HW Inventory data, a distinction is made between two FRU

groups:

Complex components
These FRUs are preponderantly of WN manufacture, e.g. electromechanical
RM3 cash components, main and component electronics, etc.
An EEPROM with defined structure is integrated here with correspondingly
extensive data that is primarily generated during production. The EEPROM is
located either directly on the control logic or with components on the chassis
that do not have logic boards of their own and is wired with the rest of the
sensors and actuating elements.
The so-called data triple of the FRU is the core component.
Part number
Serial number
Revision level
Other data such as operating data, repair data, manufacturer parameters or
configuration data is stored, depending on the FRU.
If FRUs are loaded and operated with the WN firmware, there is always a
Firmware Compatibility Key (FCK) in the EEPROM that displays the
mechanics and electronics configuration of the FRU. This means the firmware
can react to specific features of the electronics and mechanics.
With exception of the content

Module State (revision level)
Allocation Number (allocation code when there are several POS/ATS at
one control computer)
Position Code (allocation code for sidecars)
HW Inventory data in the field cannot be modified.

Simple Components
These FRUs are preponderantly OEM purchased parts, e.g. card readers,
monitors, scanners, etc.
The minimum requirement is the availability of the data triple of the FRU.
Part number
Serial number
Revision level
The data triple is generated from the manufacturer information saved in the
module. If the manufacturer does not save the WN part number directly in the
EEPROM, it will be generated for inventorying using a reference table (OCCT).
Die OEM Component Conversion Table (OCCT) is saved on the system unit
(PC) of the basic system. It needs to be updated with every new release of
FRUs. This is processed at the system by the D+S platform or T/SOP, if
required.
Only the revision level of the Simple Components in the HW Inventory data
can be updated in the field.
The electronic readability is based on the functioning of the D&S platform that
is delivered with each system as a standard component of the platform
software. The interface to the D+S platform is implemented through the T/SOP
in conjunction with a graphic screen.
To guarantee matches between the electronic data and the module

i label data, no electronics or EEPROMs in the FRU in the field should
be removed or replaced if they are not themselves defined or available
as an FRU.
The FCK that as a result no longer matches the hardware/electronics
can lead to a failure or undefined erroneous function of the FRU.

CrypTA
Testsoftware for systems with ProBase

With the introduction of the CINEO systems, the previous software structure
with CSC/W as lowest driver layer is replaced by the program package
ProBase.
ProBase includes the functioning of the CSC/W and J/DD as well as the XFS
layer. As a service-relevant function serves the D&S platform which is a base
for all service functions. On top of that is the T/SOP, which acts as a local user
interface between system and technician. It consists all the necessary
functions for testing and diagnostics. So the T/SOP replaces the usage of
KDIAG which was necessary in the predecessors.
T/SOP and D&S platform are integral parts of each installation.
Access protection for T/SOP functions and test software

With the introduction of the CINEO and ProCash 8xx0 series of products, the
fusing of the test function against unauthorized usage was also introduced.
All functions regarding to the test software are encrypted with the CrypTa
security system.
This is based on a USB dongle called CrypTA stick as a key for the technician.
In this CrypTA stick are the for the technician because of his level of training
important individual rights for the usage of the available test functions saved.
The rights management is processed centralized by Wincor Nixdorf.
Authorization in the T/SOP
A test function for the operator which is not protected by CrypTA is available
for all components. Further test functions need an authorization of the user for
the T/SOP as well as a assignment of the corresponding rights.
Usage of offline test tools like KDIAG or Qualifyingplus
This tools are always encrypted and need in every case the authorization
through CrypTA as well as the assignment of the corresponding rights.

Further information to the CrypTA security systems are avaiable in the intra
and partner net under the keyword "CrypTA".
D&S
Trusted computing / Safe channel

In the case of the CINEO systems in the self-service environment,
communication between the components provided for this option (e.g. RM3
Controller, card reader CHD V3x (CHD V2CU)) and the system unit (PC) can
be optionally secured with the "safe channel".
To accomplish this, the components suitable for this function (e.g. RM3
controller with installed chip card) and the PC provide each other with
certificates for reciprocal authorization. In order to ensure that the certificates
on the PC side cannot be used and copied at will, they are protected by a key
in the TPM module on the system board of the PC.
In order for this to work, the PCs are customized at the factory, which means
that the key in the TPM chip and the necessary certificates are created.
For security reasons, the key never leaves the TPM chip.

Procedures
To guarantee the operability of the safe channel, it is necessary that
mandatory defined procedures be observed during initial operation and
servicing.
Initial start-up
The following graphic shows the general process at the time of initial start-up
of an RM3 device with the safe channel.

The following steps are necessary

Where Step Comment
Field ProSetup (OS + First the operating system with all
driver + IPP) necessary drivers are installed at the
customer site. This also includes the
Infineon Professional package. This
takes place preferably integrated via
ProSetup.
Field Installation and ProBase is installed and (on the basis
configuration of of HWCONF) configured.
ProBase
During configuration, the keystore is
retrieved from the flash of the PC by
default and the necessary configuration
of the IPP is executed.
Any keystore that may possibly already
be present is not overwritten.
Field T/SOP import As an alternative to the precious point,
keystore, TPM Restore information can also be
config from flash selected from the flash via the T/SOP.
Field T/SOP BKR The basekey replacement with the
respective component (e.g. RM3) is
initiated via a T/SOP function.
Communication with the respective
component will function afterwards.
Depending on the configuration and
device, the basekey replacement can
also take place automatically without
the support of the T/SOP.
For other cases of installation, e.g. installation via image tanking, the
processes must be modified accordingly.

Complete PC replacement
The "Complete PC replacement" use case requires the same handling as with
the first installation.
The popular shortcut performed during the service process for replacing the
PC in the field, by which the old hard disk is reinstalled in the new PC,
corresponds to the service process "Replacement of the system board
(motherboard)".

Replacement of the system board (motherboard)
After the replacement of the system board. the keystore that matches the
system board must be restored from the flash. After a second basekey
replacement, the safe channel also runs to the respective component (e.g.
RM3).
This procedure also applies if the whole PC is replaced WITHOUT the hard
disk.
Hard disk replacement
The "Hard disk replacement" use case requires the same handling as with the
first installation.
Component replacement (e.g. RM3 Controller)
If the component (e.g. RM3 controller) is replaced, then the Smartcard is
removed from the defective component and installed in the new component.
The keys remain unchanged, so there are no dependencies on the safe
channel.
Smart card replacement

When a Smartcard is replaced, only the basekey replacement needs to be

performed before operation is resumed. The basekey replacement takes place
automatically with some devices (e.g. CHD V3x (CHD V2CU) and
configurations.

Importing the truststore

The PC becomes personalized with individual certificates during production.
These certificates are stored in a truststore. This truststore cannot be used
except with the TPM of the same PC.
The truststore is stored in the flash memory of the system board in order to
ensure that the it is not lost after a disk fault or a reinstallation of the operating
system. In order for it to be able to be used, it must be evacuated back to the
hard disk and introduced to the software; this procedure is called "restore".
There are two ways for this
Way Meaning
With If ProBase/C or ProBase/J is stalled and the following
ProBase/C or conditions are fulfilled, the restore runs automatically during
ProBase/J the installation:
installation - TPM=YES is set in the HW_CONF.INI and the automatic
configuration is active and
- the Infineon Professional package is installed
via T/SOP After the authorization at the T/SOP, Restore can be
selected in the device functions.
Automatic at ProBase/C1.1/30 can also be configured in such a way that
the time of the restore automatically takes place if necessary at the
system start time of system start.
The Restore must also be carried out when TPM Simulation is used, although
the above steps do not take place.

Basekey replacement
In the following situations, a basekey replacement must be performed so that
the two communication partners (component (e.g. RM3 controller) and system
PC) can exchange current cryptographic keys and converse with one other:
At the time of initial start-up
After a restore procedure, e.g. after a reinstallation of the operating system
After a chip card replacement in the component (e.g. RM3 controller).
After utilization of the component (e.g. RM3) from a different PC.

After the authorization at the T/SOP, the BKR can be selected among the
device functions with some devices (e.g. RM3).

Handling the TPM

BIOS setting
When the PC leaves the factory, the TPM chip is in the "Enabled and
Activated" state.
Any change in this status (in the BIOS as well as via the Infineon Professional
package) will cause the deletion of the secret key in the TPM, so that the PC is
no longer usable for capacity protection between RM3 and system PC. A
change of this status can also occur if the TPM itself assumes that it is under
attack and deletes its content for security reasons.
If someone deactivates or clears the TPM and reactivates it afterwards, a
secret key will again be in the TPM, but this one will no longer match the
certificates in the flash memory of the system board. A check to see whether
the key is still correct can currently only take place at the time of the initial
operation of the component with the safe channel.

Every PC has a individual key in the TPM. This means that the key and
certificate memory on the hard disk also require an update in the event of a
system board replacement. To accomplish this, the restore function that is
included in the product range of ProBase 1.1/10 or higher must be used to
copy the key and certificate memory to the hard disk from the flash of the
system board, see section "Importing the truststore".
An update of the BIOS or a battery replacement has no influence on the
personalization and the state of the TPM.
i The correct time must be set again after a battery replacement.

Affected PCs
Personalization applies at a minimum to the following EPC_A4, EPC A4 AMT
and EPC_4G PCs/MBs:
Swap PC EPC_A4 Cel440 TPMen 01750171737
Swap PC EPC_A4 DualCore-E5300 TPMen 01750190275
Swap PC EPC_A4 Core2Duo-E8400 TPMen 01750171740
System board EPC A4 Q45 (TPM) 01750186510
Swap-PC EPC_4G E1500 TPMen 01750225840
System board D305 (TPM) 01750221392
i An additional model with the same performance data, but without

personalization and without an active TPM chip, exists for some of the
PCs listed above.
Qualifying Plus
The TPM is not relevant for the utilization of Qualifying Plus. A special CrypTA-
encrypted key memory is used for this purpose.

Technical Data Introduction
Technical Data
General Installation Conditions
Electrical characteristics of the supply network

Supply voltage range: 110 - 120 V 220 - 240 V
Rated frequency: 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Network type: TN (network with PE TN (network with PE
conductor) conductor)
Permissible tolerance for
rated voltage: -10 % to +6% -10 % to +6%
Permissible tolerance for
rated frequency: 1 % 1 %

Introduction Technical Data
Device conditions
110 - 120 V 220 - 240 V
Idle mode Operation Idle mode Operation
(maximum) (maximum)
without UPS
Rated current 1.55 A 2.65 A 0.81 A 1.32 A
consumption
Apparent power 167 VA 255 VA 185 VA 315 VA
consumption
Active power 154 W 230 W 150 W 225 W
Power factor 0.92 0.97 0.81 0.78
with UPS
Rated current 1.35 A 3.45 A 1.21 A 1.72 A
consumption
Apparent power 257 VA 345 VA 275 VA 405 VA
consumption
Active power 244 W 320 W 240 W 315 W
Power factor 0.83 0.83 0.76 0.76
Heating 1
(without device)
Rated current 4.36 A 2.17 A
consumption
Active power 500 W 500 W

110 - 120 V 220 - 240 V

Idle Operation Idle Operation
mode (maximum) mode (maximum)
Leakage current <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA
Protection class I I I I
Type of system Country-specific safety Country-specific safety

connection (wall plug plug
outlet)*:
CEE plug in acc. with CEE plug in acc. with
IEC 60309 IEC 60309
Fuse
Device/air Fuse Fuse
conditioner: 10 A inert or 10 A inert or
circuit breaker circuit breaker
16 A 16 A
Heating 1 Fuse Fuse
10 A inert or 10 A inert or
circuit breaker circuit breaker
16 A 16 A
Degree of protection in
acc. with EN 60529:
Outdoors: IP54 IP54
Indoors: IP20 IP20
* If an UPS is used (220240V only), the CINEO C2560 should be

connected only with a CEE plug.

Installation specifications
CINEO C2560
Dimensions: 4-cassette dispenser 5-cassette dispenser

Height: 1533 mm (60.35") 1675 mm (65.95")
Width: 792 mm (31.18") 792 mm (31.18")
Depth: 848 mm (33.39") 848 mm (33.39")
Depth with 41 mm
(1.61") tunnel: 1251 mm (49.25") 1251 mm (49.25")
Operation and
maintenance space: 2.36 m (25.40 ft) 2.36 m (25.40 ft)
Device weight with

41 mm (1.61") tunnel:
UL Safe: 935 kg 979 kg
(2061.32 lbs.) (2158.32 lbs.)
CEN L4 safe: 1065 kg -
(2347.92 lbs)
CEN III safe: 1135 kg 1185 kg
(2502.25 lbs.) (2612.48 lbs.)
CEN IV safe: 1155 kg 1215 kg
(3546.40 lbs.) (2678.62 lbs.)
Surface load:
UL Safe: 15.73 kN/m 16.47 kN/m
(2.28 lbf/in) (2.38 lbf/in)
CEN L4 safe: 17.92 kN/m -
(2.60 lbf/in)
CEN III safe: 19.09 kN/m 19.94 kN/m
(2.77 lbf/in) (2.89 lbf/in)
CEN IV safe: 19.43 kN/m 20.44 kN/m
(2.82 lbf/in) (2.96 lbf/in)
i For detailed information on dimensions please refer to the Installation

Manual, chapter "Planning the Installation".

CINEO C2560 EX Gas
Dimensions: 4-cassette 5-cassette

dispenser dispenser
Height: 1533 mm 1675 mm
(60.35 ") (65.95 ")
Width: 792 mm 792 mm
(31.18 ") (31.18 ")
Depth: 848 mm 848 mm
(33.39 ") (33.39 ")
Depth with 41 mm (1.61") 1251 mm 1251 mm
tunnel: (49.25 ") (49.25 ")
Operation and maintenance space: 2.38 m 2.38 m

(25.62 ft) (25.62 ft)
Device weight with 41 mm (1.61")

tunnel:
CEN III EX Gas safe: 1285 kg
(2832.94 lbs.)
CEN IV EX Gas safe: - 1395 kg
(3075.45 lbs.)
Surface load
CEN III EX Gas safe: 20.44 kN/m -
(2.96 lbf/in)
CEN IV EX Gas safe: - 22.19 kN/m
(3.22 lbf/in)
i For detailed information on dimensions please refer to the installation

guide, chapter "Planning the Installation".

Environmental conditions
i The product is intended for use in an environment with a degree of

contamination of 2.
Fan capacity: 119 m3/h (4202.40 ft/h)
Heat dissipation: 210W
*dependent on temperature
Climatic environmental conditions pursuant to EN 60721
Air temperature Relative air humidity

C %r.h.
Operation:* +5 to +35 10 to 85
Operation -40 to +50 5 to 85
(outdoors):
Limit range of +5 to +40 10 to 85
operation:**
Transport: -25 to +60 15 to 98
Storage: +5 to +40 5 to 85
*The temperature value of + 35 C (+ 95 F) deviates from the value of the

standard (+ 32 C (+ 89.6 F)).
** In the limit range the device may only be operated for a short period of
time.
Mechanical environmental conditions in accordance with EN 60721
Class Remarks
Operation 3M2 Building without significant vibrations caused
by other objects
Transport (in 2M2 All types of trucks and trailers, as well as rail
original packing) and air transport
Storage (in original 1M3 Noticeable vibration and bumps caused for
packaging) example by machines or passing vehicles


Introduction Compliance with Standards and Certifications
Noise emission in acc. with EN 27779
Noise rating Idle mode Operation *

Pursuant to ISO 9296
Sound power level LWAd 5.5 B 6.5 B
Workplace-related sound pressure level
LpAm (at adjacent workplace) 41 dB 51 dB
* typical operating cycle
i Noise emissions should be taken into account when selecting the

installation site.
Fans or the noise level associated with a transaction can be perceived
as disruptive when standing in the vicinity of the device when it is in
operation; these noises may have to be reduced through sound
protection measures (e.g. sound insulating walls etc.).
They must comply with the environmental conditions that apply to the
specific device (see above) and the maintenance areas (see chapter
"Planning the Installation", section "Space required for operation and
maintenance" in the installation guide).
Compliance with Standards and

Certifications
Standards met
Safety standards: IEC 60950,
EN 60950,
CSA C22.2-60950,
UL 60950,
BSMI Standard CNS 14336
EMC standards: EN 55022 / B,

EN 55024,

Compliance with Standards and Certifications Introduction
FCC CFR 47, part 15, subpart B, class A,

ICES-003 (CSA 108.8),
BSMI-Standard CNS 13438 class B
Conformity
The CE mark of conformity attached to the product or its package indicates
that the product complies with the requirements of the following EC directives:
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EC
The corresponding statement of compliance has been issued by:
Heinz-Nixdorf-Ring 1
33106 Paderborn
Germany
Notes concerning radio interference suppression

and electrical safety
All other devices connected to this product must comply with the EMC
Directive 89/336/EEC including amending directive 93/68/EEC (as of
7/20/2009 EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and the Low Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC including amending directive 93/68/EEC (as of 1/16/2007 Low
Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC).
Certification for data transmission

The certification number or CE mark of the data transmission module (if
available) is attached to the DT card or to the housing of the system unit.

Introduction Compliance with Standards and Certifications
FCC rules and Canadian Standard ICES - 003

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules and Canadian
Standard ICES - 003. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operating in a
commercial environment. The equipment generates, uses and can radiate high
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference
at his own expense.
UL 291, Level 1 (security Container)

In order to meet guideline UL 291, ensure the following during installation:
The unit must be connected to a grounded receptacle.
For a free-standing installation the security container of the ATM shall be
anchored in accordance with this instruction, either using the listed
anchoring devices or using similar devices. Each anchoring device shall
withstand a 22,000 pound (97,861 N) vertical or horizontal force applied in
an attempt to remove the security container from its location.
If the free-standing installation is inside a building and the anchoring devices
cannot be secured to the building structure, the unit shall be attached to a
steel plate at least 4 feet by 8 feet by inch thick (1.22 m by 2.44 m by
12.7 mm thick) or an equivalent structure so as to restrict the removal of the
teller machine from the building. The release mechanism of the attachment
devices shall only be accessible when the door of the security container is
open.

Environmental protection Introduction
Environmental protection
Environmentally and recycling-friendly product

development
This product has been designed according to our corporate guideline
'Environmentally and recycling-friendly product development'.
This means that crucial criteria such as long life, choice of material and its
labeling, emissions, packaging, ease of disassembly and recyclability have
been taken into account. This saves resources and relieves the strain on the
environment.
Saving energy
Please switch on devices that need not be constantly running only when they
are actually needed. They should also be turned off when they are not needed
for longer periods of time.
Disposing of used consumables

Please dispose of printer consumables, batteries and cleaning and
maintenance materials according to national regulations (where relevant
complying with vendor specifications).
Labels on plastic case parts

Please do not stick any labels on plastic case parts since that would make
recycling more difficult.

Introduction Environmental protection
Returning, recycling and disposing of used units

and consumables
Details regarding the return and recycling of used units and

consumables can be obtained from your local branch office.

Environmental protection Introduction

Function and integration
This chapter provides information on the functions of the components and their
integration into the device.
Block diagrams
The following block diagrams show the connections between the individual
components.
System wiring diagram

(see next page)

System wiring diagram Function and integration

Function and integration System wiring diagram
Journal printer
Zentralnetzteil 24 V
Stecker B1/B2
Journaldrucker
Sonderelektronik CTM USB
Schnittstelle: 1 E
Receipt printer
Zentralnetzteil 24 V
Bondrucker
Sonderelektronik CTM USB
Schnittstelle: USB 1D
Bedienfeld- Bedienerfhrung
elektronik CTM
Cash Media Dispenser (CMD)

Safety
Special Electronics CTM
USB switch
Interface: 1B
Safe door sensor
CMD
Shutter
Central power supply unit
24 V
Connector F
Console Electronics CTM Optical indicator

System wiring diagram Function and integration
Cash Media Dispenser with printing cassette

TH60
Safety switch
Special Electronics CTM USB switch
Interface: 1B
CMD Safe door sensor
Shutter
Central power supply 24
unitV TH60
Connector F

Interface: 1K
Console Electronics CTM Optical indicator
Check/Cash Deposit Module
Zentralnetzteil Spannungs-
Stecker E konverter Kassettenmodul
CCDM
Sonderelektronik CTM Shutter
USB
Schnittstelle: USB 1I
Bedienfeld- Bedienerfhrung
elektronik CTM

Function and integration System wiring diagram
Audio loudspeakers/headphones
Lautsprecher am/im
Bedienfeld
L R
Kopfhrer PC
An- Audioausgang
Kopfhrer Bedienfeld-
schluss elektronik CTM
Taster
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

When the power supply is interrupted, the UPS starts supplying voltage to the
device.
Netzverteiler
Sonderelektronik CTM
Netz- Schnittstelle: X22
eingang USV
USB Sonderelektronik CTM
Schnittstelle: 1J
Netzeingang
(230 V oder 120 V)

Voltage supply Function and integration
Voltage supply
Supply voltage
The device is equipped with the power distributor 01750150107 with the CMD
power supply unit 01750160689 as well or with the CMD-CCDM power supply
unit 01750160690. This one is used as a central power supply unit in the
PRODUCTNAME.
The central power supply unit, the system unit (PC), the passbook or form
printer, the coin dispenser module, the scanner module and the 'Special
Electronics CTM' are connected to the power distributor.
The power distributor is connected via a power cord to the UPS (optional)
which, in turn, is connected to the building installation.
Line voltage devices may not be connected to the system's internal
cabling/to the power distributor without the consent of the
WINCOR NIXDORF International GmbH.
The on/off switch can be used as a central system switch for all components
connected to the power distributor.

Function and integration Voltage supply
DC power supply
The required DC voltages for all components without a power supply unit of
their own are generated in the central power supply unit.
Connection of cash media dispenser, receipt printer and

journal printer
Due to the required power, these components must be connected to
the 24 V connectors of the central power supply unit.
Components Voltage connection to central power supply unit

Receipt printer B1, B2
Journal printer B1, B2
CCDM E
CMD F (black)

Special Electronics CTM Function and integration

i This component includes HW inventory data.
A Special Electronics CTM is also connected to the Console Electronics CTM.

Other components are also connected to the Special Electronics CTM e.g. the
journal printer or the receipt printer. For the current assignment of the Special
Electronics CTM, please refer to the section "USB assignment".
i The connectors of the IC ports may be attached or detached only

when the device is disconnected from the power supply.
Improper handling can cause complete damage to the components.
Used functions of the Special Electronics CTM
The following functions of the Special Electronics CTM can be used:

Emergency mode
Status monitoring power supply unit and UPS
IDCU lighting
Control of the external control unit or the operator panel
Controlling media entry indicators (MEIs) and logo lighting
Switch-on and switch-off logic
Fan control and function query
Service functions for turning off 5 V, 12 V and 24 V equipment
Door sensors queries
Provision of analog and digital reserve outputs and inputs
SOP button/SOP switch function
Provision of power outputs
Firmware download
Further information concerning the deployed Special Electronics CTM is

provided in the block diagrams in this chapter as well as in the respective
chapter on Special Electronics CTM in this manual.

Function and integration Special Electronics CTM
USB assignment
Component to USB port on the Special

Electronics CTM
Separator disk (only in conjunction with coin- USB 1A
out tray)
CMD controller USB 1B
Card reader USB 1C
Receipt printer USB 1D
Journal printer USB 1E
Passbook or form printer or scanner module USB 1F
or coin-out tray
Scanner (CCDM) USB 1G
Relay panel for external features USB USB 1H
CCDM / Deposit USB 1I
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) USB 1J
Printing cassette TH60 USB 1K
USB 1L

Console Electronics CTM Function and integration
Console Electronics CTM

This component is an extension to the Special Electronics CTM.

Further information concerning the deployed Console Electronics CTM is
provided in the block diagrams in this chapter as well as in the corresponding
chapter on the Console Electronics CTM in this manual.
i The IC port connector for the Special Electronics CTM may only be
attached or detached when the device is disconnected from the power
supply.
USB assignment
Component to USB port on the Console

Electronics CTM
Touchscreen USB 2A
USB 2B
Hybrid DIP reader USB USB 2C
Keypad USB 2D
Barcode scanner or inductive card reader or USB 2x/6x
finger print sensor
USB hub (USB 6x) USB 2F

Function and integration Console Electronics CTM
Connected sub-assemblies
The following components can be connected to the Console Electronics CTM:
Display
Keypad (EPP)
Soft keys (left and right)
ASKIM
Four additional optical indicators (MEI) (up to eight indicators possible)
Customer panel lighting (BBA)
Illumination of logo areas
Signal generators such as loudspeakers or headphones
Additional door switch
Touchscreen
Cameras (portrait camera, cash slot camera, IDCU camera)
CHD-DIP reader
Barcode scanner
Shutter

Console Electronics CTM Function and integration
Assignment of optical indicators

Console Electronics CTM connector (X16, control of optical indicators)
Signal Bit Components
Current out 1 0 Card input Optical indicator pluggable
PC 2XXXxe cpl.
Current out 2 1 Cash in-/output Optical indicator pluggable
PC 2XXXxe cpl.
Current out 3 2 Receipt output Optical indicator pluggable
PC 2XXXxe cpl.
Current out 3 3 Passbook printer / Optical indicator pluggable
Form printer / PC 2XXXxe cpl.
Coin-out tray /
Scanner module
Current out 4 4 Deposit/CCDM Optical indicator pluggable
PC 2XXXxe cpl.
Power out 4 Illumination card Illumination card input
input 01750164713

Function and integration Audio loudspeakers/headphones
Audio loudspeakers/headphones
The device is delivered with the sound system 'Audio
loudspeakers/headphones'. The circuit diagram is shown in the block diagram
in the section "Audio loudspeakers / headphones."
If the headphone jack features a volume control, the volume of the headphone
connection can be set to four levels via a button. Pressing the button once
increases the volume to the next level. Once the button has been pressed four
times, you return to the initial volume.
Camera monitoring
The cash dispensing process can be monitored by a portrait camera, by a
cash slot camera on the card reader and by an IDCU camera on the card
input.
The cameras are connected to the console electronics CTM.
The following cameras can be used in CINEO C2560:
Portrait camera
01750196300 Color
2 megapixels
Cash slot camera
01750196299 Color
2 megapixels
IDCU camera
01750167490 Color
2 megapixels

System unit (PC) Function and integration
System unit (PC)
Overview
As standard, the PCs in the CINEO C2560 are fitted with a TPM.
The device can be fitted with the following PC versions:
Barebone Emb PC_A4 CPU RAM * HDD *
01750168372
PC Celeron 440 2.0 GHz 1 GB - 2 GB 160 GB / 2x 160 GB
01750171737 ** 500 GB / 2x 500 GB
PC Dual-Core E2160 1.8 GHz 1 GB - 2 GB 160 GB / 2x 160 GB
01750171738 ** 500 GB / 2x 500 GB
PC Core 2 Duo E6400 2.13 GHZ 1 GB - 2 GB 160 GB / 2x 160 GB
01750171739 ** 500 GB / 2x 500 GB
PC Core 2 Duo E8400 3 GHZ 1 GB - 2 GB 160 GB / 2x 160 GB
01750171740 ** 500 GB / 2x 500 GB
* customer-specific
** Part no. of Swap-PC Emb PC_A4
USB assignment
Components USB port on PC
--- USB S
--- USB T
DVD or CD-ROM USB U
Console Electronics CTM USB V
Operator Panel USB W
Special Electronics CTM USB X
--- USB Y
--- USB Z

Function and integrationProtection against reading of ID cards by third parties
Protection against reading of ID cards by

third parties
To prevent ID cards from being read by third parties an anti-skimming module

II (ASKIM 2) can be installed on the device.
Depending on the option you ordered, the Anti-Skimming module II DD is able
to detect and to disturb skimming modules in front of the card reader's slot
whereas the Anti-Skimming module II D is just able to disturb them.
Furthermore, the input slot of the card reader can be illuminated, thereby built-
on skimmers become visible through its shadow.
Further information on the ASKIM 2 can be found in the system wiring diagram
in this chapter or in the chapter "Anti-Skimming Module II".
'Remote Status Indicator'

The device may be fitted with a 'Remote Status Indicator' in conjunction with a
relay panel for external features USB 01750083012.
This indicator can be installed physically separate from the device. It informs
the operator about the current status of the device.
In contrast to the 'Remote Status Indicator' - Standard (01750047663) the
'Remote Status Indicator' - Audio (01750069332) also features an acoustic
signal generator.
You will find further information in the corresponding chapter of this manual.

Door switch Function and integration
Door switch
The operating unit door and the customer panel door are fitted with a door
switch that reports when the door has been opened.
The application can signal through the loudspeakers that the door switch has
been pressed.
SOP button/SOP switch

The SOP button on the operator panel can be configured as a button or a
switch.
The operator can press the SOP button to tell the application that he or she
wants to perform operating or maintenance tasks on the device.
The application can signal through the system loudspeakers that the SOP
button has been pressed.
The SOP button is integrated in the operator panel.

Function and integration Monitors
Monitors
i These components include HW inventory data.
The following monitors can be integrated into the customer panel of the
device:
Monitor Part number in connection
with
LCD box-12.1" DVI ESRD Toshiba C355 01750124769 with touch
and/or soft key
LCD box_12.1"_standard 01750233250 with touch
and/or soft key
LCD box_12.1"_Semi-HB 01750233251 with touch
and/or soft key
Monitor 12" TFT LED Highbright DVI V2 01750194106 with touch
and/or soft key
LCD box 15" AUO with fan option 01750180259 with touch
and/or soft key
Monitor 15" TFT LED Highbright DVI 01750171633 with touch
and/or soft key
LCD box_15"_SHB_CineoC 01750231078 with touch
and/or soft key
LCD box_15"_standard_CineoC 01750237316 with touch
and/or soft key

Monitors Function and integration
Touchscreen for LCD monitor
The following touch panes can be used in combination with the deployed
monitors in the CINEO C2560:
Touch pane Part number used in
Touch screen CTII 14.8" profile ALCF 2 01750247440 14.8
Touch screen CTII 14.8" profile without LCF 01750182653 14.8
Touchscreen CTII 14.8" with LCF -2 01750247430 14.8
Touchscreen CTII 14.8" without LCF 01750127829 14.8
Touch screen CTII 15" Flextail ALCF -2 01750247444 15
Touch screen CTII 15" Flextail w/o ALCF 01750199660 15
Touch screen CTII 15" Flextail ALCF -2 01750247444 15
Touch controller RST WN USB incl. ground 01750170098
strap
Voltage is supplied to the touch screen via the USB port.
Protective screens
In combination with a soft key keypad the following protective screens can be
used:
Protective screen Part number used in
Protective screen 15.0" 330.2x254.0 01750198411 15"
Protective screen 15.0" 330.2x254.0 01750198412 15"
ACLF
Protective screen PC 2050 12.1" cpl. 01750042303 12.1"
Protective screen PC 2050 12.1" cpl. 01750042364 12.1"

Function and integration Operating the flat displays
Soft key pads

The following soft key pads can be used in combination with the deployed
monitors:
Soft keys Part number used with
Keyboard soft key set 12.1" STD PCMET 01750190129 12.1"
Keyboard soft key set 12.1" NDC PCMET 01750190130 12.1"
Keyboard soft key set 12.1" DDC PCMET 01750190131 12.1"
Keyboard soft key set 12.1" STD BR PCMET 01750190132 12.1"
Keyboard soft key set 12.1" NDC BR PCMET 01750190133 12.1"
Keyboard soft key set 12.1" DDC BR PCMET 01750190134 12.1"
Keyboard soft key set 15" STD PCMET 01750190135 15"
Keyboard soft key set 15" NDC PCMET 01750190136 15"
Keyboard soft key set 15" DDC PCMET 01750190137 15"
Keyboard soft key set 15" STD BR PCMET 01750190138 15"
Keyboard soft key set 15" NDC BR PCMET 01750190139 15"
Keyboard soft key set 15" DDC BR PCMET 01750190142 15"
Keyboard soft key set 12.1" FRA PCMET 01750193485 12.1"
Keyboard soft key set 15" FRA PCMET 01750193489 15"
Keyboard soft key set 15" BR DDC sw 01750193493 15"
PCMET
Keyboard soft key set 15" BR FRA PCMET 01750210579 15"
Operating the flat displays

To operate the various LCD flat displays, no hardware configurations on the
DVI interface in the system unit and on the interface card of the display
assembly are required.

Relay panel for external features USB Function and integration
Relay panel for external features USB

The 'relay panel for external features USB' is a Low-Speed USB component
and enables the following functions in connection with the application
software:
Control of the system by means of a maximum of four external signal
devices (inputs 1 - 4)
Control of up to four external pieces of equipment by the system
(relay 1 - 4)
Connection of a 'Remote Status Indicator' (RSI)
Power is supplied via the USB cable.
Operation of a Remote Status Indicator, however, requires an additional 24 V
connector.
For further information on the 'relay panel for external features USB', please
refer to the block diagrams in this chapter and in the corresponding chapter on
the 'relay panel for external features USB' in this manual.

Function and integration Printer
Printer
The following printers can be used in the device:

Printer Part number
Thermal journal printer TP06 01750110043
Needle journal printer NP06 01750110044
Thermal receipt printer TP07A 01750130744
Receipt_Printer_TP07-2_A 01750190895
Matrix receipt printer NP07A 01750142735
Form printer TP20 (wide, 1 paper path) 01750182309
Form printer TP20 (narrow, 1 paper path) 01750192719
For further information on the printers and different versions of printers that are
used, please refer to the block diagrams in this chapter and in the
corresponding chapters on printers in this manual.
Coin dispenser module

The following coin dispenser modules can be used in the device:

Coin module Part number
Coin Dispenser CM2-O-4H EUR 01750200217
Coin dispenser CM2-O-4H TRY 01750200218
Coin dispenser CM2-O-8H-EUR 01750200215
Coin dispenser CM2-O-8H-TRY 01750200216
For further information about the coin dispenser please refer to the block
diagrams in this chapter and to the relevant chapters on coin dispensers in this
manual.

Card readers Function and integration
Card readers
The following card reader can be used:

Card reader Part number
Card reader CHD V2CU standard (CHD V3x) 01750173205
Card Reader CHD V2CU ACT Version 01750199931
Card Reader CHD V2CU HiCO Version 01750199932
Card reader CHD DIP Hybrid ICM330-2 01750208512
Card Handling Dev. DIP Hybrid USB ICM330 01750102140
The following card hoppers can be installed in the device in connection with
the card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x).
Card hoppers Part number
Card reject tray 01750165160
Card reject box 01750057198
Card reject box (removable) 01750037579
Card reject module 01750109608
(with long transport route for 100 cards)
For further information on the card readers and card reject modules please
refer to the block diagrams in this chapter and to the relevant chapters on card
readers in this manual.
DC/DC converter for CIM

In the CINEO C2560, the CIM 06 is connected to the 24V voltage supply
through a DC/DC voltage converter with the part 01750151991. The DC/DC
converter conducts the 24V to the CHD V2CU (CHD-V3x) and reduces the
24V voltage to 5V for the CIM 06 module.

Function and integration Optical indicator
Optical indicator
The following plug-in optical indicators are integrated in the customer panel of
the CINEO C2560:
Part number Usage
Optical 01750058806 Card input
indicator PC Cash in-/output
2XXXxe cpl. Receipt output
Form or passbook printer
Coin-out tray/
Scanner module
Control
The optical indicators are controlled via the Console Electronics CTM. Various
states can be defined by the application:
Permanently lit
Flashing
Flashing 0.5 Hz
frequency
Blinking 1 Hz
frequency
Blinking 2 Hz
frequency
Blinking 4 Hz
frequency
DC/DC converter for CIM

In the CINEO C2560, the CIM 06 is connected to the 24V voltage supply
through a DC/DC voltage converter with the part 01750151991. The DC/DC
converter conducts the 24V to the CHD V2CU (CHD-V3x) and reduces the
24V voltage to 5V for the CIM 06 module.

Keyboards Function and integration
Keyboards
The following keypads can be used in the device:

EPP keypad (V6)
EPP Vario keyboard
Alpha keyboard
The optional soft keys are controlled via the Console Electronics CTM.
The keyboards are connected to the USB port of the Console Electronics
CTM.
Operator panel
The device can be fitted with the following operator panel versions:
Operator panel Part number
Operator panel 05 10.4 with keyboard 01750104454
Operator panel USB 01750109076
Operator panel 06 II (display of the OP 06 only) 01750201871
Keyboard Operator Panel 06 II (customer panel of the 01750201959
OP 06 only)
The Operator Panel USB or the Operator Panel 05 or the Operator Panel 06 II
is connected to the USB W interface of the system unit (PC) and to the IC bus
of the Special Electronics CTM. The operator panel 06 is also connected to the
VGA interface of the PC.
The operator panel is supplied with voltage by the central power supply unit.

Function and integration Cash Media Dispenser
Cash Media Dispenser

A separate service manual is available for the Cash Media Dispenser (CMD).
CMD-V4: Order number: 01750060161
CMD-V5: Order number: 01750214537
Temperature control
Ventilation
Ventilation of the device is implemented by means of two fans in the head unit.
In addition, some pieces of equipment or sub-assemblies are fitted with fans
(e.g. system unit (PC)). However, these fans have no air channels which
connect them directly to the outside.
Depending on the LCD version, monitors may be fitted with their own fans.
These fans provide cooling for the LCD box. A breakdown of the fans may
result, among others, in backlight failure due to overheating in the LCD box.

Temperature control Function and integration
Heater
Type Part number Supply voltage / Power
Heater 255W / 115V with 01750179133 115 V/255 W
fan 24V
Heater 255W / 230V with 01750179132 230 V/255 W
fan 24V
It consists of a fan heater with an integrated safety temperature monitor and

the temperature sensor.
The heating system is always ready for operation regardless of the

operating status since the voltage supply is provided through a Y
adapter on the power cable rather than being controlled via the power
distributor (see section "Block diagrams").

Power supply unit CMD 01750160689

Description Power supply unit CMD 01750160689
Description
The CMD power supply unit provides voltages for all components of an ATM
with a CMD with 24V. The power supply unit is optimized to cooperate with the
special electronics CTM and with the special electronics PS.
The housing includes different connectors, but no power switch.
A power factor correction is built in.
If the supply voltage is turned on, the power supply unit continuously
generates the 'stand-by voltages'. In addition, 'switched voltages' are
generated.
The input voltage connector is a power connector IEC 60320-1/C14 (70 C)
158F)) for 10 A 250 V AC (VDE) and 15 A / 125 V AC (UL and CSA). It may
be used for all input voltages.
All outputs are protected against short-circuits, overvoltages, overheating and
blocked fans.
In this case, the power supply unit can reduce the voltage; but the power
supply unit will not shut down (see the section about output signals).
The loads can have a capacity range from 47 uF to 1000 uF on their inputs.
The loads may also generate their own voltages when the system is turned off.
The power supply unit can only be used in conjunction with an Uninterruptible
Power Supply (UPS).

Power supply unit CMD 01750160689 Description
Output voltages
The power supply unit generates in its first part 5.1 V and 12 V 'stand-by
voltages.'
In the second part, 5.1 V and 12 V voltages are generated. These voltages are
switched by the POWER-ON-NOT signal.
In the third part, 12 V and 25 V voltages are generated. These voltages are
switched by the SERVICE1-NOT signal.
The ground connection of these voltages are only connected to the grounding
of the supply voltage and the housing via high-impedance resistors (e.g. 100
kOhm
The column 'Continuous current max.' shows the maximum, continuous
current during regular operation.
The column 'Max. continuous overcurrent' is the continuous current level at
which the 'overcurrent limitation electronics' starts to down-regulate the current
if it rises.
Stand-by voltages of the first part

The connection to ground of this part is referred to as GND 1. The voltages are
connected with a 12-pin Molex mini fit connector.
Voltage no. 1 2
Voltage + 5.1 V + 12 V
Max. tolerance 3% 5%
Continuous current min. 0 A 0A
max. 1.5 A 1A
Max. continuous overcurrent 4A 2A
Ripple, noise max. 100 mVSS 200 mVSS
Max. overvoltage 6V 15 V

Voltages of the second part

The connection to ground of this part is referred to as GND 1. These voltages
are switched by the POWER-ON-NOT signal.
Voltage no. 3 4
max. 6 A 9A
Max. continuous overcurrent 10 A 12 A
Voltages of the third part

are switched by the SERVIC-NOT and POWER-ON-NOT signals.
Voltage no. 5 6
Voltage + 12 V + 25 V
max. 1 A 3A
Max. overvoltage 15 V 30 V
Voltage no. 7 8
max. 4 A 4A

Power supply unit CMD 01750160689 Description
Voltage no. 9
Voltage + 25.7 V
Max. tolerance 3%
Continuous current min. 0 A
max. 7 A
Max. continuous overcurrent 20 A
Ripple, noise max. 200 mVSS
Max. overvoltage 30 V
Input signal POWER-ON-NOT

generates the 'stand-by voltages'.
If the POWER-ON-NOT input signal is switched to 'active low' (signal level <
2.0 V), output voltages 3 and 4 are switched on.
If the POWER-ON-NOT input signal switches to the 'high' or 'open' state, all
switchable voltages are switched off.
Input signal SERVICE1-NOT

If the input signal SERVICE1-ON-NOT is switched to 'active low' (signal level <
2.0 V), the voltages of the third part switched on, but only if the input signal
POWER-ON-NOT is also active.
IF the SERVICE1-ON-NOT input signal switches to the 'high' or 'open' state,
the voltages of the third part are switched off.
Output signal POWER-FAIL-NOT

The signal switches in the 'active low' state if the supply voltage is not between
90V AC and 264 V AC.

Output signal OVERTEMP-FAN-FAULT-NOT

The signal switches to the 'active low' state if the temperature is too high or, if
a fan is built in, if this fan is blocked.
Only if the temperature continues to rise, the power supply unit reduces the 38
V output voltage to decrease the temperature in the housing. Once the
temperature is O.K. again, the power supply unit increases the voltages to the
defined level, and the signal OVERTEMP-FAN-FAULT-NOT becomes 'inactive
high'.
This procedure does not affect the 'stand-by voltages'.
Output signal OVER-VOLTAGE-OVER-CURRENT-

NOT
The signal goes to the 'active low' state in case of overvoltage or overcurrent.
If an overvoltage occurs, the OVER-VOLTAGE/OVER-CURRENT-NOT signal
switched in the 'active low' state and the overvoltage is attenuated by a second
regulating loop.
In case of overcurrents, the power supply unit reduces the output voltage so
that the current falls, too. Once the current fell to the normal range, the power
supply unit increases the output voltage to the defined level, and the signal
OVER-VOLTAGE-OVER-CURRENT-NOT becomes inactive.

Power supply unit CMD 01750160689 Technical data
Technical data
Input voltage: 90 V AC - 264 V AC
Frequency: 47 - 63 Hz
Inrush current max. 50 A supply voltage peak, resistor max. 1 ohm
Stand-by input power: max. 30 W at full load of the stand-by voltages
Leakage current: max. 0.8 mA at 264 V AC
Efficiency: min 80 % at full load in the full supply voltage range
Power factor: min. 0.92

Pin assignments Power supply unit CMD 01750160689
Pin assignments
1 Connector B1 6 Connector C1
2 Connector B2 7 Connector D2
4 Connector A 9 Power input
5 Connector C2

Power supply unit CMD 01750160689 Pin assignments
Connector A
Connection to the special electronics
10 Type of connector:
Molex Mini-Fit 18M
Pin Designation
1 5,1 V standby (voltage no. 1)
2 5.1 V standby switched by POWER-ON-NOT (voltage no. 3)
3 GND 1
4 12 V standby (voltage no. 2)
5 12 V switched by POWER-ON-NOT (voltage no. 4)
6 GND 1
7 12 V switched by SERVICE-ON-NOT (voltage no. 5)
8 25 V switched by SERVICE-ON-NOT (voltage no. 6)
9 GND 1
10 Input signal POWER-ON-NOT
11 Input signal SERVICE1-ON-NOT
12 n.c.
13 GND 1
14 Output signal POWER-FAIL-NOT
15 Output signal OVERTEMP-FAN-FAULT-NOT
16 Output signal OVER-VOLTAGE-OVER-CURRENT-NOT
17 n.c.
18 n.c.

Connector B1, B2
Connectors of the components
Type of connector:
Molex Mini-Fit 2M
Pin Designation
1 + 25 V switched (voltage no. 7 or 8)
2 GND 1
Connector B3
CMD connection
Type of connector:
Molex Mini-Fit 2M
Pin Designation
1 + 25.7 V switched (voltage no. 9)
2 GND 1

Power supply unit CMD 01750160689 Pin assignments
Connector C1, C2
System or customer panel connection
Molex Mini-Fit 10M
Pin Designation
1 12 V stand-by (voltage no. 2)
2 GND 1
3 +12 V switched by POWER-ON-NOT (voltage no. 4)
4 GND 1
6 GND 1
8 GND 1
9 n.c.
10 n.c.

Connector D1, D2
Molex Mini-Fit 4M
Pin Designation
1 GND 1 for 12 V
2 GND 1 for 5.1 V
4 +5.1 V switched by POWER-ON-NOT (voltage no. 3)

Power Supply Unit CMD-CCDM
01750160690

Description Power Supply Unit CMD-CCDM 01750160690
Description
The power supply unit CMD-CCDM provides the voltages for all components in
the ATM with CMD and 24 V and the CCDM module, except for the system
unit. The power supply unit is optimized to cooperate with the special
electronics module CTM and the special electronics module PS.
generates the 'stand-by voltages'. In addition, 'switched voltages' are
generated.
The input voltage connector is a power connector IEC 60320-1/C14 (70 C)
158F)) for 10 A 250 V AC (VDE) and 15 A / 125 V AC (UL and CSA). It may
The outputs are protected against excess current, overvoltage and
overheating.
The loads can have a capacity range from 47 uF to 1000 uF on their inputs.
The loads may also generate their own voltages when the system is turned off.
The power supply unit can be used in conjunction with the Uninterruptible
Power Supply (UPS) used in the system.

Power Supply Unit CMD-CCDM 01750160690 Description
Output voltages
The power supply unit generates in its first part 5.1 V and 12 V 'stand-by
voltages' with the connection to ground GND 1.
In the second part, 5.1 V and 12 V voltages with the connection to ground
GND 1 are generated. These voltages are switched by the POWER-ON-NOT
signal.
In the third part, 12 V and 25 V voltages with the connection to ground GND 2
are generated. These voltages are switched by the SERVICE1-NOT signal.
The fourth part generates the voltage 38 V. This voltage is switched by the
SERVICE2-NOT signal.
Ground connections GND 1 and GND 2 are not interconnected and are only
connected to the grounding of the supply voltage and the housing via high-
impedance resistors (e.g. 100 kOhm). Between GND 1 and GND 2, potential
differences of a max. of 1 volt may occur depending on the current.
The column 'Continuous current max.' shows the maximum, continuous
current during regular operation.
The column 'Max. continuous overcurrent' is the continuous current level at
which the 'overcurrent limitation electronics' starts to down-regulate the current
if it rises.
Stand-by voltages
The connection to ground of this part is referred to as GND 1.
Voltage no. 1 2
max. 1.5 A 1A

Voltages of the second part

are switched by the POWER-ON-NOT signal.
Voltage no. 3 4
max. 6 A 9A
Max. continuous overcurrent 10 A 12 A
Voltages of the third part

are switched by the SERVICE1-NOT and POWER-ON-NOT signal.
Voltage no. 5 6
max. 1 A 3A
Voltage no. 7 8
max. 4 A 4A

Power Supply Unit CMD-CCDM 01750160690 Description
Voltage no. 9
Voltage + 25.7 V
Max. tolerance 3%
max. 7 A
Voltages of the fourth part

This part has its own connection to ground referred to as GND 2. This voltage
is switched by the SERVICE2-NOT and POWER-ON-NOT signal.
Voltage no. 10
Voltage + 38 V
Max. tolerance 10 %
max. 6 A
Input signal POWER-ON-NOT

generates the 'stand-by voltages'.
If the POWER-ON-NOT input signal is switched to 'active low' (signal level <
2.0 V), output voltages 3 and 4 are switched on.
If the POWER-ON-NOT input signal switches to the 'high' or 'open' state, all
switchable voltages are switched off.

Input signals SERVICE1-NOT and SERVICE2-NOT

If the signals SERVICE1-NOT and SERVICE2-NOT are switched to 'active
low' (signal level < 2.0 V), the voltages of the third and fourth part are switched
on if the input signal POWER-ON-NOT is active, too.
If the SERVICE1-ON-NOT or the SERVICE2-ON-NOT input signal switches to
the 'high' or 'open' state, the voltages of the corresponding parts are switched
off.

The signal switches to the 'active low' state if the temperature is too high or, if
a fan is built in, if this fan is blocked.
Only if the temperature continues to rise, the power supply unit reduces the
output voltages to decrease the temperature in the housing. Once the
temperature is O.K. again, the power supply unit increases the voltages to the
defined level, and the signal OVERTEMP-FAN-FAULT-NOT becomes 'inactive
high'.
Output signal OVER-VOLTAGE-OVER-CURRENT-

NOT
The signal goes to the 'active low' state in case of overvoltage or overcurrent.
In case of overvoltage, the power supply unit can use a second electric circuit
controller to regulate the output voltages to the defined levels.
In case of overcurrents, the power supply unit reduces the output voltages so
that the current falls, too. Once the current fell to the normal range, the power
supply unit increases the output voltages to the defined level, and the signal
OVER-VOLTAGE-OVER-CURRENT-NOT becomes inactive.

Power Supply Unit CMD-CCDM 01750160690 Technical data
Technical data
Inrush current max. 50 A supply voltage peak, resistor max. 1 ohm
Stand-by input power: max. 30 W at full load of the stand-by voltages
Efficiency: min 80 % at full load in the full supply voltage range

Pin assignments Power Supply Unit CMD-CCDM 01750160690
Pin assignments
1 Connector E 6 Connector D1
3 Connector B2 8 Connector A
4 Connector C1 9 Connector B3
5 Connector C2 10 Power input

Power Supply Unit CMD-CCDM 01750160690 Pin assignments
Connector A
Special electronics connection
Molex Mini-Fit 18M
Pin Name
1 5.1 V stand-by (voltage no. 1)
2 5.1 V stand-by switched by POWER-ON-NOT (voltage no. 3)
3 GND 1
5 12 V switched by POWER-ON-NOT (voltage no. 4)
6 GND 1
7 12 V switched by SERVICE1-ON-NOT (voltage no. 5)
8 25 V switched by SERVICE1-ON-NOT (voltage no. 6)
9 GND 1
13 GND 1
16 Output signal OVER-VOLTAGE-OVER-CURRENT-NOT
17 n.c.
18 n.c.

Connector C1, C2
System or customer panel connection
Molex Mini-Fit 10M
Pin Name
2 GND 1
4 GND 1
5 +12 V switched by SERVICE1-NOT (voltage no. 5)
6 GND 1
7 +25 V switched by SERVICE1-NOT (voltage no. 6)
8 GND 1
9 n.c.
10 n.c.

Power Supply Unit CMD-CCDM 01750160690 Pin assignments
Connector B1, B2
Type of connector:
Molex Mini-Fit 2M
Pin Name
1 25 V switched by SERVICE1-NOT (voltage no. 7 or 8)
2 GND 1
Connector B3
CMD connection
Type of connector:
Molex Mini-Fit 2M (black)
Pin Name
1 25.7 V switched by SERVICE1-NOT (voltage no. 9)
2 GND 1

Connector D1, D2
Molex Mini-Fit 4M
Pin Name
1 GND 1 for 12 V
2 GND 1 for 5.1 V
4 +5.1 V switched by POWER-ON-NOT (voltage no. 3)
Connector E
AMP-UNIV-MATE-N-LOK 2M
Pin Name
1 38 V switched by SERVICE2-NOT (voltage no. 10)
2 GND 2

Power supply unit 2x38 V/395 W
01750203483

Description Power supply unit 2x38 V/395 W 01750203483
Description
The 2 x 38 V / 395 W power supply unit provides voltages for individual compo-
nents of a recycling system. The power supply unit is optimized to cooperate with
the special electronics module CTM and the special electronics module PS.
If the supply voltage is turned on and the "PON" signal is in "active low" status,
the power supply unit generates 38 V at 2 plugs. This voltage is a switched
voltage, i.e. the 38 V can be switched on and off via the "PON" input signal.
The input voltage connector is a power connector IEC 60320-1/C14 ((70 C)
(158F)) for 10 A 250 V AC (VDE) and 15 A / 125 V AC (UL and CSA). It may
All outputs are protected against both short-circuits and overvoltages. There is
also an overheating protection in place.
In such cases, the power supply unit can reduce the voltage, but the power
supply unit will not shut down except when there is external or internal over-
voltage (see the sections about output signals).
The power supply unit can be used in conjunction with an Uninterruptible
Power Supply (UPS).

Power supply unit 2x38 V/395 W 01750203483 Description
Output voltages
The power supply unit generates 38 V at 2 plugs. These voltages are switched
by the POWER-ON-NOT (PON) signal.
The ground connection of these voltages is connected to the earthing contact
of the supply voltage and the housing via high-impedance resistors only (e.g.
100 kOhm).
The column 'Continuous current max.' shows the maximum, continuous cur-
rent in normal mode.
Voltage no. 1 2
Max. tolerance 10 % 10 %
max. 7.1 A 7.1 A
Maximum overcurrent 18 A 18 A
Maximum continuous output performance for both outputs is limited to 395 W.

Description Power supply unit 2x38 V/395 W 01750203483
Input signal POWER-ON-NOT (PON)

If the supply voltage is turned on, the power supply unit generates a voltage
internally.
If the PON input signal is switched to 'active low' (signal level < 2.0 V), then
output voltages 1 and 2 are switched on.
If the PON input signal switches to the 'high' or 'open' state, then the switcha-
ble voltages are switched off.
Output signal POWER-FAIL-NOT (PFN)

The signal switches in the 'active low' state if the supply voltage is not between
90 V AC and 264 V AC.

(OTP/FF)
The signal switches to the 'active low' state if the temperature is too high or if
the fan is blocked.
If the problem persists for more than a minimum of 3 s, the power supply unit
reduces the output voltages in order to allow the temperature in the housing to
drop off once again. Once the temperature is O.K. again, the power supply unit
increases the voltages to the defined level, and the signal OTP/FF becomes
'inactive high'.
This procedure does not affect the internally generated voltage.
Output signal OVER-CURRENT-NOT (OCN)

The signal goes to the 'active low' state in case of an overcurrent.
In case of an overcurrent, the power supply unit reduces the output voltage so
that the current falls, too. Once the current returns to the normal range, the
power supply unit increases the output voltage once again to the defined level
and the OCN signal becomes inactive.
This procedure does not affect the internal voltage.

Power supply unit 2x38 V/395 W 01750203483 Technical data
Technical data
Inrush current max. 50 A for 3 ms
Standby input power: max. 3 W
Efficiency: min 80 % at full load in the full supply voltage
range

Pin assignments Power supply unit 2x38 V/395 W 01750203483
Pin assignments
1 Power input 3 Connector E1

2 Connector A 4 Connector E2

Power supply unit 2x38 V/395 W 01750203483 Pin assignments
Connector A
Special electronics connection
Molex Mini-Fit 8M
Contact Designation
2 n.c.
3 n.c.
4 GND
7 Output signal OVER-CURRENT-NOT
8 n.c.
Connectors E1, E2
Connection of the components
UNIV-MATE-N-LOK 2M
Contact Designation
1 + 38 V switched (voltage no. 1/2)
2 GND

Pin assignments Power supply unit 2x38 V/395 W 01750203483

Power distributor 01750150107
Power is supplied via a rubber plug. The three rubber plug sockets used to
supply the components with line voltage are switched over a relay. Switching
on and off is controlled via the system controller (e.g. special electronics
module).
1 Connector for control lines

2 Power switch
3 Power input connector
4 Rubber socket Power supply
5 Rubber socket System unit
6 Rubber socket Power Output, switched

Pin assignment Power distributor 01750150107
Pin assignment
Type of connector:
JST PA 1x6
Pin Description Comment

1 12 V
2 Control line Output "System unit"
3 Control line Output "Power Output swichted"
5 -
Technical data
Dimensions and weight

Length: 220 mm (8.66")
Width: 85 mm (3.35")
Height: 48 mm (1.89")
Weight: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb)

Special Electronics CTM 01750147868
This component consists the HW inventory data.
i

Introduction Special Electronics CTM 01750147868
Introduction
The Special Electronics CTM represents, in addition to the built-in PC, the
central control and monitoring unit of the system and is connected to the PC
via the USB port.
The Special Electronics CTM fulfills various functions which are not assignable
to other components such as printer, PC, IDCU or separator. In particular, the
special electronics serves as a central control unit that switches the whole
system on and off.
Some of the functions are shifted on to other logic boards:
to the external control unit or the control unit functionally identical within the
operator panel which is addressed or queried by the Special Electronics
CTM via the integrated IC bus.
! The connectors of the IC ports may only be attached or detached when
the device is disconnected from the power supply. Improper handling can
cause complete damage to the components.
to the Console Electronics CTM that features their own USB interface and
are addressed not by the Special Electronics CTM but directly.
Up to 12 other high speed USB devices can be connected to the Special
Electronics CTM via the integrated USB hubs.

Special Electronics CTM 01750147868 Functions of the special electronics
Functions of the special electronics

Emergency operation
status monitoring power supply unit and UPS
IDCU lighting exertion
Control of the 'external control unit' or operator panel
Controlling media entry indicators (MEIs) and logo lighting
Switch-on and switch-off logic
Control of the fans and function inquiry for 2 controlled and 2 uncontrolled
fans
Service functions to switch off 5 V, 12 V, 24 V and 36 V loads
Door switch inquiries
Provision of analog and digital reserve out- and inputs
SOP button/SOP switch function
Provision of power outputs
Firmware download

Behavior in connection with power supply unit and UPS Special Electronics CTM 01750147868
Behavior in connection with power supply

unit and UPS
Power supply unit / voltage supply

The power supply unit provides the voltages 5V STANDBY, 12V STANDBY,
5V NEN, 12V NEN , 12V SERVICE 1 and 24V SERVICE 1.
As long as the supply voltage is given, only the 5V STANDBY-voltage for the
special electronics is provided by the power supply unit constantly. The 5V-
STANDBY-voltage powers its own logical unit, the microcontroller of the
special electronics and the logical unit connected, the 12V-STANDBY-voltage
is needed for the power distributor and the safe locks. The other voltages are
controlled by the special electronics.
5V NEN (MAINS-ON-N) and 12V NEN (MAINS-ON-N)
These voltages are just supplied by the power supply unit when the signal
NEN is activated (low active).
The voltage 5 V NEN powers for example the voltage power lines on the USB
ports.
The voltage 12 V NEN powers the power distributor and the operator panel.
12V SERVICE1 and 24V SERVICE1
These voltages are just switched on when the signal SERVICE 1 SWITCH is
activated. These voltages power all components of lower capacity within the
system.
36V SERVICE2
These voltages are just switched on when the signal SERVICE 2 SWITCH is
activated. These voltages power all components of higher capacity such as a
CCDM or a CRS module within the system.
By dint of the two different service voltages, different circuits can be de- and
reactivated for call-outs without shutting the whole system down.

Special Electronics CTM 01750147868 Behavior in connection with power supply unit and UPS
Status signals power supply unit

If an error occurs, the power supply unit can report the low-active status
signals POWER_FAIL, OVERTEMP_FAN_FAULT and
OVERCURRENT_OVERVOLTAGE. If at least one signal is low-active, the
special electronics is meant to shut down the system after a period of 3
seconds at the most. At the same time a protective logic board in the power
supply unit assures the latter to be shut down.
When activating the low-active signal POWER FAIL', the power supply unit
has detected a power failure. Receiving the signal, the special electronics is
meant to shut the system down independently.
Power-on behavior after mains voltage supply

The monitor / LCD illumination can be controlled both by request and
i by a button on the Console Electronics CTM.
The special electronics is started when power is supplied to the system. The
red and the green LEDs are switched on. First of all outputs are reset, the
flash checksum is checked, a RAM memory test and a hardware test are
performed. Subsequently the initialization phase is started.
A blinking red and green LED at the same time signalizes an error in the
preceding tests.
The special electronics module is either in standby mode where all single
components are still disconnected or in operating mode. In the operating
mode, all voltages are supplied and both climate control and USB are active.
A changeover between the operational modes can be affected either via the
platform software or manually via the external control unit.
The operational mode is saved in the serial EEPROM.
The 2 modes are:

Type A:
The device is not switched on and remains in standby mode.
Since the initialization phase is completed, the red LED is switched on and the
green LED is switched off.
Type B:
The device is meant to be switched on.
This is affected by activating the NEN SWITCH signal (switched to low)
towards the power supply unit. Subsequently, the signal SERVICE 1 SWITCH
is activated (switched to low). This happens after a time-delay of approx. 100
ms. Afterwards the signal SERVICE 2 SWITCH is activated (switched to low),
also after a delay of approx 100 ms. After another 100 ms the power distributor
is switched on. The time-delays prevent start-up peaks. All other components
such as logo lighting, monitor/LCD etc. remain off and need to be switched on
by request. This status is indicated by a lucent green and a dark red LED.
Optionally, the monitor / LCD lighting can be switched on by pushbutton. This
completes the initialization phase.
Power-on behavior after pressing the on/off

switch
In case the special electronics is in standby mode (red LED on, green LED
off), the turn-on procedure is started using the on/off switch on the operator
panel or the external on/off switch.
After you have pressed the switch, the green LED blinks to confirm this. The
further switch-on procedure takes place as described above.

Special Electronics CTM 01750147868 Behavior in connection with power supply unit and UPS
Emergency power device

During a power failure the system can be powered by an uninterruptible power
supply (UPS). To detect the emergency mode, the emergency power device
closes a contact that can be queried by the special electronics.
The bank's application reacts to this message by closing down the current
function, e.g. the dispensing procedure is terminated and the ID-card ejected.
Subsequently, the device is shut down with a request for the special
electronics to disburden the emergency power supply.
The special electronics, which is now powered by the emergency power
supply, switches the device back on automatically when the power failure is
over.
Power-on behavior in UPS mode after

reestablishment of the power supply
Any attempt to start the system by the UPS is saved and the turn-on procedure
started after a reestablishment of the power supply.
In this case the special electronics branches out into the off state of a cold
start phase and checks the status of the UPS approx. every 20 ms.
When the termination of the UPS mode is detected (signal is on for approx. 3
s) the turn-on procedure is the same as the one after termination with a cold
start phase.
Switching off via software or restart

On request of the system software the special electronics needs to be capable
of switching off the system independently or with a time-delay, it may also
perform a restart.
For some operating systems, an immediate shutdown may cause trouble. That
is why a function for defined time-delays is provided. If this is realized by a
timer, the time-delay is started with every request. This status is indicated by a
lucent red and a blinking green LED.
On shutdown without time limit the green LED goes out and the red LED is set.
A blinking green LED indicates the waiting time for the shutdown. In case of a
power failure during this waiting time the special electronics is not restarted
within the specified period of time.

Switching off via on/off switch

Pressing the ON/OFF button in switched-on mode resets a flag whose status
can be queried by request. This enables the application to shut the device
down (NEN SWITCH to 'High') using the requests 'switch off permanently' or
'switch off temporarily (cold start or reboot)'.
The states are indicated via the red LED and the green LED on the external
control unit or on the operator panel.
SOP function with disconnection from supply

The control cables SERVICE 1 SWITCH and SERVICE 2 SWITCH can be
turned off for service purposes with a marginal time offset by pressing the LCD
light button simultaneously with the Speaker key on the control unit or the
operator panel.
Both control signals for the voltages SERVICE 1 SWITCH or SERVICE 2
SWITCH can also be switched by request, but then independently from NEN.
The power distributor the PC is connected with must be operating during SOP
operation. The operator panel and the special electronics remain operating as
well.
Pressing the two buttons again turns all voltages back on.

Special Electronics CTM 01750147868 Further functions
SOP function without any influence on the

voltage
When the SOP key on the external control unit or the operator panel is
pressed independently, a software flag 'SOP button' is influenced. Alternatively
you can connect a SOP button directly to the special electronics. Additionally
you need to have in mind that as an alternative to the SOP button the
connection of a SOP key compatible with NCR is provided.
These buttons/switches work logically parallel.
The flag 'SOP button' is set when the SOP key or the external SOP button is
closed for a period of 40 ms.
In case an external button is connected and in ON position, you need to keep
in mind that the logic state of the external switch cannot be reset by the button
on the board which means that the external button always has to be switched
off again.
A LED displays the current switching status SOP.
The SOP status can also be reset via software.
Further functions
Fan control
You can connect up to four fans to the special electronics. The rotational
speed for the first two fans can be controlled according to the temperature.
Two more fans are operated at constant-speed.
When the operator panel is in use, the rotational speed of the fan is reduced to
25% to prevent the operator from being exposed to a vigorous air flow. When
the device is set back into the normal state of operation or one minute without
any input passes, the original rotational speed is reactivated. Additionally the
control is reactivated when reaching an alarming temperature to prevent the
device from overheating.
For security reasons, all fans are deactivated on opening the doors.

Overview of LED signal situations Special Electronics CTM 01750147868
Firmware download
The firmware can be updated via USB connection. A firmware download does
not have any effect on the data in EEPROM.
In case of a voltage loss during the download, the booter is kept. This enables
you to perform another firmware download after a power failure.
Overview of LED signal situations

To display the operating states and error conditions, the LEDs on the special
electronics are addressed by the external control unit or the operator panel as
follows:
Yellow Yellow
Red Green
(UPS (Capacity Status of the special electronics
(standby) (on)
working) empty)
Initialization phase
ON ON X X or
pending request to switch off
BLINKING BLINKING X X Firmware error
ON OFF X X System in standby

System switched off and temporary cold
ON BLINKING X X start active or
out of standby operation:
pending request to switch on.
OFF ON X X System has been switched on.
BLINKING ON X X - vacant -
BLINKING OFF X X SERVICE 1 or SERVICE 2 deactivated!
OFF BLINKING X X No USB enumeration!

BLINKING BLINKING Power supply unit reports error (over current
X X
fast fast etc.)
X X on off UPS in emergency power mode
X X on on UPS in emergency power mode, battery

capacity running out

Special Electronics CTM 01750147868 Technical data
On the special electronics only one red and one green LED are integrated.
Technical data
Plug positions

Technical data Special Electronics CTM 01750147868
Pin assignments
X1 Power Supply In
Molex Mini-Fit Jr. 18M
Contact Name
1 5 V STANDBY
2 5 V NEN
3 GND
4 12 V STANDBY
5 12 V NEN
6 GND
7 12 V SERVICE 1
8 24 V SERVICE 1
9 GND
10 DIGITAL OUT NEN SWITCH
11 DIGITAL OUT SERVICE 1 SWITCH
12 DIGITAL OUT SERVICE 2 SWITCH
13 GND
14 DIGITAL IN POWER_FAIL
15 DIGITAL IN OVERTEMP_FAN_FAIL
16 DIGITAL IN OVERCURRENT_VOLTAGE
17 n.c.
18 n.c.

X10 I/O 1 (IDCU Box)

Type of connector:
JST PA 2-pin, M
1
Contact Name
1 DIGTAL IN 11 e.g. IDCU
2 GND
X11 Power Distribution

Type of connector:
JST PA 6-pin, M
1
Contact Name
1 12 V NEN
2 GND
3 DIGITAL OUT POWER SWITCH 1
4 GND
5 DIGITAL OUT POWER SWITCH 2
6 GND

X15 I/O 2 (Door)

Type of connector:
JST PA 8-pin, M
1
Contact Name
1 DIGITAL IN 7 e.g. Door Response 1
2 GND
4 GND
6 GND
7 5V PULLUP PWM OFF LOOP
8 DIGITAL IN PWM OFF LOOP
X13 Switch Extern

JST PHD 8M
Contact Name
1 DIGITAL IN SWITCH EXTERN
2 GND
3 CURRENT SOURCE 20mA RED LED
4 CURRENT SOURCE 20mA GREEN LED
5 DIGITAL IN 3 e.g.SOP DOOR
6 5 V STANDBY
7 DIGITAL IN SOP BUTTON
8 GND

X14 - Universal
JST PHD 12M
Contact Name
1 12 V NEN
2 12 V STANDBY
3 5 V STANDBY
4 GND
5 DIGITAL IN 1 e.g. reserve
6 DIGITAL OUT 1 e.g. reserve
8 GND
9 ANALOG IN 1 e.g. reserve
12 GND

X17 - Fan
JST PHD 16M
Contact Name
1 POWER OUT 12V FAN 1 POWER
5 DIGITAL IN FAN 1 RESPONSE
9 GND
10 GND
11 ANALOG IN FAN 1 NTC
13 GND
14 GND
15 DIGITAL OUT FAN 1 PWM

X18 I/O 3 (MEI / Reserve)

JST PHD 14M
Contact Name
1 MEI CURRENT SOURCE 1 e.g. MEI 1
2 GND
3 MEI CURRENT SOURCE 2 e.g. MEI 2
4 GND
5 POWEROUT OC 5 e.g. reserve
6 GND
7 24 V SERVICE1
8 GND
10 GND
12 GND
13 5 V NEN
14 5 V NEN

X19 Power I/O (Switched Light)

JST PHD 10M
Contact Name
1 5 V NEN
2 12 V NEN
3 24 V SERVICE1
4 POWEROUT OC 1
5 GND
6 5 V NEN
7 12 V NEN
8 24 V SERVICE1
9 POWEROUT OC 2
10 GND
X21 - I/O 4 (CMD)

Type of connector:
JST PA 3-pin, M
1
Contact Name
1 DIGITAL OUT
2 GND
3 n.c.

X22 - UPS
Type of connector:
JST PA 4-pin, M
1
Contact Name
1 DIGITAL IN UPS ACTIVE
2 GND
3 DIGITAL IN UPS CAPACITY
4 GND
X24 Operating Unit

Type of connector:
RJ45
Contact Name
1 IO INTERRUPT
2 5V STANDBY
3 GND
4 n.c.
5 n.c.
6 DATA
7 GND
8 CLOCK
IC-Bus
Additionally the central special electronics provides a RJ45 socket (X24) to
connect an external control unit or an operator panel via IC bus.

USB ports
Furthermore a USB hub type B (X30) serves as a connection to the PC (USB
Upstream) and another twelve USB hubs type A (1A-1L) are provided for the
connection of more components.

Length: 294 mm (11.57")
Width: 113 mm (4.45")
Height: 28 mm (1,1")
Weight 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)

Console Electronics CTM / CTM II
Console Electronics CTM 01750147498
Console Electronics CTM II 01750235434
i This component consists the HW inventory data.

Introduction Console Electronics CTM / CTM II
Introduction
The Console Electronics CTM serves as an extension of the Special
electronics CTM and is equally connected to the PC through the USB
interface.
It is used for a connection of the following sub-assemblies:
Display
Shutter
Control of the fans and function inquiry for 2 controlled and 2 uncontrolled
fans
PIN pad
Softkeys (left and right)
ASKIM
up to eight additional user guidance (MEI)
Customer panel light (BBA)
Illumination of logo areas
IDCU lighting exertion
Signal generators such as loudspeakers or headphones
Additional door switch
Up to 6 other high speed USB devices can be connected to the Console

Electronics CTM via the integrated USB hub.
Fan control
You can connect up to four fans to the Special Electronics. The rotational
speed for the first two fans can be controlled according to the temperature.
Two more fans are operated at constant-speed.
When the operator panel is in use, the rotational speed of the fan is reduced to
25% to prevent the operator from being exposed to a vigorous air flow. When
the device is set back into the normal state of operation or one minute without
any input passes, the original rotational speed is reactivated. Additionally the
control is reactivated when reaching an alarming temperature to prevent the
device from overheating.
For security reasons, all fans are deactivated on opening the doors.

Console Electronics CTM / CTM II Display illumination
Display illumination
i The display illumination can be controlled both by request and by a
button on the Console Electronics CTM.
1 LCD light ON/OFF button
The background illumination of the display is switched off, after the CINEO
C2560 is powered on.
The display illumination can be controlled both by request and by a button on
the Console Electronics CTM. For instance, this is useful when the messages
shall be given on the display during the start-up phase of the PC. Pressing the
key another time disables this function again.
Audio outputs
The Console Electronics CTM has an input to receive audio-stereo signals
from the PC and to lead them to the 2 connectable speakers. If headphones
are connected, these can be addressed alternatively.
Either the audio signals from the PC are amplified or simple sounds generated
on the Special Electronics are emitted. A parallel operation of both inputs is
not possible. Since during audio operation e.g. the touch tones are to be
emitted via the logic board, the generated sounds are already mixed in on its
audio line.
Additionally the amplifier features a 'headphone detection' that can be used to
switch off the loudspeakers. For a changeover switch three different modes
are available

Firmware download Console Electronics CTM / CTM II
AutomaticMode
In the automatic mode the Console Electronics CTM detects automatically
when headphones are plugged in and cuts off the loudspeaker
immediately. When the headphones are detached, the special electronics
reactivates the loudspeaker output after a safety period.
SemiAutomaticMode
In the semiautomatic mode the loudspeakers are equally cut off by the
special electronics when headphones are plugged in. The reactivation in
contrast needs an approval by the system.
ManualMode
In the manual mode the special electronics detects the insertion and simply
reports this state to the system. Shutting on and off needs to be requested
by the system.
You can adjust the volume stepwise via a button on the operator panel.
Therefore a digital input port is provided whose signal is interpreted by the
microcontroller and passed on to the amplifier. Alternatively the volume can be
adjusted via software.
Firmware download
The firmware can be updated via USB connection. A firmware download does
not have any effect on the data in EEPROM.
In case of a voltage loss during the download, the booter is kept. This enables
you to perform another firmware download after a power failure.

Console Electronics CTM / CTM II Overview of LED signal situations
Overview of LED signal situations

To display the operating states and error conditions, the LEDs on the Console
Electronics CTM are addressed as follows:
Yellow Yellow
Red Green
(UPS (Capacity Status of the Special Electronics
(standby) (on)
working) empty)
Initialization phase
ON ON X X or
pending request to switch off
BLINKING BLINKING X X Firmware error
ON OFF X X System in standby

System switched off and temporary cold
ON BLINKING X X start active or
out of standby operation:
pending request to switch on.
OFF ON X X System has been switched on.
BLINKING ON X X - vacant -
BLINKING OFF X X SERVICE 1 or SERVICE 2 deactivated!
OFF BLINKING X X No USB enumeration!

BLINKING BLINKING Power supply unit reports error (over current
X X
fast fast etc.)
X X on off UPS in emergency power mode
X X on on UPS in emergency power mode, battery

capacity running out

Technical information Console Electronics CTM / CTM II
Technical information

Length: 300 mm (11.81")
Width: 83 mm (3.27")
Height: 27 mm (1.06")
Weight 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)
Plug positions

Console Electronics CTM / CTM II Technical information
Pin assignments
X2 Supply In
Contact Name
1 12 V STANDBY
2 12 V NEN
3 GND
4 12 V SERVICE 1
5 24 V SERVICE 1
6 GND
7 n.c.
8 n.c.

X3 - Supply A (Display)
Contact Name
1 GND
2 GND
3 12 V NEN
4 5 V NEN
X4 - Supply B (12V / 24V)
Contact Name
1 24 V SERVICE 1
2 12 V NEN
3 GND
4 GND

X11 LCD Light

Type of connector:
JST PA 6-pins M
Contact Name
1 DIGITAL OUT LCD LIGHT
2 GND
3 DIGITAL IN LCD LIGHT RESPONSE
4 GND
5 n.c.
6 n.c.
X15- I/O 2 (ASKIM / DIP)

Type of connector:
JST PA 8-pins M
Contact Name
1 12 V STANDBY
2 12 V NEN
3 GND
4 DIGITAL OUT VOLTAGE 12V
5 GND
6 DIGITAL IN 6 e.g. ASKIM IN
7 GND
8 24 V SERVICE 1

X13 I/O 1 (Door)
JST PHD 8M
Contact Name
1 24 V SERVICE 1
2 GND
3 POWEROUT OC 5 e.g. Door Switch
4 GND
5 DIGITAL IN 4 e.g. Door Response
6 GND
7 5 V NEN
8 GND

X14 - Universal
JST PHD 12M
Contact Name
1 12 V NEN
2 12 V STANDBY
3 5 V NEN
4 GND
8 GND
12 GND

X16 Current Source (MEI)
JST PHD 20M
Contact Name
1 CURRENT SOURCE 1 e.g. MEI 1
2 GND
4 GND
6 GND
8 GND
10 GND
12 GND
14 GND
16 GND
17 24 V SERVICE 1
18 12 V SERVICE 1
19 POWEROUT OC 4
20 GND

X17 - Fan
JST PHD 16M
Contact Name
9 GND
10 GND
13 GND
14 GND

X18 Power I/O 1 (Switched Light)
JST PHD 14M
Contact Name
1 5 V NEN
2 12 V NEN
3 24 V SERVICE 1
4 POWEROUT OC 1
5 5 V NEN
6 12 V NEN
7 24 V SERVICE 1
8 POWEROUT OC 2
9 GND
10 5 V NEN
11 12 V NEN
12 24 V SERVICE 1
13 POWEROUT OC 3
14 GND

X19 I/O 3 (SOFTKEYS)
JST PHD 10M
Contact Name
1 DIGITAL IN BUTTON 8
5 GND
10 GND
X21 - Audio In
Type of connector:
JST PA 3-pins M
Contact Name
1 AUDIO IN RIGHT
2 AUDIO IN LEFT
3 GND

X22 - Audio Out Speaker

Type of connector:
JST PA 4-pins M
Contact Name
1 AUDIO SPEAKER RIGHT +
2 AUDIO SPEAKER RIGHT -
3 AUDIO SPEAKER LEFT +
4 AUDIO SPEAKER LEFT -
X23 Audio Headphone

Type of connector:
JST PA 5-pins M
Contact Name
1 DIGITAL IN VOL CONTROL IN
2 GND
3 AUDIO HEADPHONE RIGHT
4 AUDIO HEADPHONE LEFT
5 GND
X30 / 2A to 2F - USB
Furthermore the Console Electronics CTM has a USB hub type B (X30) serves
as a connection to the PC (USB Upstream) and another six USB micro hubs
(2A to 2F) are provided for the connection of more components.

Embedded PC A4
i The configuration of the system unit (PC) conducted in the factory
only after the order of the customer. Because of this only the so called
swap PC is replaced in a service situation. The individual components
need to be replaced on site at the customer.
The swap PC is equipped with 1 GB RAM and the corresponding CPU
with the CPU cooler.
Depending on the configuration, the PC can be equipped with
additional components (e.g. extension boards) or with components
with a bigger memory capacity (e.g. main memory).
In the case of a PC replacement, this components need to be
retrofitted from the old PC in the new one or they need to be ordered
separately, if a malfunction occurs.
Swap PC versions overview

i This chapter lists the available versions. Which version is used in the
device is described in the chapter "Function and Integration".
Description Part number

Swap PC EPC_A4 Cel440 TPMen 01750171737
Swap PC EPC_A4 Cel440 nonTPM 01750190276
Swap PC EPC_A4 DualCore-E2160 nonTPM 01750190277
Swap PC EPC_A4 Core2Duo-E6400 nonTPM 01750190278
Swap PC EPC_A4 Core2Duo-E8400 nonTPM 01750190279
Swap PC EPC_A4 DualCore-E5300 nonTPM 01750190280

Swap PC versions overview Embedded PC A4

Embedded PC A4 Technical data
Technical data
ATX system board
Chip set: INTEL chip set Q45 Express/
ICH10DO
Microprocessors:
Swape PC version:
01750171737, 01750190276 INTEL Celeron 440
01750171738, 01750190277 INTEL Pentium Dual-Core E2160
01750190275, 1750190280 INTEL Core 2 Duo E5300
01750171739, 1750190278 INTEL Core 2 Duo E6400
01750171740, 1750190279 INTEL Core 2 Duo E8400
Front side bus: 800/1066/1333 MHz
Main memory: 512 MB, max. 16 GB; Non-ECC
DIMM slots: 4x DDR3 DIMM base (240-pin)
Flash EPROM: BISO update possible via floppy disk
Interfaces (front side) 2 x USB
Interfaces (rear side) 2 x serial (9-pin)

6 x USB
1 x CRT
1 x DVI-D
1 x microphone
1 x Line-In
1 x Line-Out / Speaker-Out
1 x LAN
Interfaces (internal) 5x SATA (3Gb/s)

1x eSATA
1 x Wake-on-LAN
Fixed disk drive

Fixed disk capacity: min. 160 GB; 3,5

Technical data Embedded PC A4
Slots 1 x PCI
2 x PCIe x1
1 x PCIe x16
Video: Integrated graphics (GMA 4500) with

DirectX 10
Necessary memory: Video memory shared
Audio: On-Board Realtek ALC888 Audio

Codec controller
LAN: Gigabit LAN with ASF 2.0, PXE boot

and WOL, Intel 82567LM PHY
(RJ 45)
Connected loads
Line voltage: 110 - 120 V / 220 - 240 V
Line frequency: 50 - 60 Hz
Dimensions
Dimensions (H x W x D): 120 x 370 x 290 mm
(4.72" x 14.57" x 11.42")
* customer-specific

Embedded PC A4 Front side
Front side
1 Fan 2 Two USB connections

Device rear Embedded PC A4
Device rear
1 Power input 10 PCI slot

2 Controls 11 PCIe x1 slot
3 COM 1 12 PCIe x1 slot
4 DVI-D slot 13 PCIe x16 slot
5 Four USB interfaces 14 LAN on board (Ethernet)
6 Two USB interfaces 15 CRT video
7 Microphone 16 COM 2
8 Line (out)
9 Line (in)

Embedded PC A4 Controls
Controls
1 Power LED
2 ON/OFF button
3 LED HDD

ATX system board Embedded PC A4
ATX system board
4012copy

Embedded PC A4 ATX system board
Lithium battery
To retent the data of the date, the time and the CMOS, there is a lithium
battery on the system board. This battery need to be replaced approx. all three
years.
There is danger of fire or explosion if the batteries are handled

incorrectly.
It is therefore important to note the following points:

Avoid short circuits.
Never recharge the battery.
Avoid temperatures above +100 C (+212 F).
Do not try to open the battery by force.
Do not allow the battery to come into contact with water or fire.
Only replace it by the same or an equivalent type recommended by

WINCOR NIXDORF International GmbH (see chapter "Appendix",
section "Consumables" in the operating manual).
Dispose of used batteries in compliance with national regulations

(observe the manufacturer's specifications, if necessary).

Service concept for the EPC A4 Embedded PC A4
Service concept for the EPC A4

The swap PCs are always delivered without any hard disk in a service
situation. This means that in a service situation the hard disk need to be
retrofitted from the broken PC on-side. In this case, the hard disk do not have
to be unscrewed, you can remove the whole mounting incl. cables from the
broken PC. The hard disk mounting is just engaged in the base housing and
can be removed without any tools. The mounting is fastened by the closed
cover of the PC.
The hard disk and the SATA cable can be ordered separately as a spare part.
The hard disk mounting can not be ordered as a spare part.
Inside view
HD carrier with HD

Embedded PC A4 Service concept for the EPC A4
The broken EPC A4 should only be returned without the hard disk.
There are also main components as spare parts available for the EPC A4:
Motherboard
Power supply unit
Memory
Processor
Hard Disk
Fan

TPM Embedded PC A4
TPM
Th Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a Chip on the motherboard, which
extents the EPC A4 by essential safety functions. The chips acts in several
points like a permanently installed Smart card, but with the important
difference, that it is not coupled to a specific user (user Instance),but to a local
computer (hardware instance). Except in the EPC A4, the TPM is also
integrated in the RM3 modules and the data traffic between PC and RM3
module is encrypted with an unique cryptographic key.
If you replace the PC or the motherboard, manual alignments, which are
described in a separate documentation from PSD5, become necessary in the
software during the initial operation with a RM3 module,
If the TPM is not needed, the jumper JCI8 is set to inactive (2-3) on the
motherboard and the BIOS entry is set on disable. There is no need to change
the jumper JCI6.
In the first PC deliveries, the TPM

versions were delivered as nonTPM.
Because of this the additional label
"TPM not initialized" (1) is still stuck on
the PC.
If the TPM is activated in the CINEO product family, it is not possible to

operate an initiated
nonTPM EPC A4. It is also not possible to initiate an EPC A4 from the outside
of the Wincor Nixdorf network, e.g. at the customer. The TPM initiated or not
initiated PC have to be ordered in the service logistics matching to the
respective CINEO system family. The same procedure applies to the
motherboard. The motherboard is also available in an initiated and not initiated
version in the service logistics.

Embedded PC A4 TPM
In the first PC deliveries, the TPM

versions were delivered as nonTPM.
Because of this the additional label
"TPM not initialized" (1) is still stuck on
the PC.
The TPM is only active, if this is displayed on the identifying label on the PC.

Pin assignment Embedded PC A4
Pin assignment
COM 1 / COM 2
DSUB 9M
Pin Description
1 DCD
2 TXD
3 TxD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RS-232
8 CTS
9 RI

Embedded PC A4 Pin assignment
USB
Type of connector:
USB 4F
Pin Description
1 VCC + 5 V
2 - Data
3 + Data
4 GND

DVI
1 8 C1 C2 Type of connector:
DVI-D (24 + 1) F
9 C5
17 24 C3 C4
Pin Signal Active Comment

1 T.M.D.S DATA 2- Yes
2 T.M.D.S DATA 2+ Yes
3 T.M.D.S DATA 2/4 SHIELD Yes
4 T.M.D.S DATA 4- No
5 T.M.D.S DATA 4+ No
6 DDC CLOCK Yes
7 DDC DATA Yes
8 ANALOG VERT. SYNC No
14 5 V POWER Yes
15 GND Yes
16 HOT PLUG DETECT Yes
22 T.M.D.S CLOCK SHIELD Yes
23 T.M.D.S CLOCK+ Yes
24 T.M.D.S CLOCK- Yes

Embedded PC A4 Pin assignment
C1 ANALOG RED No
C2 ANALOG GREEN No
C3 ANALOG BLUE No
C4 ANALOG HORZ SYNC No
C5 ANALOG GROUND Yes = digital ground
VGA
5 1 Type of connector:
DSUB 15/09F
15 11
Pin Description
1 RED
2 GREEN
3 BLUE
4 NC
5 GND
6 GND
7 GND
8 GND
9 + 5 V FS
10 GND
11 NC
12 MONID 1
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 MONID 2

Audio Line-In
Symbol:
Color of the socket: light blue
Pin Description
Tip Audio Left in
Ring Audio Right in
Sleeve GND
Audio microphone
Symbol:
Color of the socket: pink
Pin Description
Tip Mono in
Ring Mic Bias voltage
Sleeve GND
Audio Line-out
Symbol:
Color of the socket: light green
Pin Description
Tip Audio Left out
Ring Audio Right out
Sleeve GND

Embedded PC A4 BIOS setup
BIOS setup
i You can find the system-specific deviations of the BIOS settings in the
HW conf, which are attached in every system on floppy or CD ROM.
Bios version: WN BNK 05/06 (M4)
BIOS default settings:

Main: System Time: [hh:mm:ss]
System Date: [mm/tt/yyy]
> SATA Port 0 [None]

Advanced: > Advanced chip set control
Core multi-processing: [enabled] (note1)
Default primary video adapter: [PCI]
IGD - device 2, function 1: [enabled]
DVMT 5.0 mode:
Pre-allocated memory size : [32MB]
IGD - memory size: [MaxDVMT]
Hard Disk pre-delay: [3 seconds]
> I/O device configuration
Serial port A: [enabled]
Base I/O address/IRQ: [3F8/IRQ 4]

BIOS setup Embedded PC A4
Serial port B: [Enabled]

Base I/O address/IRQ: [2F8/IRQ 3]
Reset configuration data: [No]

Large Disk access mode: [DOS]
Enable ACPI: [Yes]
Onboard LAN controller: [enabled]
OnBoard PCI LAN BootRom: [disabled]
Onboard audio: [enabled]
After power failure [Follow AC/Power]
Intruder interrupt select: [disabled]
TPM State: Change TPM state [no change]
Boot: Boot priority order: Excluded from boot order:

1: USB FDC: SATA 0:
2: USB CDROM: SATA 2:
3: USB HDD: SATA 3:
4: USB KEY: SATA 4:
5: SATA 1: SATA 5:
6: PCI SCSI: SATA CD:
7: - free - PCI LAN:
8: - free - UNKNOWN:
Notes: 1) Entry visible only if Core Multi-processing is provided by actual processor and is
set [Enabled]. After being set [Disabled], re-[Enabled] is possible only by loading defaults via
(F9).

USB Multi DVD drive 01750199695
Description
1 DVD tray 3 USB connection

2 EJECT key 4 Power supply
The Multi DVD drive is connected to the PC's USB port or to a USB hub.
The voltage supply is provided via the central power supply unit.

Pin assignment USB Multi DVD drive 01750199695
Pin assignment
USB port
USB type B, 4-pin M
3 4
Contact Description
1 VCC (+5 V)
2 - DATA
3 + DATA
4 GND
Power supply
Mini DIN 5F
5 2
Contact Description
1 +12 V
2 GND
3 GND
4 +5 V
5 +5 V

USB Multi DVD drive 01750199695 Technical data
Technical data
Speed:
CD-RW: 32 x
DVD-RAM read / write: 12 x
CD-R: 48 x
DVD-ROM: 16 x
DVD+R / -R DL: 12 x
Supported media types:
CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-RAM
DVD_ROM
DVD+R/ -R
Interface: 1 x USB 2.0 type B, 4-pin

Technical data USB Multi DVD drive 01750199695

Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT
01750107095
Introduction
The Intel PRO/1000 GT PCI Ethernet adapter allows PCs to be connected to a
Gigabit Ethernet network. It has an RJ-45 connector.
The Ethernet adapter is compatible with Fast Ethernet and Ethernet. This
makes it easy to migrate 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet networks to Gigabit Ethernet
networks. The existing 4-pair cabling can continue to be used in the event of
migration. The Ethernet adapter automatically detects the transmission rate
and uses the fastest data rate.
It dynamically tests and reports network problems (interrupts, error rate, cable
length) and automatically compensates for cable issues such as crossover
cable and incorrect pin assignment or polarity. In addition, the Ethernet
adapter assigns addresses and IRQs in accordance with the plug & play
specification.
The drivers for this adapter are on the firmware / driver / utilities CD from
Wincor Nixdorf which is shipped with the card or they are available in the
extranet/internet.

Introduction Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT 01750107095
1 Activity LED (ACT) 3 Link LED (LNK)

2 RJ45 connector
The Intel PRO/1000 GT PCI Ethernet adapter connects your PCI-compatible

PC to a 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet network and supports a
variety of desktop and network management functions.
Supported desktop and network management functions:
Offline diagnostics
Intel Boot Agent
ACPI Power Management
Wake on LAN
Desktop Management Interface (DMI) 2.0

Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT 01750107095 Card settings
Meaning of LEDs
The Ethernet card has two light emitting diodes (LEDs) to indicate the state of
operation. The LEDs have the following meaning:
i The LNK LED can be yellow or green.

The color shown depends on the link that has been established (see
following table).
LED State Meaning

LNK (link) Off The 10BASE-T link is active.
Constant The 100BASE-T link is active.
green
Constant The 1000BASE-T link is active.
yellow
ACT (activity) Flashing Network traffic
Constant Heavy network traffic
Off No network traffic
Card settings
It is not necessary to define settings for the Ethernet adapter because it
assigns addresses and IRQs in accordance with the plug & play specification.
Installation
Install the necessary driver for the adapter from the driver/utilities CD or
from the Wincor Nixdorf extranet/internet.

Problems Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT 01750107095
Problems
If problems occur, please perform the following:
Check whether the Ethernet adapter is evenly and completely inserted in

the PCI slot.
Check whether the Ethernet card is recognized by the operating system

and / or whether errors occurred while the drivers were loading.
You may need to install the card in a different PCI slot.
Windows XP stores a detailed log of all device installations in the file
SystemRoot\setupapi.log.
Check whether the Ethernet adapter and the connected component are
correctly connected.
Check that the connectors are correctly inserted.
Check the Windows 2000 / XP event log if problems occurred while loading
the drivers under the operating system.
You can view defective drivers in the System Information program under
Components//Problem Devices.
Check the software tutorial and readme file on the CD if any problems
occur with the software.
Technical data
Parameter Features
Manufacturer Intel
Type PRO/1000 GT Desktop adapter
Transmission rate 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps
Operating voltage 5 V DC
Current consumption 800 mA
Temperature range 0 to 55 C (32 to 131 F) in operation

Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT 01750107095 Pin assignment
Pin assignment
RJ45 8F
Pin Signal name

1 TX +
2 TX -
3 RX +
4 -
5 -
6 RX -
7 -
8 -

Pin assignment Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT 01750107095

FireWire card PCIe x1 FWA2414A
01750167156
Manufacturer: Sunix
Card type: FWA2414A
FireWire card
1 External connections (two 6-pin connectors)

2 Internal connection (a 6-pin connector)
3 Power connection

Delivery package FireWire card PCIe x1 FWA2414A 01750167156
Delivery package
The delivery package includes the FireWire card PCIe x1 FWA2414A.
Malfunctions
If there are any malfunctionings, please note the following instructions.
Check if the FireWire card is inserted completely and equally into the PCIe
slot. Check if the card gets recognized by the operating system and
whether there was an error during the driver downloading.
If necessary, insert the card into another slot.
Check if the FireWire card and the affiliated component are connected with
a 1394 cable.
Check if the connectors are inserted correctly.
Check the Windows' event record, if the operating system had any troubles
during the driver downloading.
Check the software tutorial and the ReadMe file on the CD for possible
troubles with the software.

FireWire card PCIe x1 FWA2414A 01750167156 Technical Data
Technical Data
Parameter Values
Manufacturer Sunix
Type FWA2414A
Transmission rate 400 Mbps
Cycle Frequency 33 MHz
System requirements
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 7
Slot PCIe x1 (compatible with X4, X8 and X16)

Cable connection FireWire card PCIe x1 FWA2414A 01750167156
Cable connection
FireWire card
6-pin, F
1 5
Contact Designation
1 Power Supply
2 Power Supply
3 Signal line
4 Signal line
5 Signal line
6 Signal line

Anti-Skimming module II
ASKIM 2 base unit 01750176088
Our electronic solution to skimming modules on automated teller machines

and terminals (in the following described as devices) is called ASKIM = Anti-
SKIMming. It should identify the skimming modules or disturb the copying of
magnetic cards with a permanent interference field right before the input slot of
the card reader.
A skimming module is an illegal skimmer that is attached outside on the device
right before the magnetic card reader to copy the customer data from the
magnetic stripe. A skimmong module consists of a housing, a magnetic card
read head and a electronic which 'skims', saves or transmits via radio data of
the customers. In addition, the PIN is spyed out with other facilities. The data
which is collected by the skimming module is copied on blank cards and these
cards are used to draw money from devices. The skimming modules are so
improved by now that the user can nearly recognize them.
The product-specific software (e.g. ProBase) is mandatory to operate the anti-
skimming unit.
For further information please refer to the documentation "Generation and
Tools", which is part of the product-specific software and is delivered on same
disk. You can see it on the internet under http://intranet.wincor-
nixdorf.com/cms/Products/TI/Support/Software, too.

Components Anti-Skimming module II
Components
The ASKIM unit consists of the ASKIM 2 basic unit, the sensor ASKIM, the
suppressor coil in the card reader shutter and the ASKIM button with status
LED (see section "Function elements").
Component Order number
ASKIM 2 base unit 01750176088
Sensors:
Sensor ASKIM 2 PC2XXX 01750174706
Sensor ASKIM 2 PC3100 01750174728
Sensor ASKIM 2 300mm 01750160003
Sensor ASKIM 2 PC2xxx / PC4xxx ET 01750186580
Sensor ASKIM 2 PC1500 1650mm 01750192836
Sensor ASKIM 2 PC1500 1300mm 01750193150
Sensor ASKIM 2 1000mm 01750196196
Sensor Askim II T 01750169345
Sensor Askim II ProCon 01750193563
Suppressor coil with metal plate
Print_ASKIM2_Coil_2xxx 01750174494
Interference electronics with illumination
Bel. Card input_suppressor coil kpl. 1750186807

Anti-Skimming module II Components
ASKIM 2 base unit

Sensor

Anti-Skimming module II Components
Sensor (installed in the card reader shutter for ProCash (2XXXxe/USB)

Sensor (installed in the card reader shutter with illumination)

Anti-Skimming module II How the scanner works
How the scanner works

The sensor and the suppressor coil are located in the immediate vicinty of the
magnet strip card reader's card slot.
A connection to the card reader is mandatory to guarantee proper functioning.
The ASKIM electronic checks the environment of the magnet strip card
reader's card slot for untypical changes caused by certain objects which are
usually included in a skimming module. Exceed this changes the time frame,
which can be set via the product-specific software, continuously the alarm
threshold, an alarm is triggered. The time frame is mandatory so that changes
which occur if you use the device normally, doesn't trigger an alarm.
i Observe the dependencies between the ASKIM firmware and the

product-specific software (e.g. ProBase) and the card reader to
operate the ASKIM module.
The card reader
CHD V2xF (V.24) with the firmware
V2xB00.bin in the version 1500 or higher
CHD V2xU (USB) with the firmware
V2xUB00.bin in the version 1102 or higher
CHD V2CU (CHD V3x) without firmware restrictions
is equipped.
Depending on the application you use, it is capable to e.g. take the system out
of operation, to trigger a (silent) alarm, to switch a camera on or to send a
message via the product-specific software (e.g. ProView).
The alarm can be reset via the ASKIM button or via the product-specific
software.

Connecting the ASKIM 2 base unit Anti-Skimming module II
After the device has been closed, the product-specific software starts the
calibration process with a short acoustic signal. For this purpose, the device
must remain closed for at least 45 seconds.
After the successful resetting of the alarm, 3 short acoustic signals sound and
the Status LED goes out or it lights up briefly every 10 seconds (depending on
the configuration).
Connecting the ASKIM 2 base unit
Block diagram
LED
ASKIM 2 Taster
Sensor
Zentral- CHD USB

netzteil

Anti-Skimming module II Connecting the ASKIM 2 base unit
Circuit diagram of the ASKIM 2 base unit
X1 USB port
X2 ASKIM button / status LED connection
X3 Power supply connection
X4 Switching signals card reader / reserve in-/output connection
X5 Suppressor coil sensor ASKIM connection
X6 Sensor ASKIM connection

Functions used Anti-Skimming module II
Functions used
General information on the functions

During the operation of the Anti-kimming module, alarms may occure which
connot be clearly allocated. These alarms may be triggered by external
influences (eg. massive interference fields from the environment) or by
criminal skimming attacks which were interrupted by the skimmer after the
device was shut down. Based on previous experience, up to 5 of such not
clearly identifiable alarms may occur per year.
Suppression of the alarm evaluation

A proper functioning of the ASKIM unit can only be guaranteed if the CINEO
C2560 is closed and if the product-specific software runs. Because of this the
alarm evaluation is suppressed while the device is opened.
But an alarm which is already set remains.
Alarm delay (Time frame)

The alarm delay can be changed with the product-specific software.
If KDIAG is used, the alarm delay is set on the smallest value by KDIAG while
the test is running (see section "Test").

Anti-Skimming module II Functions used
Switch-on/switch-off characteristics
After the first start-up or after replacing components (sensor, ASKIM 2 basic
unit, shutter), a basic calibration is necessary to get defined start parameters.
These start parameters are saved in the Anti-Skimming module II. If no basic
calibration is performed, the product-specific software detects this, if possible,
and the ASKIM status LED is set on "Calibration necessary". Then a
calibration has to be performed. And the product-specific software performs
automatically a basic calibration.
i Before you perform calibration make sure that there are no foreign
objects around or in the input slot for the magnetic cards.
If the device is shut down or isn't supplied with power, the last Anti-Skimming
module II's measured values are saved. When the device is switched on again
the measured values load and are compared to the measured values of the
power-on time. If the deviations are tolerable, the device switches back to
Normal operation. If not, an alarm is triggered.

Functions used Anti-Skimming module II
Basic calibration/Start-up
unit, shutter) or after check-ups with KDIAG, a basic calibration is necessary to
get defined start parameters.
Before processing the basic calibration it is necessary to ensure that
i there are no foreign objects around or in the input slot for the magnetic
card,
that the product-specific software is active on the system unit and that
the CINEO C2560 is completely closed.
If no basic calibration is processed, problems could occur.

i
As far as the product-specific software can detect this, the ASKIM
status LED will be set on "Calibration necessary". Then a calibration
has to be performed. And the product-specific software performs
automatically a basic calibration.
Normal operation
Normal operation: Power is supplied via switched voltage 12V.
Standby operation
Standby operation: Alarm evaluation is switched off. Interference field is turned
off. Switched voltage 12V is turned off, standby voltage 12V is switched on.

Anti-Skimming module II Functions used
Setting the function of the alarm output

An alarm is avaiable as a status via the product-specific software's interface.
The function of the alarm output can be set on 'Save alarm' or 'Don't save
alarm' on an ASKIM module. This is saved in the product-specific software
(Registry Parameter) as a parameter. For further information please refer to
the documentation "Generation and Tools", which is part of the product-
specific software and is delivered on same disk. You can see it on the internet
under http://intranet.wincor-
nixdorf.com/cms/Products/TI/Support/Software, too.
Save alarm (default if the device is delivered)
If 'Save alarm' is set, an alarm will be saved in the product-specific software

and can be reset via the ASKIM button or via the product-specific software
(see section "Resetting the alarm").
Don't save alarm (selectable)
The alarm output only remains as long as a skimming module is attached. If

the skimming module is removed, the alarm output will be automatically reset
without any calibration.
If you require information about the display of the current setting and about
switching this setting, please consult the manual "Generation and Tools".

Function elements Anti-Skimming module II
Resetting the alarm and calibration
i The product-specific software must be active and the device has to be

closed during the calibration process.
A set alarm will be displayed by a blinking Status LED on the ASKIM button. It
can be reset via the ASKIM button or via the product-specific software or via
KDIAG.
The calibration doesn't start until the device is closed. After it is shut it is
necessary to keep the door or the customer panel closed for 45 seconds.
Check carefully before the calibration process that there isn't a skimming
module or any other object attached near the input slot for the magnetic cards.
When calibration is completed, the status LED goes off.
Function elements
1 Status LED (red) 2 ASKIM button (calibrate button)

Anti-Skimming module II Status messages
Status messages
The current status of the anti-skimming module II and any messages that
occur are shown on the status LED.
The anti-skimming module II status messages are listed in the following table.
The status messages, their meanings and the remedies you must employ are
explained so that you can eliminate problems.
LED Designation Action
lights up briefly
every 10
seconds * No alarm has been
No action needs to be taken
or off* triggered
Blinking red An alarm has been Reset the alarm after checking
triggered the card insertion slot in the
customer panel.
Red Calibration is necessary Calibrate the anti-skimming
device
Red after Calibration requested see section ("Calibration")
button is
pressed
Blinking red Basic calibration see section "Basic calibration"
briefly requested
* depending on the configuration

LED on the ASKIM 2 base unit Anti-Skimming module II
LED on the ASKIM 2 base unit

On the electronic is a LED. You can check the functioning of the ASKIM unit
with this LED .
The LED 'Ready' displays besides the statuses OFF and ON several hardware
statuses with blinking codes. This blinking code displays every 3 seconds with
a pulse duration of 200ms ON and 300ms OFF per single pulse. If there are
several statuses to show, the one with the highest priority will be displayed.
The blinking status display is updated after every 3 seconds.
Status description of the LED (1)
LED Condition Description Remedy

Off Module is off, no Make sure that
firmware in the supply voltage
FLASH or it isn't is turned on.
initialized yet
(EEPROM
completely empty
or damaged)

Anti-Skimming module II LED on the ASKIM 2 base unit
LED Condition Description Remedy

Blinking Ready Some seconds after the none
green supply voltage is
switched on the LED
will be set.
1x blink 12 V POWER Make sure that
switched is the supply voltage
missing is turned on.
Check the plug
connection and
make sure that
the cabling is not
damaged.
2x blink USB cable not Check the plug
connected connection and
make sure that
the cabling is not
damaged.
3x blink no valid ECP file
loaded or both
parameter record
copies are
damaged
4x blink Detection coil not Check the
connected or connector
defective Check if the
sensor,
interference print
and cabling are
not damaged
5x blink Protection field Check the plug
coil not connected connection of the
or defective sensors and of
the interference
print. Make sure
that the cabling is
not damaged.

Basic calibration/Start-up Anti-Skimming module II
Basic calibration/Start-up
unit, shutter) or after check-ups with KDIAG, a basic calibration is necessary to
get defined start parameters.
Before processing the basic calibration it is necessary to ensure that
i there are no foreign objects around or in the input slot for the magnetic
card,
that the product-specific software is active on the system unit and that
the device is completely closed.
i If no basic calibration is processed, problems could occur.

As far as the product-specific software can detect this, the ASKIM
status LED will be set on "Calibration necessary".
Then a calibration has to be performed. And the product-specific
software performs automatically a basic calibration.
Reconnect the ASKIM 2 base unit with the USB cable from the device, if is
was disconnected for the test with KDIAG.
Press and hold the ASKIM button for at least 30 seconds.
After that the status LED will begin to blink.
Close the device (see the device's operating manual) and keep it closed for
at least 45 seconds.
calibration process. For this purpose, the device must remain closed for at
least 45 seconds.
Please wait 45 seconds.

After successful calibrationthe Status LED goes out or it lights up briefly every
10 seconds (depending on the configuration).

Anti-Skimming module II Resetting the alarm
Resetting the alarm

i Resetting the alarm may be invoked via the ASKIM button or via the
product-specific software.
Before resetting the alarm it is necessary to ensure that there are no
foreign objects around or in the input slot for the magnetic card.
Open the device (see the chapter "Basic Operation").

Use an object such as a ballpoint pen
to press the ASKIM button for approx.
2 seconds, then release the button.
When you release the button the
status LED will be lit. When the
deposit process is completed, the LED
goes off.
i The product-specific software must be active before the device is

closed.
Close the device (see the chapter "Basic Operation").
calibration process with a short acoustic signal*. For this purpose, the device
After successful resetting of the alarm, 3 short acoustic signals sound and the
Status LED goes out or it lights up briefly every 10 seconds (depending on the
configuration).
* depending on the configuration

Saving / not saving the alarm Anti-Skimming module II
Saving / not saving the alarm

This function is saved in the product-specific software (Registry Parameter) as
a parameter. For further information of the display the current setting and of
the switching procedure please refer to the documentation "Generation and
Tools", which is part of the product-specific software and is delivered on same
disc.
Calibration
If recalibration becomes necessary while it is in operation, this is indicated by
a steady red status LED next to the ASKIM button. In this case, the ASKIM
button has to be pressed in order to obtain new start parameters.
i Before you perform calibration make sure that there are no foreign
objects around or in the input slot for the magnetic cards.
Open the device (see the chapter "Basic Operation").
Use an object such as a ballpoint pen
to press the ASKIM button for approx.
2 seconds, then release the button.
When you release the button the
status LED will be lit. When the
deposit process is completed, the LED
goes off.
i The product-specific software must be active before the device is

closed.

Anti-Skimming module II Pin assignment
Close the device (see the chapter "Basic Operation").

calibration process with a short acoustic signal. For this purpose, the device
After successful calibration, 3 short acoustic signals sound and the Status LED
goes out or it lights up briefly every 10 seconds (depending on the
configuration).
Pin assignment
USB
2 1 Connector type:
USB 4-pin
3 4
PIN Assignment
1 +5 V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND

Pin assignment Anti-Skimming module II
Connector X2, ASKIM button / status LED

connection
Type of connector:
JST PH 5-pin, M
Pin Assignment
1 +3.3 V
2 not applicable
3 Status LED
4 ASKIM button
5 GND
Connector X3, power supply connection

Type of connector:
JST PH 3-pin, M
Pin Assignment
1 +12 V (switched)
2 +12 V (standby)
3 GND

Anti-Skimming module II Pin assignment
Connector X4, switching signals card reader /

reserve in-/output connection
Type of connector:
JST PHD 2x 4-pin, M
Pin Assignment
1 Switching output
2 Switching output
3 Reserve input
4 GND
5 IDKG switch
6 GND
7 Shuttersignal IDKG
8 GND
Connector X5, suppressor coil sensor

connection
Type of connector:
JST PH 4-pin, M
Pin Assignment
1 Suppressor coil +
2 Suppressor coil -
3 Sensor
4 Sensor

Test Anti-Skimming module II
Test
i Bridging of the door contacts leads to an incorrect functioning of the

anti-skimming module.
KDIAG must not be installed on the system unit (PC) of the device.
Functioning of the anti-skimming unit can be checked with the help of the
LEDs at the anti-skimming base unit and the test tool KDIAGplus for ASKIM 2.
From the firmware version 1010 of the base unit ASKIM 2 on, some status
codes are additionally displayed on the base unit ASKIM 2 using the LEDs.
You will find information about that in the ASKIM 2 service manual.
The tests are carried out with KDIAGplus for ASKIM 2. The following version
statuses (minimum status or higher) of KDIAGplus are preconditions for the
test:
QualifyingPlusAskim2 Version 1.0.7 (build22)
Precondition:
The test program KDIAGplus for ASKIM 2 was completely and correctly
installed on a notebook and is executable. An additional USB connecting cable
(connector A on connector B) is available (to connect the notebook directly to
the base unit ASKIM II).
Test procedure
Establish the USB connection between the notebook and the base unit
ASKIM 2.
Switch on the voltage supply of the device.
Check the green LED on the base unit of the ASKIM II. If it does not light
up, all plug connections must be checked, especially the ones of the
suppressor coil and the detection coil. Then switch the power supply off
and on again or detach the power plug on the base unit ASKIM II for a
short time.

Anti-Skimming module II Test
Query the operating status via the test center 'Connection test' in the
KDIAGplus for ASKIM 2. The connection of the power supply and the USB
connection are then checked and a connection test is carried out after that.
Query the coil function via the test center 'Coil test' in the KDIAGplus for
ASKIM 2. If one or both coils are defective, an error message is displayed
showing which coil is affected (suppressor coil and/or detection coil).
Using 'Prepare Module' in the KDIAGplus for ASKIM 2, the electronics and
the sensor technology are matched (Autoadjust & Autogain) and the
electronics are calibrated.
The functioning of the anti-skimming module is checked using 'Alarm test'.

In the initial state (no metallic object in
front of the IDCU slot), all 9 channels
must indicate 'no alarm' (displayed by
green boxes in the KDIAGplus). If any
of the channels indicate 'alarm', they
must be re-calibrated via the test
center 'Prepare Module' (the 'Alarm
test' must be completed beforehand).
At first hold a metal object (e.g. a

screw M4x6 or similar) in front of the
right and then in front of the left side of
the card reader slot. Several channels
must switch to the alarm state (red).
Then remove the metallic object. All
channels must switch back to 'green'.
After the alarm test is completed, the subsequent dialog for the interfering
field must be confirmed with 'OK'.
Re-establish the USB connection between system unit (PC) and the base
unit ASKIM II. Particularly make sure that the USB connector is correctly
attached in the base unit ASKIM II.

Test Anti-Skimming module II
On the operating system level, check that the base unit ASKIM 2 is
correctly integrated.
i During the initial operation, you should perform a basic calibration by

pressing the button on the device. This should not be performed with
the KDIAGplus. You will find information about that in the ASKIM II
service manual.

Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)
i This chapter lists the available versions of the component. Which of
these versions is used in the CINEO C2560 is described in the chapter
"Function and Integration".
i This component is comprised of HW Inventory data.
Card reader Part Number

Standard version 01750173205
ACT version 01750199931
HiCo version 01750199932
i CHD V3x is the sales-oriented designation, CHD V2CU is that of the

manufacturer and is also listed on the card reader.

Trusted computing / Safe channel Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)
The card reader can process magnetic cards as well as chip cards. The
firmware can be reloaded, if necessary, via the interface. The card reader also
features an I/O port which can be used, for example, to control a certain anti-
skimming module.
The card handling device is prepared for integration of a security access
module (SAM). The device features an integrated module mounting located on
the side of the card reader to accommodate the SAM chip card in ID-000
format.
The SAM module can be used to implement encryption and decryption
standards by means of a crypto processor. The selection of the ID-000 chip
card is customer-specific and depends on the possibilities of the application
software used.
The ACT version also has a feature that arrests an ID card if the system
software detects a certain type of manipulation. The ID card arrest is triggered
by the software. The card can only be released again manually.
After an arrested ID card has been removed, the arrested card functionality
may no longer be ensured under certain circumstances.
Card reader CHD V2CU must therefore be checked and replaced if necessary
after ID card arrest.
The HiCo version enables the writing of ID cards in accordance with ISO 7811-
6. The high coercive magnetic track is resistant against deletions from other
magnets (e.g. magnetic pocket seals) and is intended to make manipulation of
the data on the magnetic track more difficult.
An optional firmware extension is offered by the so-called jitter functionality.
Here the ID card is subjected to a constant change of direction and movement
during insertion and release. This is intended to prevent the magnetic stripe
from being read out by skimmers mounted in front of the device (also see the
section "Firmware").

Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x) Trusted computing / Safe channel
The device can handle the following cards:

Magnetic cards: ISO/IEC 7810/ID-1, 7811-1/2/6 (R/W)
ISO 7811-6 HiCo (R)
ISO 7811-6 HiCo (R/W) (applies only for the HiCo
version)
Chip cards: ISO/IEC 7810 (ID000)
ISO/IEC 7816-1-3
Protocols T = 0, T = 1
EMV Version 4.0 & 4.1
(EMV = Europay, MasterCard, Visa)
ZKA
Card transport: 200 mm/s 10% for MM operations

300 mm/s other movements

In the case of the CINEO systems, communication between individual
components and the system unit (PC) can be secured with the "safe channel"
when certain prerequisites are in place. To accomplish this, it must be possible
to link the components with a Smartcard.
The CHD-V2CU (CHD-V3x) with deployed SAM module meets the
requirements for setting up a safe channel with the system unit (PC). If the
card reader is replaced, the SAM module must be transferred. It is mandatory
that the points listed under the corresponding section "Trusted Computing /
Safe Channel" in the "Introduction" chapter be taken into account for this
purpose. A special firmware must be loaded for the safe channel.
Additional information can be found in the corresponding section in the
Introduction.

Device views Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)
Device views
Overall view
Standard
2 4
1 2 3 2
1 Wheel for transporting the cards manually

2 Shutter lever to operate the shutter manually
3 Card insertion slot
4 SAM module mounting for accommodating the SAM module

Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x) Device views
ACT version
4 5
2 4
1 2 3 2
1 Wheel for transporting the cards manually

3 Card insertion slot
4 SAM module mounting for accommodating the SAM module
5 Lever to release an arrested ID card

Device views Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)
Front view
1 Shutter

Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x) Device views
Rear view
1 USB data interface

2 I/O port (control of anti-skimming module II (optional))
3 Voltage supply
4 Connection capacitor

Device version used Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)
Device version used

WN part number Manufacturers Tracks Chip Comment
name card
01750173205 V2CU-1JL-G51 T1 R/W Yes Standard version
T2 R/W
T3 R/W
01750199931 V2CU-1JL-G81 T1 R/W Yes ACT version
T2 R/W
T3 R/W
01750199932 V2CU-1JL-G54 T1 R/W Yes HiCo version
T2 R/W
T3 R/W
The card reader is prepared for mounting MM/CIM86/CIM06 sensors. The

sensor is screwed to the CHD V2CU (CHD V3x). More detailed information on
this can be found in the chapter "Removal/Installation. In case of a
replacement of the card reader, the MM sensor (and the SAM module if
required) must be transferred if already installed.
Due to a symmetric arrangement of the card insertion slot, the card reader can
be installed in standard position or rotated by 180. Functions such as
detection of the card width, magnetic track detection and shutter in the card
transport route are available.
To ensure that in case of a power failure the current function is terminated
properly, a capacitor can be built in the system as an option. The reaction to
power failures, however, can also be determined by the application.

Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x) Device version used
Firmware
The firmware modules (except for the firmware expansion for the jitter
functionality) are to be found on the CD 'Firmware/Driver/Utilities' (part
number: 01750038200) that is shipped with all devices. The current versions
are also provided on the Intranet/Extranet.
Download behavior depends on the parameter settings of the firmware loader
in the various operating systems.
The firmware expansion for the jitter functionality is subject to licence
conditions and therefore not freely available. Generally, the expansion is
installed automatically after start-up of the CINEO C2560 when the card reader
has been replaced. Otherwise, please use the separate data medium or load
the firmware segments from the system unit. You can gather information on
this from the bank's administrative staff.
Firmware-Files
V2CUB00.bin Basic module for all card

transport orders and magnetic
stripe read and write operations
as well as SAM basic module
including all relevant chip modes for standard
(V2CUS00.bin is integrated). applications
V2CUC00.bin Basic module chip card
V2CUC05.bin Chip card module EMV
V2CUC06.bin Chip card module ZKA
V2CUC09.bin Chip card module PBOC (China)
for optional
V2CUB02.bin Basic module jitter functionality anti-skimming
functionalities
V2CUB00E.bin Basic module - save channel For optional Trusted
V2CUB02E.bin - jitter functionality Computing
functionality
The basic module can always be uploaded to the card reader. It should be
noted that the previous firmware must be uploaded again after the re-
installation.

Position of components Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)
Position of components
SW1 SL2
SW2 SL3 S1 M1 MM Head S2 IC SW4 S3 S4
SW3 SL1 HiCo
Abbreviation Meaning
S1 - S4 Sensors for card position
SW1 Sensor for pre-recognition of magnetic track
SW2 Sensor for card width
SW3 Sensor for shutter position
SW4 Sensor to detect chip card contact pressed completely down
SL1 Solenoid which opens the shutter
SL2 Solenoid for pushing the chip card contact down
SL3 Magnet (only with ACT version)
M1 Motor
MM MM / CIM sensor
Head Magnetic head
IC Contact IC unit

Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x) Pin assignment
Pin assignment
I/O Port
(control of anti-skimming module optional)
JST PHD 14-pin, F
Contact Assignment Function

1 SG (0V) Signal Ground
2 OUT 1 Output port 1
7 OUT 6 Read/Write error signal
8 OUT 7 Signal sensor for card width
9 OUT 8 Signal - shutter not closed
(shutter solenoid echo)
10 IN 1 Input port 1
14 VCC (5V) Voltage (5V)

Pin assignment Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)
USB
USB 4-pin
3 4
Contact Assignment
1 +5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Voltage supply
1
2
Contact Assignment
1 Supply voltage (24 V)
2 Ground (GND)

Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x) Technical Data
External capacitor
1
2
Contact Assignment
1 Auxiliary voltage from external capacitor (X24 V)
2 Minus external capacitor (XGND)
Technical Data
Operating voltage: 24 V
Power consumption:
Operation
Standard/ACT version 2.0 A
HiCo version: 3.5 A
Standby: 200 mA
Interface: USB 2.0 full speed
Number of chip card sockets: 1
ID-000 for SAM
Dimensions (H x W x L) 95 x 108 x 210 mm ( 1 mm)
Weight: approx. 1.5 kg
Ambient condition requirements Temperature Humidity (relative

humidity)
Operation + 5 C to + 55 C 5 % to 85 %
Storage -25 C to +70 C 15% to 98%

Test Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)
Test
The functionality is tested with the Diagnose & Service Platform (D&S) or via
the T-SOP or with KDIAG. If the card reader is equipped with a safe channel,
then not all functionalities can be checked with KDIAG.
A KDIAG test module for this component is available on the Intranet / Extranet.
Malfunctions
Checking after a card has been arrested
i This section only applies to the ACT version.
After an arrested ID card has been removed, the arrested card functionality
may no longer be ensured under certain circumstances.
Card reader CHD V2CU must therefore be checked and replaced if necessary
after ID card arrest.

Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x) Malfunctions
Removing an arrested ID card
i This section only applies to the ACT version.
Press the lever (1) as far as possible in the direction of the arrow.
Press the lever (2) as far as possible in the direction of the arrow.
Move the ID card into a position in which it can be removed by turning the
manual card transport wheel (3) toward the card insertion slot.
Remove the ID card (4).
i Check the arrested ID card for damage.

If only fragments of the arrested ID card are still available, or if there is
no more ID card present at all, then check the ACT functionality of the
card reader CHD V3CU (see following section).
i We recommend conducting an ID card transaction to check the card

reader.

Malfunctions Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)
Checking the ACT functionality

A plastic card with the dimensions of an ID card is required for use as a test
card to check the ACT functionality. This will not be damaged as a rule.
Slide the shutter lever (1) to the right

and insert a plastic card with the
dimensions of an ID card (i.e.d a test
card) 2/3 of the way into the card
reader.
Trigger the ACT mechanism via

software or mechanically in the interior
of the card reader (see arrow), by...
...triggering the lever mechanism (1)

inside with a screwdriver.

Pull forcefully on the test card. If the

test card cannot be pulled out more
than a minimal amount (approx.
1 mm), then the functionality of the
arresting mechanism is in effect.
Otherwise, replace the card reader.
If no replacement of the card reader is required, remove the arrested test

card (see section "Removing an arrested ID card").

Remedy of card jams or removal of foreign

objects
Version until approx. 04-2011

Remove screw (1).....
... and open the card reader.

Remedy the card jam or remove
existing foreign objects.
Close the card reader and slide the

cover forwards (see arrow) until you
can insert the screw into the opening
(1). Fasten the screw.

Version since approx. 05-2011

Remove the two screws on the side
(1) and (2).
Remove the upper screw (3) and

remove the cover plate (4).
Remove the upper four screws (5) to

(8) ...

... and open the plastic carrier plate

upwards.
Remedy the card jam or remove
existing foreign objects.
If necessary, the complete plastic
carrier plate can be carefully removed.
Press the plastic carrier plate down

and screw it tightly once again with the
four screws (5) to (8).
Continue with the assembly by
following the same steps in reverse
order.

Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x) Maintenance and service
Maintenance and service
Maintenance
Maintenance should be performed after every 20,000 transactions or after 6
months of operation. Preventive maintenance (on-call) should be performed on
the occasion of fault clearance on the system.
i The necessary cleaning procedure depends on the installation site

and the degree of contamination associated with it.
Clean sensors 1 - 4 using the sensor cleaning card.
Check the sensors using KDIAG or the T-SOP. Sensor values must be
2.5 V.
Clean the transport rollers, magnetic read heads and chip contacts using
the universal wet cleaning card; repeat, if necessary.

Cleaning and test resources

The following cards should be used for maintenance and service purposes:
Test Resources
WN hybrid test card 01750066226
Cleaning utilities
Cleaning card for hybrid card

readers: 01750016388
Sensor cleaning card: 01750133289
Cleaning card CHD Austria
(wet cleaning card): 01750057227
Accessories
Emergency power capacitor suitable 6221306535
for external connection

Hybrid DIP reader ICM330
Description Part number

Card Handling Dev. DIP Hybrid USB ICM330 01750102140
Kartenleser CHD DIP Hybrid ICM330-2 01750208512
Functions
Reading the 1, 2 and 3 tracks of the magnetic stripe
Reading and writing during the chip handling

System connection Hybrid DIP reader ICM330
Magnetic stripe
The evaluation of the card tracks can only be process during the manual
pushing in or pulling out of the card. The user software determines if the card
reading process is performed during the push-in, the pulling-out or in both
cases.
Chip handling
If the chip handling is activated, the card is locked with a pin inside of the
module. Because of this, the card cannot be pulled out during the process.
LED
At the front of the card input is a LED screen.

If you switch on the power, the LED display will blink green until the
initialization of the card reader is processed (activation of the software) - if not,
a hardware error occurred.
Mounting position
The DIP hybrid reader can be installed horizontal or vertical into the systems.
If the DIP hybrid reader is installed horizontal, the magnetic track of the ID
card should always point downwards. So it is guaranteed that foreign objects
(e.g. coins) from the input slot cannot fall downwards into the device.

Hybrid DIP reader ICM330 System connection
System connection
The device is connected to the system via the USB interface.
1 USB port
2 Power supply
3 Optional emergency power capacitor connection

Pin assignment Hybrid DIP reader ICM330
Pin assignment
USB port
2 1 Connector type:
USB 4pin
3 4
Pin Assignment
1 Vbus
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Power supply
Type of connector:
Pin Assignment I/O Function

1 +24 V I +24 V DC
2 PGN O Power Ground (0V)

Hybrid DIP reader ICM330 Simplified diagram
Optional emergency power capacitor connection
Pin Assignment Function

1 ECP External capacitor +
2 ECM External capacitor -
Simplified diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Locking pin 5 End sensor

2 Magnetic head 6 Chip contact station
3 Front sensor 7 Carriage
4 ID card

Function elements Hybrid DIP reader ICM330
Function elements
Power supply
1 Optional emergency power capacitor connector

2 Base for the optional SAM chip card (chip card in the ID-000 format)
(SAM = security access module)
3 Power supply
4 USB port

Hybrid DIP reader ICM330 Function elements
Plan view
1 Opening for removing foreign objects

2 Chip contact station

Technical data Hybrid DIP reader ICM330
Technical data
Approved magnetic cards according to ISO / IEC 7810, 7811, 7813
Approved IC card ISO / IEC 7816 / 1-3
EMV 96 version 3.1.1,
EMV 2000 version 4.0
(EMV = Europay, Mastercard, Visa)
Memory card read / write SLE 4442, SLE 4428
Output / input signal USB 2.0 full speed (12 Mbps)
Weight 150 g (0.33 lb)

Card motion speed 10 cm/s to 100 cm/s (3.94 in/s to 39.4 in/s)
DC power supply 24 V 10 %
Current consumption
Standby 100 mA
lift magnet tightened 200 mA
(card locked)
Chip communications mode 500 mA for 2 ms
Ambient condition requirements Temperature Humidity

(relative humidity)
Operation -20 C to +50 C 10 % to 95 %
(-4 F to 122 F) (non-condensing)
Storage -20 C bis +70 C 10 % to 95 %
(-4 F to 158 F)

Hybrid DIP reader ICM330 Maintenance and service

Cleaning and test utilities
The following cards should be used for maintenance and service purposes:
Test utilities
WN Hybrid test card 01750066226

Test card IDCU 8568400228
Cleaning agents
Cleaning card for hybrid readers 01750016388

Maintenance and service Hybrid DIP reader ICM330

Contactless card reader Multi-ISO
compact
i This component consists the HW inventory data.
Contactless CHD CM5553 Multi-ISO USB 01750155496
Card reader modules
1 Grounding surface 4 STATUS LED

2 USB 5 SAM
3 Power LED

Card reader modules Contactless card reader Multi-ISO compact
1 Antenna

Contactless card reader Multi-ISO compact Connections
Connections
1 USB Interface
2 SAM module mounting

Description Contactless card reader Multi-ISO compact
Description
The contactless card reader Multi-ISO compact can process contactless chip
cards according to specifications of the application software, e.g. for ticket
sale, access, authentication, purse, loyalty and/or toll charge systems.
The contactless card reader is prepared for integration of a security access
module (SAM). The card reader features an integrated module mounting to
accommodate the SAM chip card in ID-000 format.
The SAM module can be used to implement encryption and decryption
standards by means of a crypto processor. The selection of the ID000 chip
card is customer-specific and depends on the possibilities of the application
software used.
The contactless card can process the following standards:

Chip cards: ISO/IEC 14443 A/B,
ISO/IEC 15693,
ISO/IEC 18000-3,
and EPC.
Firmware
The firmware modules are to be found on the CD 'Firmware/Driver/Utilities'
(part number 01750038200) which is shipped with all devices. The current
versions are also provided in the intranet/extranet.
Download behavior depends on the parameter settings of the firmware loader
in the various operating systems.
Firmware file:
CM5553.zip

Contactless card reader Multi-ISO compact Cable connection
Cable connection
USB
USB 4-pin
3 4
Contact Assignment
1 +5 V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Technical Data
DC power supply +5 V DC (+ / - 10 %)
Performance
Maximum 200 mA
Minimum 90 mA
Climatic environmental conditions in acc. with EN 60721-3-3/4,

EN 60068-2-x
Ambient condition requirements Temperature

Operation -20 C to +80 C (-36 F to 144 F)
Storage -40 C to +85 C (-72 F to 153 F)
Dimensions (L x W x H) 117 mm x 67 mm x 15 mm
(4.6" x 2.6" x 0.6")

Test Contactless card reader Multi-ISO compact
Weight 32 g (0.07 lb) (+ / - 10 %)
Test
Use the T/SOP and the test card "Mifare" (01750089127) for the function test.
The user manual for the T/SOP "Technical Service and Operating (T/SOP) for
ProBase" can be found on the product CD and on the intranet at:
http://intranet.wincor-nixdorf.com.

Contactless card reader EMV/NFC
Contactless card reader EMV/NFC send module KIOSK II 01750251787
Contactless antenna rectangular KIOSK II 01750251789
Contactless antenna 35 degrees KIOSK II 01750251792

Contactless card reader modules Contactless card reader EMV/NFC
Contactless card reader modules
1 Contactless card reader EMV/NFC send module KIOSK II

2 Contactless antenna rectangular KIOSK II
3 Contactless antenna 35 degrees KIOSK II

Contactless card reader EMV/NFC Controls
Controls
1 Card contact surface

2 Status indicators
Description
The contactless card reader is able to process contactless chip cards, mobile
phones and other similar devices that are equipped with a corresponding
wireless standard and a corresponding emulation of the standards specified
below. These versions are referred to as 'ID card' in the following section. It
supports contactless payments such as PayPass and payWave.
The contactless card reader EMV/NFC is divided into two parts. The send
module, for example, can be accommodated on the rear of the control panel.
The antenna is placed so it is accessible from the operator side. Both modules
are interconnected via cables.
The contactless card reader can process the following standards:

NFC Mode
Card Emulation
Read/Writer
ISO/IEC 14443A/B
MiFare.

RF interference Contactless card reader EMV/NFC
RF interference
Communication between the contactless card reader and the ID card may be
impaired by radio transmitters that are set up in the immediate vicinity.
Connections
1 Contactless card reader EMV/NFC send module KIOSK II

2 Voltage supply send module KIOSK II
3 USB Interface send module KIOSK II
4 Data connection
5 Antenna connection
6 Contactless antenna KIOSK II

Contactless card reader EMV/NFC Technical Data
Technical Data
DC power supply + 7.5 V - 36 V DC
Climatic environmental conditions
Ambient condition requirements Temperature

Operation - 25 C to + 70 C (-13 F to + 158 F)
Storage - 40 C to + 85 C (-40 F to +185 F)
Supported standards
Interface 13.56 MHz ISO 14443

Type A / Type B, MiFare, NFC and USB
Payment applications American Express ExpressPay
Discover ZIP
Mastercard, PayPass
Mstripe (M/Chip capable)
Visa, payWave MSD and (qVSDC capable)
JCB Jspeedy
VIVOcard Pass-Through mode

Pin assignment Contactless card reader EMV/NFC
Pin assignment
Voltage supply
Type of connector:
Contact Assignment I/O Funktion

1 + 24 V I + 24 V DC
2 GND O Power Ground (0V)
USB interface
Connector type:
USB mini 5pin
Contact Assignment
1 Vbus
2 D-
3 D+
4 ID
5 GND

Contactless card reader EMV/NFC Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Malfunction Meaning Remedy
The contactless card The device is Switch the device on. If the
reader is not ready deactivated device is ready for operation
for operation (none of and the contactless card
the status indicators reader does not indicate any
illuminate). functionality, please check the
plug connections. If these
measures prove to be
unsuccessful, replace the
contactless card reader.
None of the status The ID card is Hold the ID card closer to the
indicators illuminate outside the operating antenna surface of the card
and no sound is range of the reader.
emitted when an ID contactless card Check the validity of the ID
card is presented. reader card.
RF interference Check the functionality of the
The ID card is not device by using a different ID
supported card.
When using devices with
emulation, check to make
sure they have been activated
for the payment process.
Examine the ID card for
obvious defects.
Check whether the plug
connections are fuly inserted.
If these measures prove to be
unsuccessful, replace the
contactless card reader.
Not all ID cards are ID cards are When using devices with
read defective emulation, check to make
ID cards are not sure they have been activated
supported for the payment process.
Examine the ID card for
obvious defects.

Test Contactless card reader EMV/NFC
Test
Use the T/SOP and the test card "Mifare" (01750089127) for the function test.
The user manual for the T/SOP "Technical Service and Operating (T/SOP) for
ProBase" can be found on the product CD and on the intranet at:
http://intranet.wincor-nixdorf.com.

MM/CIM86/CIM06
The MM code (MM = modulated feature) is printed on the front side of the ec
card. It is invisible, but can be read by the MM/CIM86/CIM06 sensor. It is used
to encode certain data of the magnetic track. This data code is stored in field
20 of magnetic track 3 when the card is manufactured.
After the ec card is inserted in the ATM, the data is encoded again in the MM
system and the result is compared with the stored code.
MM/CIM86/CIM06 is only possible in combination with motor-operated card
readers.
The hardware necessary for analyzing the MM codes is provided by the
customer. Only the corresponding preparations are supplied ex works. Two
versions are possible:
- MM preparation
- CIM86 preparation
- CIM06 preparation
In the MM preparation, the MM interface, which is part of the preparation, is
placed into the safe and is wired. It admits the customer's corresponding MM
module. The sensor must in addition be built into the card reader. For the
position of the MM interface and the installation of the sensor, please refer to
the chapter "Removal/Installation of Components".
For the CIM86/CIM06 preparation, the cables are installed ex works. The
sensor is installed in the card reader. The CIM86/CIM06 module is positioned
in the vicinity of the card reader. If necessary, a mounting plate for the
CIM86/CIM06 module is installed on the card reader. For the position of the
CIM86/CIM06 module and the installation of the sensor, please refer to the
chapter "Removal/Installation of Components".
The chapter "Function and Integration" describes which of these versions are
used in the CINEO C2560.

Circuit diagram MM/CIM86/CIM06
Circuit diagram
MM
IDCU V.24
Sensor
MM MM
module interface
Voltage
CIM86
IDCU V.24
Sensor CIM86
Voltage
CIM06
IDCU V.24
Sensor CIM06
voltage

MM/CIM86/CIM06 Test procedure
Test procedure
The MM/CIM86/CIM06 module can be tested with the test program KDIAG or,
in individual cases, with PDIAG.
All 11 test cards are requested successively.
Test card Comment
T 1, T 2 Check internal module parameter.
T3 Looks for external high-frequency spurious signals.
T4 Looks for external low-frequency spurious and noise signals.
T 5, T 6 Check the card transport speed.
T7 Checks the distance between sensor and ec card.
T 8, T 9 Checks the horizontal position of the sensor.
T 10 Checks the sensors sensitivity.
T 11 Helps to identify reflections in the card transport.
i Test cards must be provided by the customer.
The results of the individual tests are displayed via KDIAG or PDIAG.

Test procedure MM/CIM86/CIM06

Card Reject Module
Version Number Part number
of cards
Card reject module with short transport path 100 01750029082
Card reject module with short transport path 100 01750109600
Card reject module with long transport path 100 01750033689
General description
An ID card that is to be retained is transported to the card reject module to
prevent unauthorized access to the card. However, the application first checks
the card counter to determine that the reject cassette is not full.
A photosensor detects if an ID card is transported to the card reject module's
transport belt.
The photosensor's signal starts the motor, the transport belts start moving to
transport the ID card into the reject cassette.
The motor stops automatically after running for about 8 seconds.

Views Card Reject Module
Views
Card reject module with short transport path
1 Reject cassette 4 Photosensor

2 Key lock 5 Transport belts
3 Motor

Card Reject Module Views
Card reject module with long transport path for

100 cards
4 5 6
1 Reject cassette 4 Cover

2 Key lock 5 Photosensor
3 Motor 6 Transport belts

Views Card Reject Module
Card reject module with long transport path for

200 cards
4 5 6
1 Reject cassette 4 Cover

2 Key lock 5 Photosensor
3 Motor 6 Transport belts

Card Reject Module Function elements
Function elements
1 2 3 4 5
10 9 8 7 6
1 ID card 6 Free-wheel transport roller

2 Photosensor 7 Transport belts (two)
(transmitter & receiver) 8 Transport wedge
3 Motor 9 Deviating prism
4 Drive belt 10 Deflecting roller
5 Reject cassette
How to test the card reject module
Photosensor
Cover the photosensor. The motor starts running immediately and stops
automatically after about 8 seconds.

How to test the card reject module Card Reject Module
Motor
Cover the photosensor. The motor starts running immediately and stops
automatically after about 8 seconds.
Cover the photosensor to start the motor. Keep the photosensor covered
until the motor stops automatically after about 8 seconds.
Now uncover the photosensor. The motor re-starts and stops automatically
after about 8 seconds.

Card Reject Module Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Problem What to check
ID cards are not Check if the reject cassette is full.

transported to the If necessary, invoke the application via the SOP
reject cassette pushbutton and check the status of the card reader.
The 2-digit card reader display cannot provide
meaningful information on the quantity of cards
retained for a card reject module with a volume of 200
cards.
When cards are removed, the counter must be reset
via the application.
Check if the photosensor between card reader and
card reject module is soiled.
Check if foreign objects or ID cards are blocking the
transport path.
Check if the motor is defective.

Pin assignment Card Reject Module
Pin assignment
Type of connector:
Pin Assignment
1 + 24 V
2 GND
Technical data
Motor
Rated voltage 24 V
Load current 310 mA
Load speed 108 1/min 10%
Load torque 20 Ncm
Idle current < 60 mA
Idling speed 160 1/min 10%
Transmission ratio 30.8 : 1
Temperature range - 30 C to + 60 C (- 22 F to + 140 F)

EPP V6
1 PIN pad
2 EPP module on the back side of the keyboard.
The EPP module can be delivered in many variants.

Due to the different layout options and language versions, the part numbers
are not listed here. It is therefore impossible to list the part numbers.

Description EPP V6
Description
The EPP module contains the following functional elements:
Keyboard with numeric pad (0 to 9) and 4 function keys for entering the PIN
and carrying out transactions,
Keyboard logic including extensive security circuit components for software
protection and the secret keys used in case of tampering with the housing
and the electronics,
Functions for secure encryption and decryption of the transmitted
information.
Optional EPP V6 SAM Board with 4 sockets for SAM modules for
additional functions (such as extra keys for ID card procedures)
The keys for entering the PIN, the evaluating logic and the encoding
electronics are accommodated in tamperproof housing.
The EPP module has a USB port.
The optional cover is needed with employment of the EPP in older systems

EPP V6 Description
EPP V6 Standard
1 Optional cover
2 Keypad

Description EPP V6
1 Service LEDs 5 Ground bolt

2 USB port 6 Housing
3 Reset button 7 EPP V6 SAM Board (optional)
4 Self-locking nuts of the optional
cover

EPP V6 Description
EPP V6 Vario
The 'EPP V6 Vario' is a smaller version of the EPP V6. All of the firmware and
software functions are the same as for the EPP V6. The only difference is in
the optional and additional equipment of a 'SAM board' that has only two 'ID00
chip card slots' and not 4 like in the 'EPP V6'.
Like its big brother the 'EPP V6', the 'EPP V6 Vario' can be equipped with a
PIN adapter with keypad reinforcement as an option.

Description EPP V6
1 Mini USB port

EPP V6 Description
Reset button
The EPP module has a delete possibility for the stored cryptographic keys.
The deletion can be made also with closed housing.
If the Reset button is pressed, all cryptographic keys are reset in the
EPP module. The EPP module will no longer work after the Reset
button has been pressed and has to be returned to the manufacturer.
Pressing the button
Insert a long pointed object through

the opening (1) of the housing cover
and press the button for three seconds
at least.

Description EPP V6
Service LEDs
In the operating status two LEDs
indicate the current status of the EPP.
Red LED (1)
Green LED (2)
Green LED
The green LED indicates the operating condition of the EPP V6.
This means that power supply is activated and the main processor
is running. The EPP is ready to receive instructions.
In case of a firmware download the green LED is flashing.
Red LED
The red LED lights continuously to indicate that a defect arose
during the internal test or a manipulation attempt took place.
In this case the EPP must be exchanged and sent back to the
manufacturer.
A flashing red LED indicates that the retreating switch is activated
and the activation procedure for the EPP needs to be executed.

EPP V6 Description
Tamper switch
1 Tamper switch
The EPP module features a tamper switch. This contact is switched by a pin
during the installation and is only active if the PCI2.0 firmware is loaded. The
EPP is activated or reactivated by a certain procedure.

Description EPP V6
SAM Board
1 Mounting 1 for SAM module


EPP V6 Smartcard interfaces
Smartcard interfaces
To integrate additional functions (such as extra keys for ID card procedures),
the EPP module features the optional EPP V6 SAM Board four mountings for
SAM modules on smartcards in ID-000 format.
Inserting a smartcard
Push the metal lock in the direction of

the arrow and raise the cover.
Insert the card in the cover with the

straight edge at the front so that the
contacts are facing down.
Close and lock the cover.

Replacing the EPP in the event of an error EPP V6
Replacing the EPP in the event of an error

Check general functioning.
Check that the loaded keys and associated firmware modules are valid.
Check the error memory.
The EPP V6 has an error memory. This memory is used to store error
codes triggered by the security sensors. The error codes can be shown in
plain text with a suitable test program (such as KDIAG).
Detach the defective EPP module, remove the EPP V6 Sam Board with the
customer-specific smartcards from the defective EPP module, and insert
the EPP V6 Sam Board in the new EPP module.
After replacing the unit, arrange for initialization and reloading of the keys.
This is done by application programs.

EPP V6 Pin assignment
Pin assignment
USB interface
USB 4-pin
3 4
Contact Designation Note

1 VCC +5V
2 - data 3.3 V difference
3 + Data 3.3 V difference
4 Ground
Maintenance work
The EPP module can be tested and settings can be made by means of the
KDIAG test program.
During this test a message is sent for example if the battery voltage drops
below a defined threshold value.

Maintenance work EPP V6

Softkeys
Description
1 User side of softkeys

2 Rear side of softkeys
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 5-99

Pin assignment Softkeys
WN part number Designation for Comment

monitor
size
01750178409 Keyboard Softkey Set 15" 15"
STD BR ATF
01750178411 Keyboard Softkey Set 15" 15"
NDC/DDC BR ATF
The softkeys are used for menu-driven inputs on screen, and are located on
the right and left of the monitor. The softkey dimensions depend on the
monitor used. The position of the keys and the distance between them depend
on the emulation or the software which runs on the system. In the course of
time two standards have been established: WN Standard, NDC/DDC.
Spare softkeys are delivered in pairs and the softkeys should always be
replaced in pairs, too. In the case of older versions the softkeys can be
ordered separately for the left and for the right side. Make sure then that the
softkeys for both sides are ordered and delivered.
Pin assignment
Type of connector:
1
Berg connector
Pin Description
1 Y0
2 Y1
3 Y2
4 Y3
5 X
5-100 CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 01750186621 C

Softkeys Pin assignment

Length: 76 mm
Width: 25 mm
Height: 19 mm
Weight: 0.08 kg
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 5-101

Pin assignment Softkeys
5-102 CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 01750186621 C

12.1 LCD-Box DVI
12.1" LCD Box DVI 01750064487
12.1" LCD Box DVI 01750092357
12.1" LCD Box DVI 01750107720
12.1" LCD Box DVI 01750124769
The digitally controllable LCD box with DVI-I interface features an auto scaling
interface board for VGA, SVGA and XGA resolutions.
The backlight can be switched off.
You can install a fan box onto the LCD box as an option.
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 6-1

Connections 12.1 LCD-Box DVI
Connections
i The connectors are located at the rear of the LCD box.
1 Power supply connection (12 V) and backlight

on / off
2 DVI-I connector
6-2 CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 01750186621 C

12.1 LCD-Box DVI Important safety precautions
Important safety precautions

If the LCD panel breaks and fluid seeps out, avoid coming into
contact with the fluid and do not inhale the vapors.
If fluid gets into your mouth or eyes, immediately wash your eyes or
mouth with water.
Wash any areas of skin or clothing which have come into contact
with this fluid with alcohol and carefully rinse them with water
afterwards.
Always switch off the power supply when connecting or
disconnecting cables.
The polarization filter screen is very sensitive and must be

protected against scratches.
To clean the display screen, only wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Before cleaning the screen, it may be advisable to breathe on the
screen or to slightly dampen the cloth with cleaning spirit.
Avoid any mechanical pressure in order not to break the glass.
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 6-3

Structure and function 12.1 LCD-Box DVI
Structure and function

The LCD box consists of the following components:
Metal casing
TFT LCD module with integrated backlight
Inverter board for the power supply of the backlight.
Interface board to convert the TMDS signals from the PC to the RGB
signals for the LCD component
The backlight can be switched on or off by the user software via the special
electronics module in the device. If there is no connection to the special
electronics module, the backlight is always switched on.
6-4 CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 01750186621 C

12.1 LCD-Box DVI Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
12 VV
+24
12,1 TFT Flat Panel LCD-Box
PC
Lfterbox (optional)
VGA
Motherboard DVI-D Kabel
DVI-D DVI-I
+12V
Hintergrundbeleuchtung ein / aus

(Sonderelektronik)
DVI-D cable
Length Part Number

2.3 m 01750058006
3.2 m 01750058007
3.5 m 01750090212
4.0 m 01750113423
5.2 m 01750058008
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 6-5

Cable connection 12.1 LCD-Box DVI
Cable connection
DVI-I connection
DVI-I (24 + 5) F
9 C5
17 24 C3 C4
Contact Designation Active Comment

4 T.M.D.S DATA 4- n.c.
5 T.M.D.S DATA 4+ n.c.
6 DDC CLOCK Yes
7 DDC DATA Yes
8 ANALOG VERT. SYNC n.c.
14 5 V POWER Yes
15 GND Yes
6-6 CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 01750186621 C

12.1 LCD-Box DVI Cable connection
Contact Designation Active Comment

C1 ANALOG RED Yes
C2 ANALOG GREEN Yes
C3 ANALOG BLUE Yes
C4 ANALOG HORZ SYNC Yes
C5 ANALOG GROUND Yes
Voltage connection and backlight on/off

1 GND PC
2 GND Special electronics module
3 + 12 V PC
4 LCD illumination Signal from
5 VDC BL ON/OFF special electronics III (V.24)
Connector: internal inputs/outputs II,
Pin 9 (LCD-illumination control)
or
customer panel special electronics
(USB)
Connector X6, LCD backlight on/off
Pin 1 (switch signal)
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 6-7

Technical Data 12.1 LCD-Box DVI
Technical Data
General
Dimensions:
Width: 326 mm
Height: 224 mm
Depth: 38 mm
Weight: 1900 g
Operation:
Temperature: 0 to +50 C (+32 F to +122 F)
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h.
Storage:
Temperature: -20 C to +60 C (-4 F to +140 F)
LCD
Screen diagonal: 31 cm (12.1")
Pixel: 800 x 600 (native resolution)
Resolution:
VGA: 640 x 480
SVGA: 800 x 600
XGA: 1024 x 768
Screen surface: Anti-reflection layer
6-8 CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 01750186621 C

15 LCD-Box DVI
15" LCD Box DVI 01750144600
15" LCD Box DVI 01750169942
15" LCD Box DVI 01750180259
The digitally controllable LCD box with DVI-I interface features an autoscaling
interface board for VGA, SVGA and XGA resolutions.
The backlight can be switched off.

Connections 15 LCD-Box DVI
Connections
i The connectors are located at the rear of the LCD box.
1 Power supply connection (12 V) and backlight

ON/OFF
2 DVI-I connector

15 LCD-Box DVI Important safety precautions

contact with the fluid and do not inhale the vapors. If fluid gets
into the mouth or eyes, immediately wash your eyes or mouth with
water. Wash any areas of skin or clothing which have come into
contact with this fluid with alcohol and carefully rinse them with
water afterwards.


To clean the display screen, only wipe it off with a soft cloth. Before
cleaning the screen, it may be advisable to breathe on the screen
or to slightly dampen the cloth with cleaning spirit.

Structure and functions 15 LCD-Box DVI
Structure and functions

The LCD box consists of the following components:
Metal casing
TFT LCD module with integrated backlight
Inverter board for the power supply of the backlight.
Interface board to convert the TMDS signals from the PC to the LVDS
signals for the LCD component

15 LCD-Box DVI Technical data
Technical data
General
Dimensions:
Width: 356 mm (14.02")
Height: 254 mm (10.00")
Depth: 40 mm (1.57")
Weight: 3000 g (6.61 lb)
Operation:
Storage:
Temperature: -20 C to +60 C (-4 F to +140 F)
LCD
Screen diagonal: 38,1 cm (15)
Pixel: 1024 x 768 (native resolution)
Resolution:
VGA: 640 x 480
SVGA: 800 x 600
XGA: 1024 x 768

Pin assignment 15 LCD-Box DVI
Pin assignment
DVI-I connection
DVI-I (24 + 5) F
9 C5
17 24 C3 C4

6 DDC CLOCK Yes
7 DDC DATA Yes
8 ANALOG VERT. SYNC n.c.
14 5 V POWER Yes
15 GND Yes

15 LCD-Box DVI Pin assignment

C1 ANALOG RED Yes
C2 ANALOG GREEN Yes
C3 ANALOG BLUE Yes
C4 ANALOG HORZ SYNC Yes
C5 ANALOG GROUND Yes
Pin Name Comment

1 GND PC/Power supply unit
2 GND Special electronics module
3 12 V Supply from PC power supply unit
4 LCD illumination Signal from
5 VDC BL ON/OFF special electronics III (V.24)
Connector: internal inputs/outputs II,
Pin 9 (LCD-illumination control)
or
customer panel special electronics
(USB)
Connector X6, LCD backlight on/off
Pin 1 (switch signal)

Pin assignment 15 LCD-Box DVI

15" DVI High Bright TFT monitor
Monitor 15" TFT HighBright DVI Autosc. 01750135839
Monitor 15" TFT LED Highbright DVI 01750171633
This optional 15" DVI High Bright TFT monitor can be ordered for devices that
are set up at places with strong sunlight.
The monitor contains a TFT LCD color module and is equipped with a DVI
Autoscaling Interface Board for the resolutions VGA, SVGA and XGA and can
be operated not only on the digital interface (DVI-D connection) but also on the
analog interface (VGA connection) of a system unit (PC).
The picture setting takes place automatically, even with analog control. The
contrast and brightness can be set via the graphics driver if necessary. No
OSD panel is required.
The LCD Box is equipped with a fan for cooling.

Important safety precautions 15" DVI High Bright TFT monitor
The background illumination can be adjusted automatically to existing light
conditions by means of an optionally available brightness control feature.

If the LCD panel breaks and fluid seeps out, avoid coming
into contact with the fluid and do not inhale the vapors.
If fluid gets into your mouth or eyes, immediately wash your eyes
or mouth with water. Wash any areas of skin or clothing which
have come into contact with this fluid with alcohol and carefully
rinse them with water afterwards.
To clean the monitor screen, only wipe it off with a soft cloth.
The monitor screen is very sensitive and must be protected
against scratches.

15" DVI High Bright TFT monitor Connections
Connections
The following illustration shows all connections which are accessible from the
rear side of the monitor.
1 Power connection (24 V)

2 12 V power connection and backlight on/off
3 DVI-I connection (integrated analog and digital interface)
4 Not used
5 Brightness control connection
Switch the CINEO C2560 off to replace the monitor.

Technical data 15" DVI High Bright TFT monitor
Technical data
General information
Dimensions:
Width: 373 mm (14.685")
Height: 261 mm (10.276")
Depth: 77 mm (3.0315")
Monitor weight: 3.6 kg (7.92 lb)
Operation:
Storage:
Temperature: -25 to +70 C (-25 F to +158 F)
LCD
Diagonal: 381 mm (15")
Pixel: 1024 x 768 (physical resolution)
Resolution:
VGA: 640 x 480 pixels
SVGA: 800 x 600 pixels
XGA: 1024 x 768 pixels

15" DVI High Bright TFT monitor Pin assignment
Pin assignment
DVI-I connection
DVI-I (24 + 5) F
9 C5
17 24 C3 C4
Contact Designation Comment

1 T.M.D.S DATA 2-
2 T.M.D.S DATA 2+
3 T.M.D.S DATA 2/4 SHIELD
4 T.M.D.S DATA 4-
5 T.M.D.S DATA 4+
6 DDC CLOCK
7 DDC DATA
8 ANALOG VERT. SYNC
9 T.M.D.S DATA 1-
10 T.M.D.S DATA 1+
12 T.M.D.S DATA 3-
13 T.M.D.S DATA 3+
14 +5 V POWER
15 GND
16 HOT PLUG DETECT
17 T.M.D.S DATA 0-
18 T.M.D.S DATA 0+
20 T.M.D.S DATA 5-
21 T.M.D.S DATA 5+
22 T.M.D.S CLOCK SHIELD

Pin assignment 15" DVI High Bright TFT monitor
Contact Designation Comment

23 T.M.D.S CLOCK+
24 T.M.D.S CLOCK-
C1 ANALOG RED
C2 ANALOG GREEN
C3 ANALOG BLUE
C4 ANALOG HORZ SYNC
C5 ANALOG GROUND
24 V voltage supply on the monitor

Type of connector:
Contact Designation
1 +24 V
2 GND
12 V power connection and backlight on/off
Contact Designation
1 GND supply
2 GND
3 + 12 V supply
4 LCD illumination on/off

15" DVI High Bright TFT monitor Pin assignment
Brightness control connection
HJS Hirose DF11 4M
24
Contact Designation Remark

1 n.c. not used
2 + 5 VDC
3 GND
4 Analog Dimming Input

Pin assignment 15" DVI High Bright TFT monitor

Touchkit for LCD monitor
Part number:
01750160132 TouchKit 3MTS 15" EXII-7760UC
01750160124 TouchKit 3MTS 15" ALCF EXII-7760UC
01750247434 TouchKit 3MTS 15" ALCF EXII-7760UC -2
Structure
The touch sensor and the protective screen form a single unit.
The touch kit comprises the touch screen and the touch controller with USB
interface. Voltage is supplied by the USB port at the touch controller.

How it works Touchkit for LCD monitor
How it works
The touch system uses the analog capacitive working technology and
comprises a glass screen with a melted transparent, conducting thin film
coating. Along the margins are narrow electrodes installed which create a
uniform low voltage AC field above the conducting layer.
If you touch the touch screen surface with a finger, the capacitive coupling with the
area of tension creates a short period current flow to the contact point. The current
flow of every corner is proportional to the distance of the finger from the margins.
The controller measures these relationship values, determines from this the touch
point and transmits this position though the interface to the PC.

Touchkit for LCD monitor LED display on the touch controller
LED display on the touch controller

The touch controller has an LED display which makes a visual check of the
operability and ready status possible.
1 Touch controller
2 Touch controller LED
The LED is on as soon as the touch controller is supplied with voltage. After
receiving a valid command, the LED display becomes less bright. A touching
of the sensor is displayed by a brightly blinking LED. The LED blinks if the
power-on self-test leads to a malfunction.

LED display on the touch controller Touchkit for LCD monitor
Error Blink frequency within 10 seconds

RAM error 1
ROM error 2
A / D error 3
EEPROM error 4
Analog error 5
If one of these errors occurs, the touch controller is broken and need to be
replaced.

Touchkit for LCD monitor Pin assignment
Pin assignment
Type of connector:
Molex Micro Blade 5-pin.
Contact Assignment
1 +5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
5 Shielding

Technical data Touchkit for LCD monitor
Technical data
Touchscreen
General information
Technology: Analog capacitive
Resolution: 1024 contact points for each shaft in the
calibrated field
Speed: max. 115 contacts per second
Active contact surface: Accurate coordinates starting from a 0.1"
distance from the edge electrodes
Light transmission: 85 - 95 % at 550 mm (21.654")
Sensor thickness: 0.125" ( 0.01)
Touch screen strength: 8 mm (0.31496")
Reliability:
FCC approval: Class A

Journal Printer TP06/NP06
This chapter describes the following model of the thermal journal printer TP06
and the matrix journal printer NP06:
Part number Description
01750057142 Thermal journal printer TP06
Paper width: 76.2 mm - 1 mm (3" - 0.04")
Outer journal roll diameter:
max. 80 mm / 110 mm (3.15" / 4.33")
01750110043 Thermal journal printer TP06
Paper width: 76.2 mm - 1 mm (3" - 0.04")
max. 80 mm / 110 mm (3.15" / 4.33")
01750064218 Matrix journal printer NP06
Paper width: 76.2 mm - 1 mm (3" - 0.04")
max. 80 mm / 105 mm (3.15" / 4.13")
01750110044 Matrix journal printer NP06
Paper width: 76.2 mm - 1 mm (3" - 0.04")
max. 80 mm / 105 mm (3.15" / 4.13")
The thermal [matrix] journal printer TP06 [NP06] is a modular roll printer. It
consists of a thermal printing unit [matrix printing unit], a control unit, a paper
holder and a winder. The individual modules are assembled on a mounting
plate which contains the controller. The controller incorporates an interface
socket, the plug for the power supply, control elements and status displays.
The following description contains no information on the normal operation of
the printer. You can find this information in the operating manual of the cash-
out system.

Connecting the printer Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Connecting the printer

Connect the printer only when the system is disconnected from the
power supply.
Power supply
The printer is operated with 24 V DC. The 5 V voltage for the logic is
generated internally.
Data interface
USB connector type B

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Views of thermal printer TP06
Views of thermal printer TP06
Overall view
1 4
1 Thermal printing unit 4 Paper roll compartment

2 Printer control panel 5 Take-up reel
3 Weekend sensor

Views of thermal printer TP06 Journal Printer TP06/NP06
1 Safety string of paper roll shaft

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Views of thermal printer TP06
Control panel and connectors
1
2
3
7
4
6
1 LINE FEED key 5 ERROR LED (red)

2 TEST key 6 24 V DC power supply
3 POWER LED (green) 7 Interface USB port, type B
4 End of paper LED (yellow) connector

Views of thermal printer TP06 Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Position of sensors
5 4 3 2 1
1 Paper-low sensor (not 3 Paper-out sensor

adjustable) 4 Top of form (ToF) sensor
2 Paper motion sensor 5 Thermal sensor of thermal array

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Views of matrix printer NP06
Views of matrix printer NP06
Overall view
6
1
5
2
4
1 Print head 5 Paper-low sensor

2 Ribbon cartridge 6 Paper roll compartment
3 Printer control panel 7 Take-up reel
4 Printing unit release lever

Views of matrix printer NP06 Journal Printer TP06/NP06
1 Safety string of paper roll shaft

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Views of matrix printer NP06
Control panel and connectors
1
2
3
7
4
6
1 LINE FEED key 5 ERROR LED (red)

2 TEST key 6 24 V DC power supply
3 POWER LED (green) 7 Interface USB port, type B
4 End of paper LED (yellow) connector

Views of matrix printer NP06 Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Position of sensors
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 Paper-low sensor (not 4 Top of form (ToF) sensor

adjustable) 5 Thermal sensor of print head
2 Paper motion sensor 6 Carrier home position
3 Paper-out sensor

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Functions
Functions
When the power is turned on, the firmware is started. The keys that are
pressed at power-on define the start conditions for the firmware. The
permanent parameters are loaded and the relevant settings made.
The firmware is not operable if an error is found during the test of external
storage or during initialization of the emulation. In this case, the firmware is
halted and it is no longer possible to communicate via the interface.
Power-on procedure
After the power is turned on, the printer is initialized. The following functions
are executed during the initialization:
Processor initialization
Memory test
Define start conditions,
Load values from parameter memory
Execute mechanical reset (not in test mode),
Establish ready state (not in test mode).

Status indicators Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Status indicators
The journal printer status is indicated by three LEDs. The statuses of the
individual LEDs are identified by the following abbreviations:
Abbreviation Status
0 LED is off
1 LED is on
x LED can be on or off
bl LED blinking
Indicators at power-on
Green Yellow Red Status
bl bl bl Test mode (selection level)
Indicators when online

If test mode is not activated and error handling inactive, the display information
for normal operating state is built cyclically and output to the display.
1 x 0 Data set ready
x bl x End of paper
x 1 x Paper low
x x 1 Offline
x x bl Error (see section "ERROR LED blinking pattern")

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Functions of keys
Functions of keys
Normal operation
Pressing individual keys when the printer is in normal operational mode will
give priority to the execution of certain functions.
Keys pressed Function
None None
TEST Prints test printout
FEED Paper feed by 1/6". If the key is pressed for longer than
2 seconds, the paper is fed continuously until the key
combination is changed.
Do not press the FEED key during normal operation.
The key functions are triggered via a spontaneous functions 'job channel in the
device controller' and are executed with higher priority than the functions from
the emulation. For this reason, you should not hamper or corrupt emulation
functions during operations by executing key functions.

Functions of keys Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Internal test
Internal test with paper

After the 'internal test with paper' has been selected (see section "Calling and
exiting the 'internal test with paper'") the selection mode is active. By pressing
the keys the 'internal test with paper' can be controlled.
Pressed key Function
TEST The TEST key is used to start the 'internal test with paper',
to start the test levels and to complete them.
FEED The FEED key is used to select the individual test levels
during the 'internal test with paper'.
TEST+FEED None
Internal test without paper

After the 'internal test without paper' has been selected (see section "Calling
and exiting the 'internal test without paper'") the selection mode is active. By
pressing the keys the 'internal test without paper' can be controlled.
Pressed key Function
TEST The TEST key is used to start the 'internal test without
paper', to start the test levels and to complete them.
during the 'internal test without paper'.
TEST+FEED None

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Internal test
Internal test
Calling and exiting the 'internal test with paper'

The print controller provides a test program divided into different test levels.
This program allows you to check the main printer functions.
Press the TEST key and release it.
Press the TEST key again and keep the TEST key pressed until the test
printout is output.
The keys are blinking and you can select a test with the FEED key (see
section "Indicators for the selected test level").
Start the test with the TEST key.
Press the TEST key to exit the test level. The printer returns to the
selection level (all LEDs blinking).
Exit the internal test by pressing the TEST key in selection level.
When entering the internal test, the controller disables the USB port. After
completion of the internal test the printer is initialized, the interfaces are
released and the message Power failure is issued.

Internal test Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Test printout
Printer NP06 Printer TP06

Calling and exiting the 'internal test without

paper'
This program makes it possible to check the most important printer functions
that are possible without paper.
Press the TEST key.
Select a test using the FEED key (see section "Indicators for the selected
test level") and start the test by pressing the TEST key.
Exit the internal test by pressing the TEST key in selection level.
released and the message Power failure is issued.

Displaying the selected test level

In the selection mode (LEDs are blinking), the LEDs show the selected test
level in binary code when the FEED key is pressed. The LEDs have the
following rating:
LED Significance
Red 4
Yellow 2
Green 1
Binary display of the test level
Red Yellow Green Test level Description

0 0 1 1 Paper sensors
0 1 0 2 Printer test
0 1 1 3 Statistical information
1 0 0 4 Set EEPROM parameters to default
values
1 0 1 5 Take-up reel test
1 1 0 6 Carrier test (NP06 only)
1 1 1 7 Calibrating EEPROM sensor values
Explanation:
0 = Off
1 = ON

Description of the test programs
Test level 1 (paper sensor test)

At level 1, the two paper sensors 'Paper out' and 'Paper low' are displayed on
activation.
This test level can only be selected when the printer is undergoing an internal
test with paper or an internal test without paper. The green LED is lit.
The order of actuation is not specified. The yellow LED lights up to indicate a
sensor status change.
If the paper has been removed at least once from the paper sensor Paper
out, the printer automatically performs a reset when the test level is exited.
Test level 2 (printer test)

At level 2, the printer test is executed. This test level can only be selected
when the printer is undergoing an internal test with paper. The printer test
requires that paper be present in the printer. If the paper is not sufficient for the
printer test, the printer automatically performs a reset.
The printer prints all character sets in Font A and Font B, such as PC437,
Katakana, PC850, PC860, PC863, PC865, WPC1252, PC866, PC852,
PC858, Space page.
Test level 3 (statistical information)

Statistical information is printed out in level 3. This test level can only be
selected when the printer is undergoing an internal test with paper. The printer
test requires that paper be present in the printer. If the paper is not sufficient
for the printer test, the printer automatically performs a reset.
The printout consists of three blocks of information. The first block shows the
current statistical values of the printer controller, the second shows specific
firmware (FW) information, and the third block is printed out as a form
(date/name) and can be filled out by service personnel.

Statistical values of the printer controller
i The statistical values of the printer controller can be set via the KDIAG
program when components are replaced.
Abbreviation Description
EEP. Indicates whether or not the EEPROM checksum is in order
TDOT. Shows the total number of printed dots
DOT. Shows the number of dots printed with the current thermal
array
HEAD Shows the number of thermal array changes
TLFS. Shows the total number of line feeds **
LFS. Shows the number of line feeds executed with the current
line feed motor **
LFCH. Shows the number of line feed motor changes
TCUT. Shows the total number of paper cuts *
CUT. Shows the number of paper cuts executed with the current
cutter *
CUTC. Shows the number of cutter changes *
TRET. Shows the total number of retracts *
RET. Shows the number of retracts with the current retract unit
(optional) *
RETC. Shows the number of changed retract units *
TPRE. Shows the total number of receipts output *
PRE. Shows the number of receipts output with the current printer
unit *
PREC. Shows the number of presenter changes *
* not relevant for journal printer

** Be sure that all line feeds are counted.
If the printer receives a cut command (GS V 0), it pulls the paper into
the cutter and transports it back to the first print position. This
corresponds to 20 additional line feeds.

TCAM. Shows the total number of carrier movements *
CAM. Shows the number of carrier movements executed with the
current carrier unit *
CAMC. Shows the number of changed carrier units *
POC. Shows the total number of power-on cycles
POT. Shows the number of operating hours
UPD. Shows the number of EEPROM updates
PCB. Indicates the revision level
SNO. Indicates the serial number
DAT. Indicates the production date
REV. Indicates the revision number
* only relevant for matrix printer
Firmware (FW) information
VERS Indicates the FW version
DAT Indicates the release date of the FW
Form
DATE Date of services (handwritten)
NAME Name of technician (handwritten)

Test printout of statistical data

Test level 4 (reset EEPROM parameters to default values)

In level 4 you can set the default values for the storage settings and for the
user configuration.
This test level can only be selected when the printer is undergoing an internal
test with paper or an internal test without paper. A software reset is then
performed.
To set the default values, press the TEST key when the red LED is
blinking.
If you do not want to reset the EEPROM parameters, press the FEED key
to return to the 'internal test with paper' or the 'internal test without paper'.
You can print out the current EEPROM parameters via the internal test with
paper (see section "Internal test with paper"). You can find the EEPROM
parameters under the header 'Memory Switches'.
Default values
Storage setting
Auto Line Feed disabled
Endurance Test disabled
User configuration
Paper width 76.2 mm (3")
Print density LIGHT [-6 ... 0 ... +6] DARK
Test level 5 (test of the take-up reel)

In level 5 you can perform an uninterrupted test of the paper take-up reel.
Paper must be present in the printer for the reel test. If the paper is not
sufficient for the reel test, the printer automatically performs a reset.

Test level 6 (carrier test (NP06 only))

Level 6 is not used in the TP06, whereas a carrier test is executed in case of
the NP06. The carrier is continuously moved forwards and then backwards
again.
The test can be aborted by pressing the TEST key.
The carrier home position is indicated by a green lit LED.
LED Function
Green Carrier home position
Test level 7 (set EEPROM sensor values to factory

default)
In level 7 you can reset all EEPROM sensor values to the factory default. The
status register of the sensors is deleted. This test level can only be selected
when the printer is undergoing an 'internal test with paper' or an 'internal test
without paper'.
To reset the EEPROM sensor values, press the TEST key when the red
LED is blinking.
If you do not want to reset the EEPROM sensor values, press the FEED
key to return to the 'internal test with paper' or the 'internal test without
paper'.
The result is output in a test printout in the section 'EEPROM sensor values'
(see also section "Calling and exiting the 'internal test with paper'").
All sensors and their default settings are output (see table below):
Sensor Sensor value Calibration status
PAPER_END : XX CAL
PRESENTER_OUT : XX CAL
PAPER_NEAR_END : XX CAL
MARK_SENSOR : 0 -
TOP_OF_FORM : XX CAL
In addition to the sensor designation, the sensor value (XX) and the calibration
status is printed out. If the sensor has been calibrated, this is indicated by the
letters 'CAL' (CALIBRATED = calibrated) in the calibration status. If the sensor

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Paper control
value shows a zero (0) and the calibration status shows '-', the respective
sensor has not been calibrated.
If a fault occurs during calibration, the sensor value shows '-' and the
calibration status 'ERR'.
Paper control
Paper is fed in a forward direction only. Backwards is not possible.
Loading paper
Feed the paper by hand into the paper channel of the printing unit. The printer
pulls the paper in automatically and outputs the paper via the presenter.
For correct paper feed or paper transport the front edge of the paper has to be
cut with scissors to get a right-angled sharp edge.
Feed the leading edge of the paper into the paper guides.
Once the paper has been properly inserted, pulled in and output, the following
text is automatically printed at the beginning of the paper roll:
If you can read this text,
Autoloading is successful
Remaining paper supply

Once 'paper-out' is recognized, there is still a remaining quantity of paper
available for printing, namely 15 lines at 1/6 inch each.
If 'paper torn' is detected, no more printouts can be executed. The yellow LED
blinks and reports 'paper out'.

Error handling Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Error handling
Error indicators
Error indicators are issued at the beginning of error handling.
Off Off Blinking Carrier error (NP06 only)
Off Off Blinking TOF position not found
Off Off Blinking Timeout for StartOfJob
Off Off Blinking Print head too hot
Off Off Blinking Voltage too high
Off Off Blinking Low voltage error
Off Off Blinking Device error

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Error handling
ERROR LED blinking pattern
Recoverable errors
The following table shows the blinking pattern of all errors, that can be
recovered by removing and inserting the paper roll.
This pattern is called the 'positive' blinking pattern.
In case of the positive blinking pattern, you must count how often the ERROR-
LED is switched on.
Error Description ERROR LED blinking pattern
Carrier The carrier does 2
error not leave or
(NP06 reach its home approx. 5 sec
only) position.
ToF After cutting the 7
position printer doesnt
not found find the TOF approx. 5 sec
position.
Operation Paper is after 8
after power on not at
switch-on the print starting approx. 5 sec
error position. This
(TP06 error is activated
only) by memory
switch 7-4.
Paper The paper motion 9
motion sensor detects
error no paper motion approx. 5 sec
Timeout StartOfJob
for timeout occurred
StartOfJo because no approx. 5 sec
b EndOfJob was
received within
the specified
time.
LED is off
LED is on

Error handling Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Unrecoverable errors
The following table shows the blinking pattern of all errors, that cannot be
recovered by removing and re-inserting the paper roll.
This pattern is called the 'negative' blinking pattern.
In case of the negative blinking pattern, you must count how often the
ERROR-LED is switched off.
Error Description ERROR LED blinking pattern
Temperature Abnormal print 1
error head
temperature approx. 5 sec
(NP06) or
thermal array
temperature
(TP06).
High voltage The power 3
error supply voltage
is extremely approx. 5 sec
high.
Low voltage The power 4
error supply voltage
is extremely approx. 5 sec
low.
Printer error The loaded 5
printer driver
does not approx. 5 sec
correspond
with the
firmware.
LED is off
LED is on

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Error handling
Troubleshooting
Temperature error in the print head or thermal array
Replace the print head or thermal array (see the section

"Removing/installing the print head" or "Removing/installing the thermal
array"). If the error is still indicated, replace the printer (see the chapter
"Removal/Installation of Components").
High voltage / low voltage error
Check the power lines and the power supply and replace them if necessary
(see chapter "Removal/Installation of Components").
If the error condition persists, replace the printer (see chapter

Printer error
Load the following six files in the printer via KDIAG.

NP06.BIN TP06.BIN
NP06.FNT TP06.FNT
NP06.FRM TP06.FRM
NP06.LVF TP06.LVF
NP06.PUT TP06.PUT
NP06.SSV TP06.SSV
Paper motion error
Check whether the take-up reel is jammed or whether there is a paper jam
(see chapter "Journal Printer NP06", section "Paper jam" or chapter
"Journal Printer TP06", section "Paper jam" in the operating manual).

Controller Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Controller
The central control of the printer is handled by a 16-bit microcontroller. To
comply with the required range of functions, the following function blocks are
integrated in the controller:
Memory
1 MByte flash memory with boot sector for firmware and character
generators
4 MBit SRAM
256 Byte NVRAM
EPLD (programmable logic)
Contains memory addressing

I/O decoding
Interfaces
USB
Power control
Power driver for stepper motor

Power driver for thermal head
Sensors
Photosensor for
weekend and paper-out sensor
Top of form (ToF) sensor

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Pin assignment
Pin assignment
24 V connector
Type of connector:
AMP Modu 2-pin M
Contact Description
1 24 V
2 Ground
Data connector
USB type B, 4-pin M
3 4
Contact Description
1 VCC (+5 V)
2 - DATA
3 + DATA
4 GND

Maintenance and service Journal Printer TP06/NP06

After each paper change, remove paper scraps, paper dust and foreign
objects, e.g. with a brush.
Check the thermal array or the print head for signs of wear.
Maintenance counter
When printer parts such as the thermal array or the print head are replaced,
the maintenance counter must be reset.
It is reset using the program KDIAG.
Remedying poor print quality
Matrix printer NP06

A poor or too bright print image may be caused by a worn ribbon cartridge or a
worn print head.
The print head could be hot.
Wait a few minutes for print head to cool down if it has just finished
printing.
i The ribbon cartridge and the print head are consumables which the
customer has to order separately (see also chapter "Journal Printer
NP06", section "Consumables" in the operating manual).
If print quality is poor, first replace the ribbon cartridge (see chapter
"Journal Printer NP06", section "Replacing the ribbon cartridge" in the
operating manual).
If this does not improve print quality, replace the print head (see chapter
"Journal Printer NP06", section "Remedying poor print quality" in the
operating manual).

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Maintenance and service
Thermal printer TP06

Poor print quality can be caused by a dirty thermal array.
The print head could be hot.
Wait a few minutes for print head to cool down if it has just finished
printing.
i The thermal array is a consumable which the customer has to order

separately (see also chapter "Journal Printer TP06", section
"Consumables" in the operating manual).
Remove paper scraps, paper dust and foreign objects from the thermal
array.
Use a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with pure isopropyl alcohol (e.g.
ISOPADS).
Do not close the printer until the alcohol has completely evaporated.

Technical data Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Technical data
Electrical characteristics
Matrix printing unit NP06

Supply voltage: 24 V 10 %
Power consumption:
Printing: max. 108 W
Standby: max. 5 W
Connector: AMP Modu 2-pin M
Thermal printing unit TP06

Power consumption:
Printing: max. 120 W
Standby: max. 5 W
Interface to the host

The interface is a USB port.

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Technical data
Room classification
Operating temperature: 0 C to +50 C (+32 F to +122 F)
Storage temperature: -10 C to +70 C (-14 F to +158 F)
Humidity:
Operation: 5 % to 95 %
Storage: 5 % to 98 %
Print head

Print method: Impact serial
9 pins
Vertical pin distance: 0.353 mm (0.014")
Pin diameter: 0.3 mm (0.012")
Max. pin frequency: 1500 Hz
Resolution:
Horizontal: 158 dpi
Vertical: 72 dpi

Print method: Thermal
Print speed: 150 mm/sec. (5.91"/sec.)
Resolution:
Horizontal: 203 dpi
Vertical: 203 dpi

Ribbon cartridge
Cartridge: Continuous ribbon
Ribbon cartridge: Nylon ribbon
Width: 11 mm - 0.3 mm (0.43" - 0.02")
Color: purple (black optional)
Service life:
Color: black 2,000,000 characters
Color: purple 6,000,000 characters
Paper feed unit

Paper feed: Stepper motor
Carrier drive: Stepper motor (NP06 only)
Feed keys: 1

Print function
Print width: NP06: 63.84 mm (2.51")
TP06: 72 mm (2.83") at 576 dots
Character matrix:
Font A (W x H): NP06: 9 x 9 + 3 spacing
Font B (W x H): 7 x 9 + 2 spacing
Font A (W x H): TP06: 12 x 24 + 2 spacing
Character size:
Font A (W x H): NP06: 1.92 x 3.17 mm (0.08" x 0.125")
Font B (W x H): 1.44 x 3.17 mm (0.06" x 0.125")
Font A (W x H): TP06: 1.75 x 3 mm (0.07" x 0.118")
Font B (W x H): 1.25 x 2.1 mm (0.05" x 0.08")
Number of characters:
Font A: NP06: 22 cpl at 8.84 cpi
24 cpl at 9.95 cpi
33 cpl at 13.26 cpi
Font B: 40 cpl at 15.91 cpi
44 cpl at 17.64 cpi
Font A: TP06: 28 cpl at 10.2 cpi
36 cpl at 12.7 cpi
41 cpl at 14.5 cpi
57 cpl at 20.3 cpi
Character set: IBM character set II

with 13 country-specific character sets
PC850 (multilingual)
PC852 (Latin 2)
PC858 (Latin 2, Euro Sign)
PC860 (Portuguese)
PC863 (Canadian French)
PC865 (Nordic)
PC866 (Cyrillic)
WPC1252 (Windows)
Kathakana

Country-specific character
sets: Download of user-defined characters possible
Font attributes: Normal type
Bold type
Height and width (up to 8 times)
Underlined
Rotated print (90)
Mirroring
Inverted
Paper specifications

Paper quality: Z 100
Paper type: paper on rolls
Paper color: white
Paper weight: approx. 55 to 90 g/m2 (14.67 to 24 lb)
Paper thickness: approx. 0.06 to 0.1 mm (0.002" to 0.004")
Paper smoothness: min. 20 Bekk sec.

Paper quality: OJI KF50 HDA or equivalent
Paper type: thermal paper rolls (thermal layer on the
outside)
Paper color: white
Paper weight: approx. 55 to 80 g/m2 (14.67 to 21.33 lb)
Paper thickness: approx. 0.06 to 0.09 mm
(0.002" to 0.004")

Journal roll dimensions

Paper width: 76.2 mm - 1 mm (3" - 0.04")
NP06: max. 80 mm / 105 mm (3.15" / 4.13")
TP06: max. 80 mm / 110 mm (3.15" / 4.33")
End of paper: not glued to roll sleeve
Inside diameter of roll sleeve: 12.5 mm + 1 mm (0.49" + 0.04")
Wall thickness of roll sleeve: 2 mm + 1 mm (0.08" + 0.04")
Roll sleeve material: cardboard / plastic
Initial winding of paper on the roll sleeve
1
2
max. 80 mm (3.15")
1 Paper 2 Roll sleeve

Dimensions and weights

With 80 mm/3.15" take-up With 110 mm/4.33" take-up
reel Without journal roll reel Without journal roll
Depth: 313 mm (12.32") 313 mm (12.32")
Width: 134 mm (5.28") 134 mm (5.28")
Height: 188 mm (7.4") 203 mm (7.99")
Weight:
NP06: approx. 2.8 kg (6.17 lb) approx. 2.8 kg (6.17 lb)
TP06: approx. 2.4 kg (5.29 lb) approx. 2.4 kg (5.29 lb)

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Removing / installing the components
Removing / installing the components
Print head
Turn off the power by removing the power supply connector (see section
"Views of matrix printer", item 6 in the figure "Customer panel and
connectors").
Remove the ribbon cartridge (see chapter "Journal Printer NP06", section
"Replacing the ribbon cartridge" in the operating manual).
Press the respective retaining clip in
the direction of the arrows (1) and (2)
as far as possible. Raise the print
head (3) slightly until you can detach
the cable from the old print head.
Connect the cable to the new print
3 head, and carefully place the new print
head in its mounting.
Fix the print head (1) in its mounting

by pressing the respective retaining
clip in the direction of the arrows (2)
and (3) as far as possible.
Insert the ribbon cartridge.
1
Reinstall it by following the same steps
in reverse order.

Removing / installing the components Journal Printer TP06/NP06
Thermal array
Remove the printer (see chapter "Removal/Installation of Components")

and place it on a level surface.
Remove screw (1) on the left side and
the corresponding screw on the right
side. Remove the cover (2) upwards.
Remove screw (1) on the left side and

the corresponding screw on the right
side. Remove the paper cover (2)
upwards.
Lift the thermal printing unit a little (1)

and remove it in the direction of the
arrow. Put down the printing unit.

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 Removing / installing the components
Remove the ribbon cable (1) from the

printing unit in the direction of the
arrow.
Loosen the screws (1) and (2). Press

the green lever in the direction of the
arrow (3) and swing the thermal
printing unit up. Loosen the screws
until ...
... you can remove the thermal

array (1) from the printing unit
grasping it on the sides (2) and (3).
i Always hold the thermal array

on the sides (2) and (3).
Reinstall it by following the same

steps in reverse order.

Removing / installing the components Journal Printer TP06/NP06

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
i This chapter lists the available versions of the components. Which
version is used in the device is described in the chapter "Function and
Integration".
This chapter describes the following versions of the thermal receipt printer
TP07A and the matrix receipt printer NP07A:
01750130744 Thermal receipt printer TP07A
Paper width: 76.2 mm, 82.5 mm - 1 mm
(3", 3.25" - 0.04")
Outer receipt roll diameter:
max. 180 mm / 260 mm (7.09" / 10.24")
01750190895 Thermal receipt printer TP07A-2
(3", 3.25" - 0.04")
max. 180 mm / 260 mm (7.09" / 10.24")

01750142735 Matrix receipt printer NP07A
(3", 3.25" - 0.04")
max. 180 mm / 260 mm (7.09" / 10.24")

Printer connection Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
The thermal [matrix] receipt printer TP07A or TP07A-2 [NP07A] is a modular

built-in printer. It consists of a thermal printing unit [matrix printing unit],
integrated cutter and the presenter (output transport) for variable receipt
length. The paper path is controlled by several paper sensors. The TP07A-2
version is a further development of the TP07A. The abbreviations TP07A and
NP07A used below stand for the different printing techniques. These
abbreviations also include the respective versions of the models. If it is
necessary to make a distinction between individual variations, then the type
designation will be listed in its entirety.
The following description contains no information on the normal operation of
the printer. You can find this information in the operating manual of the CINEO
C2560.
Printer connection
Connect the printer only when the system is disconnected from the
power supply.
Voltage supply
The printer is operated with 24V DC. The 5V voltage for the logic board is
generated internally.
Data interface
USB connector Type B

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Views of thermal printer TP
Views of thermal printer TP
Entire device
TP07A
1 Adjustment keys 5 Cutter

2 Display (LED) 6 Presenter rocking bar
3 Paper roll 7 Presenter
4 Thermal printing unit

Views of thermal printer TP Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
TP07A-2
1 Adjustment keys 5 Cutter

2 Display (LED) 6 Presenter rocking bar
3 Paper roll 7 Presenter
4 Thermal printing unit

Detail views
1 Lever to lift up the thermal array

2 Paper entry

TP
1 Notch for 180 mm (7.09") paper 6 40 mm (1.57") core diameter (A3)

roll (A) with 180 mm (7.09") paper roll
2 Adjustable weekend sensor diameter
3 Notch for 260 mm (10.24") paper 7 18 mm (0.71") core diameter (B1)
roll (B) with 260 mm (10.24") paper roll
4 18 mm (0.71") core diameter (A1) diameter
with 180 mm (7.09") paper roll 8 25 mm (0.98") core diameter (B2)
diameter with 260 mm (10.24") paper roll
diameter

Control panel
1 LINE FEED key (paper feed button)

2 Test key
3 POWER LED (green)
4 LED PE (yellow)
5 ERROR-LED (red)

Connections
1 24V DC power supply

2 Interface USB port, Type B connector

Position of sensors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Presenter output sensor 6 Control mark sensor on the rear

2 Paper-cutting sensor (cutter) (adjustable)
3 Top of Form (TOF) sensor 7 Control mark sensor on the
4 Thermal sensor (print head) thermal print side (adjustable)
5 Paper out sensor 8 Paper-low sensor (adjustable)

Views of matrix printer NP Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Views of matrix printer NP
Entire device
2 7
1 Printer control panel/ 5 Cutter

printer controller 6 Receipt output (presenter)
2 Paper infeed 7 Paper-low sensor adjustment
3 Control mark sensor 8 Paper roll holder
4 Matrix printing mechanism

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Views of matrix printer NP
Detail views
1 Notch for 180 mm (7.09") paper 6 40 mm (1.57") core diameter (A3)

roll (A) with 180 mm (7.09") paper roll
2 Adjustable weekend sensor diameter
3 Notch for 260 mm (10.24") paper 7 18 mm (0.71") core diameter (B1)
roll (B) with 260 mm (10.24") paper roll
diameter

Control panel
1 LINE FEED key (paper feed button)

2 Test key
3 POWER LED (green)
4 LED PE (yellow)
5 ERROR-LED (red)

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Views of matrix printer NP
Connections
1 24V DC power supply

2 Interface USB port, Type B connector

Position of sensors
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 Paper-low sensor 4 Carrier home position

(adjustable) 5 Thermal sensor (print head)
2 Control mark sensor on the 6 Top of Form (TOF) sensor
print side (adjustable) 7 Paper-cutting sensor (cutter)
3 Paper out sensor 8 Presenter output sensor

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Paper path monitoring
Paper path monitoring

Weekend sensor (PWE) Photosensor for weekend supply detection. The
photosensor is located at the paper roll holder.
End of paper (PE) The photosensor detects that the paper supply is
completely used up and it is used for automatic
paper feed. The photosensor is located at the
paper transport unit.
Mark detection (MK) Photosensor for mark control. The photosensor is
located on the right edge by default and can be
adjusted if necessary.
Top of Form (TOF) The photosensor controls the paper feed to the
sensor cutter and to the first print position. The
photosensor is located at the paper transport unit.
Cutter This switch controls the paper path through the
cutter.
Presenter output (PrA) The photosensor is used to control the paper path
through the presenter. The photosensor is placed
at the presenter exit.

How the unit works Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
How the unit works

When the power is turned on, the firmware is started. The keys that are
pressed at power-on define the start conditions for the firmware. The
permanent parameters are loaded and the relevant settings made.
The firmware is not operable if an error is found during the test of external
storage or during initialization of the emulation. In this case, the firmware is
halted and it is no longer possible to communicate via the interface.
Power-on procedure
After the printer is switched on, the printer is initialized. The following functions
are executed during the initialization:
Processor initialization,
Memory test,
Definition of start conditions,
Loading of values from parameter memory,
Execution of mechanical reset (not in test mode),
Establishment of ready status (not in test mode).

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Status indicators
Status indicators
The status of the receipt printer is displayed by 3 LEDs. The statuses of the
individual LEDs are identified by the following abbreviations:
Abbreviation Status
0 LED is off
1 LED is on
x LED can be on or off
bl LED is blinking
s bl LED blinking fast
Indicators at power-on
green yellow red Status
bl bl bl Test mode (selection level)
Display when online

If test mode is not activated and error handling inactive, the display information
for normal operating state is assembled cyclically and output to the display.
1 x 0 Operational readiness
x 0 x Paper is loaded
x bl x Paper end
x s bl x Calibration of sensors
x 1 x Paper-low sensor
x x 1 Offline
x x bl Error (see section "ERROR LED blinking
pattern")

Key functions Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Key functions
Normal mode
Pressing individual keys when the printer is in normal operational mode will
give priority to the execution of certain functions.
None None
TEST Prints test printout
FEED Paper feed by 1/6". If the key is pressed for longer than
2 seconds, the paper is fed continuously until the key
combination is changed.
Do not press the FEED key during normal operation.
The key functions are triggered via a spontaneous functions 'job channel in the
device controller' and are executed with higher priority than the functions from
the emulation. For this reason, you should not hamper or corrupt emulation
functions during operations by executing key functions.

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Key functions
Internal test
Internal test with paper

After the 'Internal test with paper' has been selected (see section "Calling and
exiting the 'Internal test with paper'") the selection mode is active. By pressing
the keys the 'Internal test with paper' can be controlled.
TEST The TEST key is used to start the 'Internal test with paper',
to start the test levels and to complete them.
during the 'Internal test with paper'.
TEST+FEED None
'Internal test without paper'

After the 'Internal test without paper' has been selected (see also section
"Calling and exiting the 'Internal test without paper'") the selection mode is
active. By pressing the keys the 'Internal test without paper' can be controlled.
TEST The TEST key is used to start the 'Internal test without
paper', to start the test levels and to complete them.
during the 'Internal test without paper'.
TEST+FEED None

Internal test Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Internal test
Calling and exiting the 'Internal test with paper'

This program facilitates the check of the main printer functions.
Press the TEST key and release it.
Press the TEST key again and keep the TEST key pressed until the test
printout is output.
The keys are blinking and you can select a test with the FEED key (see
section "Indicators for the selected test level").
Start the test with the TEST key.
Exit the internal test by pressing the TEST key in the selection level.
released and the message Power failure is presented.

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Internal test
Test printout
Matrix printer NP Thermal printer TP

Calling and exiting the 'Internal test without

paper'
This program makes it possible to check the most important printer functions
that are possible without paper.
Press the TEST key.
Select a test using the FEED key (see section "Indicators for the selected
test level") and start the test by pressing the TEST key.
Exit the internal test by pressing the TEST key in the selection level.
released and the message Power failure is presented.

Indicators for the selected test level

In the selection mode (LEDs are blinking), the LEDs show the selected test
level in binary code when the FEED key is pressed. The LEDs have the
following rating:
PC Rating
red 4
yellow 2
green 1
Binary display of test level
red yellow green Test level Designation

0 0 1 1 Paper supply sensors
0 1 0 2 Printer test
0 1 1 3 Statistical information
1 0 0 4 Set EEPROM parameters to default
values
1 0 1 5 Mark test or cutter/presenter test
1 1 0 6 Carrier test (NP only)
1 1 1 7 Calibrating EEPROM sensor values
Explanation:
0 = off
1 = on

Description of the test programs
Test level 1 (paper sensor test)

At level 1, the two paper sensors 'Paper out' and 'Paper low' are displayed on
activation.
This test level can only be selected when the printer is undergoing an 'internal
test with paper' or an 'internal test without paper'. The green LED is lit.
The order of actuation is not specified. The yellow LED lights up to indicate a
sensor status change.
If the paper has been removed at least once from the paper sensor Paper
out, the printer automatically performs a reset when the test level is exited.
Test level 2 (printer test)

The printer test takes place in level 2st. This test level can only be selected
when the printer is undergoing an 'Internal test with paper'. There must be
paper in the printer for the test. If the paper is not sufficient for the printer test,
the printer automatically performs a reset.
The printer prints out all character sets in 'Font A' and 'Font B', e.g. PC437,
Katakana, PC850, PC860, PC863, PC865, WPC1252, PC866, PC852,
PC858, Space page.
Test level 3 (statistical information)

In level 3 the statistical information is printed. This test level can only be
selected when the printer is undergoing an 'Internal test with paper'. There
must be paper in the printer to print the statistical information. If the paper is
not sufficient for the print, the printer automatically performs a reset.
The printout consists of three blocks of information. The first block shows the
current statistical values of the printer controller, the second shows specific
firmware (FW) information, and the third block is printed out as a form
(date/name) and can be filled out by service personnel.
Statistical values of the printer controller
i The statistical values of the printer controller can be set via the KDIAG
program or via the T/SOP when components are replaced.

EEP. Indicates whether or not the EEPROM checksum is in order
TDOT. Shows the total number of printed dots
DOT. Shows the number of dots printed with the current thermal
array
HEAD Shows the number of thermal array changes
TLFS. Shows the total number of line feeds executed *
LFS. Shows the number of line feeds executed with the current
line feed motor *
LFCH. Shows the number of line feed motor changes
TCUT. Shows the total number of paper cuts
CUT. Shows the number of paper cuts executed with the current
cutter
CUTC. Shows the number of cutter changes
TRET. Shows the total number of retracts
RET. Shows the number of retracts with the current retract unit
(optional)
RETC. Shows the number of changed retract units
TPRE. Shows the total number of receipts output
PRE. Shows the number of receipts output with the current printer
unit
PREC. Shows the number of presenter changes
* Be sure that all line feeds are counted.

If the printer receives a cut command (GS V 0), it pulls the paper into
the cutter and transports it back to the first print position. This
corresponds to 20 additional line feeds.

TCAM. Shows the total number of carrier movements executed *
CAM. Shows the number of carrier movements executed with the
current carrier unit *
CAMC. Shows the number of changed carrier units *
POC. Shows the total number of power-on cycles
POT. Shows the number of operating hours
UPD. Shows the number of EEPROM updates
PCB. Indicates the revision level
SNO. Indicates the serial number
DAT. Indicates the production date
REV. Indicates the revision number
* only relevant for matrix printer
Firmware (FW) information
VERS. Indicates the FW version
DAT. Indicates the release date of the FW
Form
DATE Date of services (handwritten)
NAME Name of technician (handwritten)

Test printout of 'Statistical data'
Matrix printer NP Thermal printer TP

Test level 4 (reset EEPROM parameters to default values)

In level 4 you can set the default values for the storage settings and for the
user configuration.
This test level can only be selected when the printer is undergoing an 'internal
test with paper' or an 'internal test without paper'. A software reset is then
performed.
To set the default values, press the TEST key when the red LED is
blinking.
If you do not want to reset the EEPROM parameters, press the FEED key
to return to the 'Internal test with paper' or the 'Internal test without paper'.
You can print out the current EEPROM parameters via the 'internal test with
paper' (see section "Internal test with paper"). You can find the EEPROM
parameters under the header 'Memory Switches'.
Default values
Memory setting
Auto Line Feed disabled
Black mark sensor disabled
Endurance test disabled
User configuration
Paper width 80.0 mm (3.15")
Paper is not at start position after power on present paper
Print density LIGHT [-6 ... 0 ... +6] DARK

Test level 5 mark test or cutter/presenter test

In level 5 you can perform an uninterrupted test of the mark control or
cutter/presenter test. This test level can only be selected when the printer is
undergoing an 'Internal test with paper'.
If mark detection is enabled, the mark control test is activated. If it is not
enable, the cutter/presenter test is executed. The mark control of
cutter/presenter test requires that paper be present in the printer.
If the paper is not sufficient for the test, the printer automatically performs a
reset.
Mark control
The printer prints a horizontal line at the control mark and then performs a
paper feed. The next mark is looked for, the paper is then transported to the
cutter, cut off and output via the presenter. Then the paper is retracted to the
1st print position (TOF). The printer then performs the test continuously.
The operating state of the photosensors are indicated by LEDs.
LED Function
green Presenter output
Yellow Top of Form (TOF) sensor
Red Paper out sensor

Cutter/presenter test
The printer prints a horizontal line in the first line of the receipt, then the paper
is advanced approx. 100 mm (3.94") (receipt length), cut and output. Then the
paper on the receipt roll is advanced to its first print position. The printer then
performs the test continuously.
The operating state of the photosensors are indicated by LEDs.
LED Function
green Presenter output
Yellow Top of Form (TOF) sensor
Red Paper out sensor
Test printout of mark control and cutter/presenter test

Test level 6 (carrier test) (only NP)

Level 6 is not used in the TP, whereas a carrier test is executed in case of the
NP. The carrier is continuously moved forwards and then backwards again.
The carrier home position is indicated by a green lit LED.
LED Function
green Carrier home position
Test level 7 (set EEPROM sensor values to factory default)

In level 7 you can reset all EEPROM sensor values to the factory default. The
status register of the sensors is deleted. This test level can only be selected
when the printer is undergoing an 'Internal test with paper' or an 'Internal test
without paper'.
To reset the EEPROM sensor values, press the TEST key when the red
LED is blinking.
If you do not want to reset the EEPROM sensor values, press the FEED
key to return to the 'Internal test with paper' or the 'Internal test without
paper'.
The result is output in a test printout in the section 'EEPROM sensor values'
(see also section "Calling and exiting the 'Internal test with paper'").
All sensors and their default settings are output (see table below):
Sensor Sensor value Calibration status
PAPER_END : XX CAL
PRESENTER_OUT : XX CAL
PAPER_NEAR_END : XX CAL
MARK_SENSOR : 0 -
TOP_OF_FORM : XX CAL
In addition to the sensor designation, the sensor value (XX) and the calibration
status is printed out. If the sensor has been calibrated, this is indicated by the
letters 'CAL' (CALIBRATED = calibrated) in the calibration status. If the sensor
value shows a zero (0) and the calibration status shows '-', the respective
sensor has not been calibrated.
If a fault occurs during calibration, the sensor value shows '-' and the
calibration status 'ERR'.

Paper control Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Paper control
How paper control is performed

The device control recognizes two types of paper motion:
1. A paper feed is performed by a certain number of motor steps. Paper feeds
are called up, for example, from within the emulation by line feeds.
2. Paper positioning is carried out to move to special positions in the printer
(cutting position, print position, receipt output in the presenter). The device
control positions the paper, depending on the status of the paper supply
sensors. Paper positioning is started, for example, by corresponding
commands (paper feed, eject, feeding) from the emulation to the device
control. Only the device control knows the exact positions.
In the printer, the PE and TOF photosensors are used for positioning. The PrA
photosensor is used in the presenter. Paper feeding is carried out exclusively
by the stepper motor for transport in the printer. When the paper reaches the
presenter, the stepper motor in the presenter will also be actuated. When the
paper is ejected after a cut, only the stepper motor in the presenter is actuated.
The minimum paper length which is cut off at feeding in and the minimum
distance of the marks on the paper has to be large enough as to ensure
secure paper feeding in the printer at all times.

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Paper control
Loading paper
Feed the paper by hand into the paper channel of the printing unit. The printer
pulls the paper in automatically and outputs the paper at the paper output.
In order to ensure correct paper feed or paper transport, the leading edge of
the paper web has to be cut with scissors to get a clean, straight edge (i.e. a
right-angled sharp edge).
Feed the leading edge of the paper into the paper guides.
Once the paper has been properly inserted, pulled in and output, the following
text is automatically printed at the beginning of the paper roll:
If you can read this print,
Autoloading is successful
(If you can read this text,
the paper is correctly inserted)
Remaining paper supply

Once 'paper-out' is recognized, there is still a remaining quantity of paper
available for printing, namely 15 lines at 1/6 inch each.
If 'paper torn' is detected, no more printouts can be executed. The yellow LED
blinks and reports 'paper out'.
Mark detection
The marks on the paper are detected with enabled mark control and enabled
mark detection during paper feed in forwards direction. When mark detection
is enabled, the photosensor 'MK' is activated for mark monitoring.
Synchronization on a mark takes place when the rear mark edge is detected. If
no mark is detected, error message 'Mark detection error' is issued. The marks
can be located on the left or the right or on both sides at the same height.

Setting the printer to the paper type (TP only) Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Setting the printer to the paper type

(TP only)
The following table shows how the presenter rocking bar has to be installed if
it was not installed as standard (also see the section "Views of thermal printer
TP", figure "Complete device", item 2).
Thermal print side on Thermal print side on
the inside of the paper the outside of the paper
roll roll
Presenter rocking bar yes yes
installed: (new standard ex
factory)
Installation is described in the following section.
Installing the presenter rocking bar (TP07A only)
'OPEN' is shown on the

locking/unlocking mechanism. Press
the green area marked 'OPEN' down
in the direction of the arrow (1).
Slightly raise the presenter in arrow
direction (2) and lift it out of the
printer (3).
i The rocking bar has recently been integrated as standard to facilitate

processing thin paper.

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Setting the printer to the paper type (TP only)
Push the opening (1) on the right arm

of the presenter rocking bar over the
bolt (2) on the presenter.
Carefully move the left arm outward in

the direction of the arrow (1) until you
can push the opening (2) in the arm
over the left-hand bolt of the
presenter.
Make sure that the bolt (3) on the right
does not slide out of the mounting.

Setting the printer to the paper type (TP only) Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Push the shaft mountings (1) and (3)

over the corresponding shafts (2)
and (4) in the direction of the arrow.
Lower the presenter in the arrow

direction (1).
The 'CLOSE' mark is shown on the
latching/unlatching mechanism.
Press the area marked 'CLOSE' down
in the arrow direction (2) until the
latching mechanism audibly locks into
place.

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Reset at power on
Reset at power on
This paper initialization is performed at power on. The paper initialization sets
the paper in the printer to first print position.
Initialization without printer on 1st print position
There are two options for printer reset without paper to the 1st print position:
If there is no document at the 1st print position when the printer is switched
on and Memory Switch 7-5 is set to OFF, the printer outputs the document
via the presenter.
If there is no document at the 1st print position when the printer is switched
on and Memory Switch 7-5 is set to ON, the printer switches to offline
status. In addition, the error message 'Operation following power-on error'
is issued (see section "Recoverable errors").
Calibration of sensors
To prevent sensor faults caused by wear and tolerances, the printer has a
sensor calibration feature. The calibration results are stored in EEPROM to be
able to use them after a power failure.
All beam interruption and reflective sensors are calibrated.
This happens automatically when a new receipt roll is inserted.
During calibration, the weekend (PWE), paper-out (PE), top of form (TOF) and
presenter exit (PrA) sensors must not detect any paper.
Remove the paper roll (see chapter "Receipt Printer TP07A/TP07A-2", or

"Receipt Printer NP07A", section "Changing the paper roll" in the operating
manual).
After these sensors have been calibrated, the printer waits for paper.
Insert a paper roll (see chapter "Receipt Printer TP07A/TP07A-2", or

manual).
After the paper has been inserted, the weekend (PWE) and mark detection
(MK) sensors are calibrated.
During calibration, the yellow LED blinks quickly.

Calibration of sensors Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
If calibration results in a value between '1' and '254', the value is accepted. If
calibration results in '0' or '255' there is an error.
Function of the beam interruption and reflective sensors
Beam interruption sensors:

The light source emits light and a
photosensor detects it if it is not
blocked by the paper. For calibration
purposes, the light intensity of the
source '0' is increased until the
receiver detects the light.
There must be no paper in the printer.
Reflective sensors:
The light source emits light and a
photosensor detects it if it is reflected
by the paper. For calibration purposes,
the light intensity of the source '0' is
increased until the receiver detects the
light.
There must be paper in the area of the
sensor.

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Calibration of sensors
Calibration of the control mark sensor

If the mark control is activated, the control mark sensor is also calibrated.
The mark sensor must detect the black
markings. To this end, the light
intensity is increased until the reflected
light is detected in the white area and
in the black area.
If during booting a '0' is found in EEPROM for mark detection, the printer
searches for a mark, transporting the paper in steps of 2.5 mm (0.1") each.
Once the printer has found the first control mark, it searches for the second
control mark. If after 20 steps it has found no second control mark, it aborts the
process. It also issues the error message 'Control mark detection error' (see
section "Recoverable errors").
If the paper roll is changed while the control mark sensor is calibrated, the
control mark sensor is calibrated again in a second procedure. The paper is
pulled in up to the first control mark and is then transported backwards. The
printer then transports the paper forward in steps of 2.5 mm (0.1") each until
the next control mark is detected.
An average value is calculated from the detected sensor voltage (DAC) for the
black area and the white area. This average is the new value for the sensor
voltage in the area of mark detection.
Setting sensor values to default
In level 7 you can initialize or set all EEPROM sensor values to factory default
(see section "Test level 7 (setting EEPROM sensor values to factory default)").
The status register of the sensors is deleted. The printer is reset and begins
with initial calibration.
Calibrating the TOF sensors

With the help of the KDIAG or T/SOP program, respectively, you can
determine the print position on paper with control marks.

Mark control Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Mark control
i When replacing sub-components, the control mark sensor has to be
calibrated using KDIAG or T/SOP, respectively.
Switching on the mark control

Mark control can be switched on using KDIAG or T/SOP, respectively.
Disabling mark control

Mark control can be disabled using KDIAG or T/SOP, respectively and via test
level 4 (see section "Test level 4 (reset EEPROM parameters to default
values)").

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Mark control
Positioning the control mark sensor
i The control mark sensor needs to be positioned in such a way that it

can detect the control marks on the paper rolls that are being used.
For this purpose, the thermal receipt printer TP has two control mark
sensors each on the thermal print side and/or on the rear side of the
printer (see chapter "Receipt Printer TP07A/TP07A-2", section
"Control mark sensor position" in the operating manual).
The matrix receipt printer NP has three control mark sensor positions
on the print side (see chapter "Receipt Printer NP07A", section
"Control mark sensor position" in the operating manual).
Remove the paper roll if applicable (see chapter "Receipt Printer TP07A/
TP07A-2" or "Receipt Printer NP07A", section "Changing the paper roll" in
the operating manual).
Changing the position of the control mark sensor on the

thermal print side (TP only)
The control mark sensor can be positioned either on the right or left,
depending on the position of the control marks on the thermal print side.
The following example shows how to move the control mark sensor from the
right to the left.
Press the two catches in the direction
shown by the arrow (1) and remove
the control mark sensor from its
mounting in the direction shown (2).
Mount the control mark sensor in the
left position (3).


print side (NP only)
The control mark sensor can be located on the right, in the middle or on the
left, depending on the position of the control marks on the print side.
right to the left.
Press the two catches in the arrow
3 direction (1) and remove the control
mark sensor from its mounting in the
4 arrow direction (2). Mount the control
mark sensor in the required
position (3) or (4).


rear (TP only)
The control mark sensor can be positioned either on the right or left,
depending on the position of the control marks on the rear.
right to the left.
3 Press the two catches in the arrow

direction (1) and remove the control
arrow direction (2).
left position (3).

Changing the position of the control mark sensor

between the thermal print side and the rear (TP only)
General information
The control mark sensor can be positioned either on the thermal print side or
on the rear, depending on the position of the control marks on the paper roll.
Use a suitable tool to bend the metal
bracket (1) to a vertical position and
remove the spacer plate (2) from its
mounting as shown by the arrow.
Changing from the thermal print side to the rear
Press the two catches in the direction

shown by the arrow (1) and remove
the control mark sensor (2) from its
mounting.

On the rear side there are two

holders (1) and (2) for the control mark
sensor.
i Lead the connecting cable

through the cutout (3).
When inserting the distance
plate make sure that the
connecting cable is not
damaged.
Continue with the installation by
order.
Changing from the rear to the thermal print side
Press the two catches in the arrow

direction (1) and remove the control
arrow direction (2).
Remove the connection cable from the
cutout (3).


mounting (1) or (2).
Mount the spacer plate (1) in

mountings (2) to (4).
3
2

General information
Bend the metal bracket (1) back into

its original position with the aid of a
suitable tool.
Insert a paper roll (see chapter "Receipt Printer TP07A/TP07A-2", or

manual).

End of paper Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
End of paper
Physical end of paper

If no more paper is detected at the photosensor PE during cyclical monitoring,
'end of paper' is defined and the status is reported internally. This internal
message is also sent when paper is removed manually.
End of paper during printing

If the device control unit detects 'end of paper' or 'no paper' status at the PE
photosensor at the start of the print function, then an error has occurred.
The print function is aborted and an error handling procedure for 'end of paper'
is activated.
The error handling procedure indicates the error on the display (analogous
with paper feed error).
End-of-paper detection
The status of the PE photosensor is reported to the host as 'paper out'
message with each status query.
Paper-low detection
The status of the PWE photosensor is reported to the host as paper-low status
each time the status is queried. The message is used to determine the last
print jobs. The message does not have any influence on the operation of the
paper control.

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Error handling
Error handling
Error indicators
Errors are displayed at the beginning of error handling.
off off blinking Paper jam during cutting
off off blinking Carrier error (only NP)
off off blinking Paper jam before cutting
off off blinking Control mark detection error
off off blinking Paper jam after cutting - in the presenter
off off blinking TOF position not found
off off blinking Operation after power-up error
off off blinking Time out at StartOfJob
off off blinking Print head too hot
off off blinking Voltage too high
off off blinking Voltage too low
off off blinking Device error
Blinking pattern of the ERROR-LED
Recoverable errors
This pattern is called the 'positive' blinking pattern.
In case of the positive blinking pattern, you must count how often the ERROR-
LED is switched on.

Error handling Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Error Description Blinking pattern of the ERROR-LED

Paper jam The automatic 1
during cutter does not
cutting work because it approx. 5 sec
does not leave
or does not
reach the home
position.
Carrier The carrier does 2
error (only not leave or
NP07A) reach its home approx. 5 sec
position.
Paper jam A paper jam is 3
prior to detected
cutting between print approx. 5 sec
starting position
and TOF sensor.
Control The printer 4
mark doesnt find the
detection control mark. approx. 5 sec
error
Paper jam After the paper 5
after is cut, a paper
cutting jam is detected approx. 5 sec
in in the printer's
presenter presenter
(receipt output).
Paper jam After the paper 6
after is cut, a paper is
cutting detected in the approx. 5 sec
in retractor printer's
retractor.
LED is off
LED is on

The following error conditions can be corrected by removing and inserting the
paper roll.
TOF After cutting the 7
position printer doesnt
not found find the TOF approx. 5 sec
position.
Operation After switching 8
after on, the paper is
power-up not at its starting approx. 5 sec
error position. This
error is enabled
by memory
switch 7-4.
Timeout StartOfJob
for timeout as no
StartOfJob EndOfJob (end approx. 5 sec
(beginning of print order)
of the print was received
order) during the
specified period.
LED is off
LED is on

Unrecoverable errors
This pattern is called the 'negative' blinking pattern.
In case of the 'negative' blinking pattern you must count how often the
ERROR-LED is switched off.
Tempera- Abnormal print 1
ture error head
temperature approx. 5 sec
(NP07A) or
thermal array
temperature
(TP07A)
High The power 3
voltage supply voltage is
error extremely high. approx. 5 sec
Low Supply voltage 4
voltage is extremely low.
error approx. 5 sec
Printer The printer 5
error driver does not
correspond to approx. 5 sec
the firmware
(printer error).
LED is off
LED is on

Troubleshooting
i Troubleshooting is described exemplarily for the receipt printer TP, the

procedure for the receipt printer NP is analogous to it.
Paper jam
Cut off the paper at the paper support.
Remove the paper roll with the paper
roll holder up and out of the printer (2).
Remove the rest of the paper by
turning the wheel in the direction of the
arrow (1).
Presenter
'OPEN' is shown on the

locking/unlocking mechanism. Press
the green area marked 'OPEN' down
in the direction of the arrow (1).
Slightly raise the presenter in arrow
direction (2) and lift it out of the
printer (3).
Remove any remaining paper.

Insert the receptacles in the

corresponding devices in arrow
direction (1).
Lower the presenter in the arrow

direction (1).
The 'CLOSE' mark is shown on the
latching/unlatching mechanism.
Press the area marked 'CLOSE' down
in the arrow direction (2) until the
latching mechanism audibly locks into
place.

Removing scraps of paper underneath the presenter's rocking bar TP07A
Any paper scraps that may be under

the rocking bar of the presenter must
be removed.
Press the shaft of the presenter

rocking bar (1) down in arrow direction
and lift out any scraps of paper (2).
Removing scraps of paper underneath the presenter's rocking bar

TP07A-2
Remove the presenter (see previous section).

Lift up the shaft of the presenter
rocking bar (1) in arrow direction and
lift out any scraps of paper that may
be present (2).

Thermal printing unit (TP only)
When the cutter is in its home position you can see a red plastic mark at
position (1).
Check whether the cutter is in home
position. If not, turn the knurled
wheel (2) until you can see the red
plastic mark (1) on the upper side of
the cutter.
Press the green lever (1) in the

direction of the arrow and swing the
thermal printing unit (2) upwards.
Remove any remaining paper.
Matrix printing mechanism (NP only)
Remove the ribbon cartridge from the printing unit (see chapter "Receipt
Printer NP07A", section "Changing the paper roll" in the operating manual).
Cut the remaining paper in front of the paper guide and remove the paper
from the printer.
Insert the ribbon cartridge in the printing unit.

Mark control detection error
Check whether the paper roll is inserted correctly or a paper roll without
control marks is inserted.
Cutter
When the cutter is in its home position you can see a red plastic mark at
position (1).
Check whether the cutter is in home
position. If not, turn the knurled wheel
(2) until you can see the red plastic
mark (1) on the upper side of the
cutter.
Temperature error in the print head or thermal array
Replace the print head or the thermal array (see section

"Removal/Installation of Components"), if the error condition persists,
replace the printer (see chapter "Removal/Installation of Components").
High voltage/low voltage error
Check the power lines and the power supply and replace them if necessary
(see chapter "Removal/Installation of Components").
If the error condition persists, replace the printer (see chapter


Printer error
Load the following six files in the printer via KDIAG or T/SOP, respectively.
Printer NP Printer TP
NP07A.BIN TP07A.BIN
NP07A.FNT TP07A.FNT
NP07A.FRM TP07A.FRM
NP07A.LVF TP07A.LVF
NP07A.PUT TP07A.PUT
NP07A.SSV TP07A.SSV

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Controller
Controller
The central control of the printer is handled by a microcontroller. To comply
with the required range of functions, the following function blocks are
integrated in the controller:
Memory
Flash memory with boot sector for firmware and character generators
4 MBit SRAM
256 byte EEPROM for settings and static data
EPLD (programmable logic)
Contains memory addressing

I/O decoding
Interfaces
USB
Power control
Power driver for the paper feed unit stepper motor

Power driver for thermal head
Sensors
Photosensor for
weekend and paper-out sensor
Mark detection
Presenter output
Top of Form (TOF) sensor

Pin assignments Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Pin assignments
24V connector
Type of connector:
AMP Modu 2-pin M
Contact Designation
1 24V
2 Ground
Data connector
USB type B, 4-pin M
3 4
Contact Designation
1 VCC (+5 V)
2 - DATA
3 + DATA
4 GND

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Maintenance and service

After each paper change, remove paper scraps, paper dust and foreign
objects, e.g. with a brush.
Check the thermal array or the print head for signs of wear.
Maintenance counter
When printer parts such as the thermal array or the print head are replaced,
the maintenance counter must be reset.
It is reset using the program KDIAG or T/SOP, respectively.

Maintenance and service Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Eliminating poor print quality
Matrix printer NP
A print image that is poor or too light may be caused by a dirty printing area or
a worn print head.
The print head can be very hot if the printer has been printing for a
longer period of time right beforehand. Wait until the print head has
cooled off and the danger of causing a burn no longer exists.
i The ribbon cartridge and the print head are consumables which the
customer has to order separately (see also chapter "Journal Printer
NP07A", section "Consumables" in the operating manual).
Remove any paper residue, paper dust and foreign matter in the print area.
You can use tweezers, a brush or a vacuum cleaner to do this.
If the print quality remains poor, replace the print head (see section "Print
head").

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Maintenance and service
Thermal printer TP
Poor print quality can be caused by a dirty thermal array.
The thermal array can be very hot if the printer was used for a longer
period immediately beforehand. Wait until it has cooled off and the
danger of burns no longer exists.
i The thermal array is a consumable which the customer has to order

separately (see also chapter "Journal Printer TP07A", section
"Consumables" in the operating manual).
Remove any paper scraps, paper dust and foreign material from the
thermal array.
Use a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with pure isopropyl alcohol (e.g.
ISOPADS).
Wait until the alcohol has evaporated completely before you close the
thermal printing unit.

Technical Data Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Technical Data
Electrical data
Power consumption:
Print mode: max. 120 W
Standby: max. 5 W
Interface to the host

The interface is a USB port.
Room classification
Operating temperature: 0 C to +50 C (32 F to 122 F)
Storage temperature: -10 C to +70 C (14 F to 158 F)
Humidity:
Operation: 5 % to 95 %
Storage: 5 % to 98 %

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Technical Data
Print head
Matrix printing unit NP

Print method: Impact serial 9 pins
Vertical needle clearance: 0.353 mm (0.014")
Needle diameter: 0.3 mm (0.012")
Max. needle frequency: 1500 Hz
Resolution:
Horizontal: 158 dpi
Vertical: 72 dpi
Thermal printing unit TP

Print method: Thermo
Print speed: 150 mm/sec (5.91"/sec)
Resolution:
Horizontal: 203 dpi
Vertical: 203 dpi
Ribbon cartridge
Cassette: Continuous ribbon
Ribbon: Nylon ribbon
Width: 11 mm - 0,3 mm (0.43" - 0.012")
Color: purple (black optional)
Service life:
Color: black 2,000,000 characters
Color: purple 6,000,000 characters

Technical Data Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Paper transport unit

Paper feed: Stepping motor
Carriage drive: Stepper motor (only NP)
Feed keys: 1
Print functions
Print width: NP: 63.84 mm (2.51")
TP: 80 mm (3.15") at 640 dots
Character matrix:
Font A (W x H): NP: 9 x (9 + 3 spacing)
Font B (W x H): 7 x (9 + 2 spacing)
Font A (W x H): TP: 12 x 24 + 2 spacing
Character size:
Font A (W x H): NP: 1.92 x 3.17 mm (0.08" x 0.125")
Font B (W x H): 1.44 x 3.17 mm (0.06" x 0.125")
Font A (W x H): TP: 1.75 x 3.0 mm (0.07" x 0.118")
Font B (W x H): 1.25 x 2.1 mm (0.05" x 0.08")
No. of characters:
Font A: NP: 22 cpl at 8.84 cpi
24 cpl at 9.95 cpi
32 cpl at 13.26 cpi
44 cpl at 17.64 cpi
Font A: TP: 28 cpl at 10.2 cpi
36 cpl at 12.7 cpi
41 cpl at 14.5 cpi
57 cpl at 20.3 cpi

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Technical Data
Character set: IBM character set II

with 13 country-specific character sets
PC850 (Multilingual)
PC852 (Latin 2)
PC858 (Latin 2, Euro Sign)
PC860 (Portuguese)
PC863 (Canadian French)
PC865 (Nordic)
PC866 (Cyrillic)
WPC1252 (Windows)
Katakana
Country-specific
character sets: Download of user-defined characters possible
Font attributes: Normal type
Bold type
Height and width (up to 8 times)
Underlined
Rotated print (90)
Mirroring
Inverted
Dimensions and weights

for a printer with for a printer with
180 mm/7.09" receipt roll 260 mm/10.24" receipt roll
without receipt roll without receipt roll
Depth: 434.5 mm (17.11") 529 mm (20.83")
Width: 141.5 mm (5.57") 141.5 mm (5.57")
Height: 180 mm (7.09") 260 mm (10.24")
Weight:
NP: approx. 3.8 kg (8.38 lb) approx. 3.8 kg (8.38 lb)
TP: approx. 3.4 kg (7.5 lb) approx. 3.4 kg (7.5 lb)

Paper specification Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Paper specification
Matrix printer NP
Paper quality: Z 100
Paper type: Paper on rolls
Paper color: white
Paper weight: approx. 55 to 90 g/m2 4 %
(1.94 oz/10.7639 ft - 3.1746 oz/12.1094 ft)
Paper thickness: approx. 0.06 to 0.1 mm
(0.002" to 0.004")
Thermal printer TP
Paper quality: OJI KF50 HDA or equivalent
Paper type: Thermal paper rolls
(thermal layer on the outside and inside)
Paper color: white
Paper weight: approx. 55 to 80 g/m2
(1.94 oz/10.7639 ft - 2.8219 oz/10.7639 ft)
Paper thickness: approx. 0.06 to 0.1 mm (0.002" to 0.004")
Paper smoothness: Min. 300 Bekk sec.

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Paper specification
Receipt roll dimensions

Paper width: NP: 76.2 mm, 82.5 mm - 1 mm
(3", 3.25" - 0.04")
TP: 80 mm - 1 mm (3.15" - 0.04")
NP: max. 180 mm / 260 mm
(7.09" / 10.24")
TP: max. 180 mm / 260 mm
(7.09" / 10.24")
End of paper: not glued to roll sleeve
Inner diameter of roll sleeve: 18 mm, 25 mm or 40 mm + 1 mm *
(0.71", 0.98" or 1.57" + 0.04")
Wall thickness of roll sleeve: 3 mm ( 0.3 mm) (0.12" 0.01")
Roll sleeve material: cardboard / plastic
* When ordering the paper rolls you have to specify one value.
Control mark print

Opacity: 85 % according to DIN 53 146
PCS value control mark: 70 % according to DIN 66 236
Position: Left or right or both at the same height
Reflection factor Ro: 70 % according to DIN 53 145 Part 1

Paper specification Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Control mark dimensions

Mark height: 5 mm 0.1 mm (0.2 0.004")
Mark width: 8 mm 0.1 mm (0.31 0.004")
Mark color: Black, uncolored black
Black mark distance: min. 70 mm, max. 210 mm
(min. 2.76", max. 8.27")
Front thermal print side (TP) and/or print side (NP)
min. 70 (2.76"), max. 210 (8.27")
8 (0.31")
8 (0.31")
5 (0.2")
1 Feeding direction
Rear side (TP only)
5 (0.2")
8 (0.31")
18 (0.71")
1 Feeding direction

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Paper specification
Preprinted receipts
The receipts can be preprinted on the front side (TP and NP) and on the back
side (TP only) in the gray area (see illustration).
If the receipts are pre-printed outside the specified area the PCS value must
be less than 40%.
Front thermal print side (TP) and/or print side (NP)
8 (0.31")
8 (0.31")
1 Feeding direction Pre-printing
Rear side (TP only)
5 (0.2")
8 (0.31")
18 (0.71")
1 Feeding direction Pre-printing

Removing/installing the components Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Removing/installing the components
Print head
Turn off the power by unplugging the power supply connector (see section
"Connections", item 1).
Remove the ribbon cartridge (see chapter "Receipt Printer NP07A", section
"Replacing the ribbon cartridge" in the operating manual).
Press the respective retaining clip in
the direction of the arrows (1) and (2)
as far as possible. Pull the print
head (3) slightly out of its mounting
until you can detach the cable from the
old print head. Connect the cable to
the new print head, and carefully place
3 the new print head in its mounting.

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A Removing/installing the components
Fix the print head (1) in its mounting

by pressing the respective retaining
clip in the direction of the arrows (2)
and (3) as far as possible.
Insert the ribbon cartridge.
1 Continue with the installation by

order.
Thermal array
Remove the printer (see chapter "Removal/Installation of Components")

and place it on a level surface.
Loosen the screws (1) to (2) on the left
and the corresponding screws on the
right. Remove the printing unit (3)
upwards and set it down.

Removing/installing the components Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A
Remove the ribbon cable (1) from the

printing unit in the direction of the
arrow.
Undo screws (1) and (2). Press the

green lever upwards (3) in the direction
of the arrow and swing the thermal
printing unit open upwards. Loosen the
screws until ...
... you can remove the thermal

array (1) from the printing unit grasping
it on the sides (2) and (3).
i Always hold the thermal array on

the sides (2) and (3).

order.

Forms Printer TP20/TP22
TP20
1 Locking/release lever for the 5 Locking/release lever of

printer drum cover document feed unit
2 Printer drum 6 Grip of document feed unit
3 Printing unit with thermal array 7 Paper web 2
4 Locking/release knobs for the 8 Paper web 1
Thermal array 9 Printer control panel

TP22 Forms Printer TP20/TP22
TP22
1 Locking/release lever for the 5 Locking/release lever of

printer drum cover document feed unit
2 Printer drum 6 Grip of document feed unit
3 Printing unit with thermal arrays 7 Paper web 2
4 Locking/release knobs for the 8 Paper web 1
Printing unit 9 Printer control panel

Forms Printer TP20/TP22 Printer versions
Printer versions
Part Number Thermal array Description
01750182309 01750123488 Forms printer TP20 wide 1 paper path
01750192719 01750173534 Forms printer TP20 narrow 1 paper path
01750138067 01750123488 TP20 forms printer wide 2 paper paths
01750189960 01750173534 Forms printer TP20 narrow 2 paper paths
01750240452 01750205199 Forms printer TP22 wide 1 paper path
01750204783 01750205199 TP22 forms printer wide 2 paper paths
The TP20 forms printer is designed for single-sided printing (front),

i while the TP22 is designed for double-sided printing
(front and back). The "wide" and "narrow" versions differ in terms of
width of the printing unit. The outer dimensions of the printer are the
same for all versions.
Description
The printing unit features a modular structure with modules such as the paper
feed, printing and cutting units, stacker, reject transportation and shutter.
The device specific function groups reject tray, paper trays and shutter are not
part of the printer; but they are connected to the printer control logic and are
addressed and controlled by it.
The documents, which are not taken out or which are cut by the printer during
paper loading, are put in the reject tray. The monitoring sensor "Empty reject
tray" is in the terminal device directly at the printer, in the cash device external
at the auxiliary transport/reject tray.
The paper trays each have 2 sensors for monitoring the weekend limit and the
end of the stack. The weekend sensor is adjustable.
The shutter is equipped with a sensor in the terminal devices for home position
and document detection. In the cash devices are 2 separated sensors
available for this.
Detailed information on the sensors and the shutters are provided in the
respective sections of this chapter.
You will find details of the document types in the "Paper specifications".
The printer versions with two paper paths can be operated in two different
modes:

Printer versions Forms Printer TP20/TP22
Basic paper handling: If the same paper formats or types are used, the
paper guides are switched automatically from the printing unit during an
end of paper guide.
Extended paper handling: If the same paper formats or types are used, the
paper guide switching have to be carried out by the application software.
The paper handling is preset to the basic paper handling and can be switched
to the extended paper handling by using the application software.
The last sheets of continuous paper in the paper tray must not be
folded if the printer is to switch automatically to the other paper feed.
How the automatic paper feed switch works

The last sheet is printed and then the printer switches automatically to the
second paper feed.
Thus, if a transaction involves a total of seven documents, for example, and
paper path 2 has run out of paper after three documents have been printed,
the remaining four can be printed, collected and output using paper path 1.
The last active paper feed stays active until the next end of paper. The paper
path that was last activated is active until the next end of paper.

Forms Printer TP20/TP22 Operator control panel
Operator control panel
1 Status/7-segment display
2 Test key
3 EJECT key
i An overview of error messages can be found in the chapter

"Tables with error messages".

Description of the operator control panel Forms Printer TP20/TP22
Description of the operator control panel

Status display Normal condition = "on"
Warnings = static messages
Error = blinking message
EJECT key This key is used to eject inserted paper from the paper
transport unit.
Test key This key triggers the internal test, or resets the printer
when an error has occurred.
EJECT key
The EJECT key causes the continuous paper feed to be ejected. If the printer
has two paper paths, the paper is ejected from the front, uncovered path
(paper path 2). When the key is pressed again paper is ejected from the rear
path (paper path 1).
In the event of a TP20/TP22 error condition, the EJECT key is used in the
same way as the TEST key to trigger the reset procedure.
If errors or warning messages are being indicated by the status display, these
are cleared with the EJECT key after the remedy of the error cause

Forms Printer TP20/TP22 Test printout TP20
TEST key
The TEST key has several functions:
1. When you press the Test key during the basic setting of the printer (no
form is being processed and no form is offered), a test printout is started.
The test document stays for 2 sec. inside of the opened device.
2. If there is a fault in the printer (flashing 7-segment display) or if print data is
hanging, the printer is reset with this key returning it to the basic setting.
The input buffer is cleared and any forms being printed are cut and
transferred to the reject box. Any forms in the collecting tray are also
transferred to the reject box.
Test printout TP20

Below is a sample of a test document printed by the thermal printing unit TP20
(not to scale):

Advanced test printout TP20 Forms Printer TP20/TP22
Advanced test printout TP20

i The advanced test printout can be performed by a software command
or the T/SOP. A description of individual parameters can be found
below.
Name Meaning
Header $MOD$ IDs Page header and $MOD$ IDs
TP20APGA.PGA $MOD$ ID of the loadable PGA (content of the
TP20ALDR.FRM programmable gate array)
TP20_437.FNT $MOD$ ID of the loadable loader
TP20ASTD.MOD $MOD$ ID of the loadable font
TP20ABST.BST $MOD$ ID of the loadable firmware
$MOD$ ID of the bootstrap
FACTORY Default settings
SETTINGS
Printer name Printer designation
Printer material Printer material number
number
Printer serial number Printer serial number
Printer production Printer production date in the format YYMMDD
date
Printer revision level Printer revision level MS 00-25 hexadecimal code,
(MS) e.g. "0x00000023". MS 00 = Bit0 (right Bit), MS 01 =
Bit1, .. , MS 25 = Bit25.
e.g. MS 00+01+05 = 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0010
0011 (binary) = "0x00000023" (hexadecimal).
Printer country of Country of origin of the printer, e.g. "DE" =
origin Deutschland
Print unit material Material number of the mounted thermal array.
number
Adjustment horizontal Factory setting for horizontal mechanical adjustment
(path 1/2) values, separated according to paper path 1/2.
Specification in 1/180 inch.

Forms Printer TP20/TP22 Advanced test printout TP20
Name Meaning
Adjustment vertical Factory setting for vertical mechanical adjustment
[1/180"] values, separated according to paper path 1/2 and
Path 1 paper marks D, C, CL (only available in the narrow
Path 2 printing unit) and CR (only available in the wide
printing unit). Specification in 1/180 inch.
System serial number System serial number
CONTROLLER Controller settings
SETTINGS
Controller material Controller material number
number
Controller serial Controller serial number
number
Controller production Controller production date in the format YYMMDD
date
Controller layout level Controller layout level
Controller revision Controller revision level MS 00-25 hexadecimal
level (MS) code, e.g. "0x00000023". MS 00 = Bit0 (right Bit),
MS 01 = Bit1, .. , MS 25 = Bit25.
e.g. MS 00+01+05 = 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0010
Controller country of Country of origin of the controller, e.g. "DE" =
origin Deutschland
HARDWARE / Hardware and mechanical options
MECHANIC OPTION
Reject box Reject box type: "Terminal", "Cash", "TRU", "None",
"Unknown
Paper box (path 1/2) Paper tray available path 1/2: "Y" (=yes), "N" (=no)
Paper roll (path 1/2) Paper roll available path 1/2: "Y" (=yes), "N" (=no)
Shutter type Shutter type: "1", "2", "3", "None", "Unknown
The meaning is linked to the Add. transport ID, see
configuration table below.
Board version Controller board version (electrical ID)
GA release Gate array FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array)
ID
Interface USB data interface: "USB2.0"
2nd paper path 2nd paper path available: "Y" (=yes), "N" (=no)

Name Meaning
Add. transport ID Additional transport ID: "Terminal", "Cash Indoor",
"Cash Outdoor", "None", "Unknown
TRU Blackening unit available: "Y" (=yes), "N" (=no)
(TRU = Thermal Reject Unit)
Print unit Print unit ID: "Wide" (=wide print unit, up to 216 mm
(8.50") paper width), "Narrow" (=narrow print unit, up
to 175 mm (6.89") paper width), "None", "Unknown"
Thermal head ID ID of thermal array: "0x5C" (=SHEC), "0xB0" (=AOI)
Resolution (hor./vert.) Print resolution 300/300 pixels per inch
Chip device version Processor version: "Rev. A", "Rev. B"
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counters for printer lifetime
COUNTERS FOR
PRINTER LIFE
Drum open counter Number of times drum cover is open
Drum errors Number of errors in collecting tray (drum, clamp)
Mark errors Number of mark errors
Cutter errors Number of cutter errors, printing unit (thermal swivel
unit, thermal array)
Shutter errors Number of errors in the output tray
LS adjust errors Number of errors for automatic photosensor
adjustment conducted by the firmware.
Paper jam errors Number of transport errors in the document transport
Reject jam errors Number of transport errors in the drum reject path
Reject tray locked Number of errors for reject tray full
Output transport Number of errors in the output transport (cash
errors additional transport only)
Reject transport Number of errors in the retract-reject transport (cash
errors additional transport only)
Lift transport errors Number of errors in the swivel transport (cash
additional transport only)
Stacker transport Number of errors in the stacker wheel transport of
errors the active reject tray (for roll paper processing)
Power on hours Number of hours for which the device has been
switched on.
This value is set by the system software, from
LMTP20.DLL 2.0./07

Name Meaning
Transport meter Paper transport in meters over the entire lifetime
Dots total Total number of printed pixels
Page counter Page counter, number of cut documents
FW start cycles Number of printer start cycles (system starts, restarts
and voltage drops)
Presentations Number of printer operations (= number of
transactions)
Retracts Number of retract/reject processes
Voltage drop counter Number of voltage drops
Max. head Number of times the thermal array is classed as hot
temperature reached (above 65 Celsius (149 Fahrenheit))
Print head installation Number of thermal arrays installed.
counter The counter automatically counts up when a thermal
array replacement has been logged via the T/SOP.
Last print head Date of last thermal array replacement in the format
replacement YYMMDD: e.g. "101224" (=December, 24th 2010)
The date is automatically set when a thermal array
replacement has been logged via the T/SOP.
Last reset of error Date when error statistics were last reset in the
statistics format YYMMDD: e.g. "101224" (= December, 24th
2010)
The date is automatically set when the error
statistics are deleted via the T/SOP.
RC page counter Page counter, number of cut documents since the
last repair.
Last reset of RC Date when the page counter was last reset in the
page counter repair center in the format YYMMDD: e.g. "101224"
(= December, 24th 2010)
The date is automatically set when the RC page
counter is deleted via the T/SOP.
RESETABLE Resettable maintenance counter for field replaceable
MAINTENANCE parts
COUNTERS FOR These values are automatically reset when a thermal
REPLACED SPARE array replacement has been logged via the T/SOP to
PARTS the printer.
Dots per head Printed pixels of the current thermal array
Transport meter per Paper transport of the current thermal array in
head meters

Name Meaning
ACTUAL PRINTER Actual printer values
VALUES
Temperature of print Temperature of the thermal array in degrees Celsius
head and digital value of the AD converter (hexadecimal).
The firmware provides temperatures of 5 to 65
Celsius (41 to 149 Fahrenheit), which corresponds to
the control range of the thermal array. Temperatures
outside this value range are reported back as
minimum/maximum values. It is assumed that no
negative temperatures (use of heater in device) and
no temperatures above 65 degrees can occur. The
determined temperatures are subject to the
tolerances of the thermistor of up to 10%.
Form length (path Document length of the paper in path 1/2 in 1/180
1/2) inch, "0" (=format-free)
Used mark types Paper mark used for path 1/2: "Undef" (undefined),
(path 1/2) "No mark" (unmarked paper), "C" (mark C center),
"D", (mark D), "CL" (mark C available left in narrow
printing unit), "CR" (mark C available right in wide
printing unit)
Current value of LS Current value of alignment photosensor path 1/2:
adjust (path 1/2) 0xFF (=0mA) .. 0x48-0x00 (=48mA)
Adjustment of alignment photosensors if there is no
paper in the path. The photosensor of a paper path
in an inactive or empty state is disconnected from
the power supply (0xFF) to protect the photosensor
from deterioration. The measured value is always
displayed in the test printout.
Voltage value of used Entry not relevant, omitted in the future.
LS adjust
LS mark

Name Meaning
Current value of LS Adjusted current values of mark photosensors for
mark path 1/2: 0x00 (=0mA) .. 0xFF (=48mA)
Path 1 Transmit currents for mark photosensors of path 1/2,
Path 2 mark position left (D), center (C), center right (CR)
and left (CL), depending on the printing unit.
All mark photosensors are adjusted with each newly
submitted paper and after each transaction (white
adjustment). The measured value is therefore
dependent on the paper.
CONFIGURATION Configuration settings path 1/2
SETTINGS (PATH The following settings are implemented via the
1/2") Customizing software and the T/SOP. Further
information can be found in the manuals "Generation
and Tools" and "T/SOP".
Hor. pos. (ASCII) Horizontal first print position in ASCII text mode (in
1/180 inch), path 1/2.
This setting has no effect on printing in the GDI
graphics mode.
Paper grade Paper grade "0" .. "7", print quality optimized for
specific paper type
0= Default
6 = When using a blackening unit and WN paper
01750081601
Intensity mono Print intensity of black pixels "0" (= minimum) .. "7"
(= maximum)
Print speed mono Print speed for monochrome printing: "Opt" (print-
optimized), "Max" (speed-optimized)
Mark type Paper mark type for path 1/2: "Auto" (automatic
setting), "No mark" (unmarked paper), "C" (mark C
center), "D", (mark D), "CL" (mark C left in narrow
printing unit), "CR" (mark C right in wide printing unit)
Vert. pos. (ASCII) Vertical first print position in ASCII text mode (in
1/180 inch), path 1/2.
graphics mode.
Paper type Paper type: "Mono" (single color print), "Color" (dual
color print)
Intensity color Print intensity of colored pixels "0" (= minimum) .. "7"
(= maximum)

Test printout TP22 Forms Printer TP20/TP22
Name Meaning
Print speed color Print speed for color printing: "Opt" (print-optimized),
"Max" (speed-optimized)
Mark value Mark adjustment in 1/180 inch
Test printout TP22

Below is a sample of a test document printed by the thermal printing unit TP22
(not to scale):

Advanced test printout TP22

Name Meaning
Header $MOD$ IDs Page header and $MOD$ IDs
TP22APGA.PGA $MOD$ ID of the loadable PGA (content of the
TP22ALDR.FRM programmable gate array)
TP22_437.FNT $MOD$ ID of the loadable loader
TP22ASTD.MOD $MOD$ ID of the loadable font
TP22ABST.BST $MOD$ ID of the loadable firmware
$MOD$ ID of the bootstrap
FACTORY SETTINGS Default settings
Printer name Printer designation
Printer material number Printer material number
Printer serial number Printer serial number
Printer production date Printer production date in the format YYMMDD
Printer revision level Printer revision level MS 00-25 hexadecimal code,
(MS) e.g. "0x00000023". MS 00 = Bit0 (right Bit), MS 01 =
Bit1, .. , MS 25 = Bit25.
e.g. MS 00+01+05 = 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0010
Printer country of origin Country of origin of the printer, e.g. "DE" =
Deutschland
Print unit material Material number of the thermal array service set
number (two thermal arrays).
Adjustment horizontal Factory setting for horizontal mechanical adjustment
(path 1/2) values, separated according to paper path 1/2.
Specification in 1/180 inch.
Adjustment vertical Factory setting for vertical mechanical adjustment
[1/180"] values, separated according to paper path 1/2 and
Path 1 paper marks D, C, CL (only available in the narrow
Path 2 printing unit) and CR (only available in the wide
printing unit). Specification in 1/180 inch.
Adjustment horizontal 2 Factory setting of horizontal mechanical adjustment
values for rear printing. Specification in 1/180 inch.
Adjustment vertical 2 Factory setting of vertical mechanical adjustment
values for rear printing. Specification in 1/180 inch.
System serial number System serial number

Name Meaning
CONTROLLER Controller settings
SETTINGS
Controller material Controller material number
number
Controller serial number Controller serial number
Controller production Controller production date in the format YYMMDD
date
Controller layout level Controller layout level
Controller revision level Controller revision level MS 00-25 hexadecimal
(MS) code, e.g. "0x00000023". MS 00 = Bit0 (right Bit),
MS 01 = Bit1, .. , MS 25 = Bit25.
e.g. MS 00+01+05 = 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0010
Controller country of Country of origin of the controller, e.g. "DE" =
origin Deutschland
HARDWARE / Hardware and mechanical options
MECHANIC OPTION
Reject box Reject box type: "Terminal", "Cash", "TRU", "None",
"Unknown
Paper box (path 1/2) Paper tray available path 1/2: "Y" (=yes), "N" (=no)
Paper roll (path 1/2) Paper roll available path 1/2: "Y" (=yes), "N" (=no)
Shutter type Shutter type: "1", "2", "3", "None", "Unknown
The meaning is linked to the Add. transport ID, see
configuration table below.
Board version Controller board version (electrical ID)
GA release Gate array FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array)
ID
Interface USB data interface: "USB2.0"
2nd paper path 2nd paper path available: "Y" (=yes), "N" (=no)
Add. transport ID Additional transport ID: "Terminal", "Cash Indoor",
"Cash Outdoor", "None", "Unknown
TRU Blackening unit available: "Y" (=yes), "N" (=no)
(TRU = Thermal Reject Unit)
Print unit Print unit ID: "Wide" (=wide print unit, up to 216 mm
(8.50") paper width), "Narrow" (=narrow print unit, up
to 175 mm (6.89") paper width), "None", "Unknown"
Thermal head ID ID of the thermal array: "0x26" (=SHEC)

Name Meaning
Thermal head 2 ID ID of the 2nd thermal array (rear print): "0x26"
(=SHEC)
Resolution (hor./vert.) Print resolution 300/300 pixels per inch
Chip device version Processor version: "Rev. A", "Rev. B"
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counters for printer lifetime
COUNTERS FOR
PRINTER LIFE
Drum open counter Number of times drum cover is open
Drum errors Number of errors in collecting tray (drum, clamp)
Mark errors Number of mark errors
Cutter errors Number of cutter errors, printing unit (thermal swivel
unit, thermal array)
Shutter errors Number of errors in the output tray
LS adjust errors Number of errors for automatic photosensor
adjustment conducted by the firmware.
Paper jam errors Number of transport errors in the document
transport
Reject jam errors Number of transport errors in the drum reject path
Reject tray locked Number of errors for reject tray full
Output transport errors Number of errors in the output transport (cash
Reject transport errors Number of errors in the retract-reject transport (cash
Lift transport errors Number of errors in the swivel transport (cash
Stacker transport errors Number of errors in the stacker wheel transport of
the active reject tray (for roll paper processing)
Power on hours Number of hours for which the device has been
switched on.
This value is set by the system software, from
LMTP20.DLL 2.0./07
Transport meter Paper transport in meters over the entire lifetime
Dots total Total number of printed pixels
Dots head 2 total Total number of printed pixels of the 2nd thermal
array (rear print).
Page counter Page counter, number of cut documents

Name Meaning
FW start cycles Number of printer start cycles (system starts,
restarts and voltage drops)
Presentations Number of printer operations (= number of
transactions)
Retracts Number of retract/reject processes
Voltage drop counter Number of voltage drops
Max. head temperature Number of times the thermal array is classed as hot
reached (above 65 Celsius (149 Fahrenheit))
Max. head 2 Number of times thermal array 2 is classed as hot
temperature reached (above 65 Celsius (149 Fahrenheit))
Print head installation Number of thermal arrays installed.
counter The counter automatically counts up when a thermal
array replacement has been logged via the T/SOP.
Last print head Date of last thermal array replacement in the format
replacement YYMMDD: e.g. "101224" (=December, 24th 2010)
The date is automatically set when a thermal array
replacement has been logged via the T/SOP.
Last reset of error Date when error statistics were last reset in the
statistics format YYMMDD: e.g. "101224" (= December, 24th
2010)
The date is automatically set when the error
statistics are deleted via the T/SOP.
RC page counter Page counter, number of cut documents since the
last repair.
Last reset of RC page Date when the page counter was last reset in the
counter repair center in the format YYMMDD: e.g. "101224"
(= December, 24th 2010)
The date is automatically set when the RC page
counter is deleted via the T/SOP.
RESETABLE Resettable maintenance counter for field
MAINTENANCE replaceable parts
COUNTERS FOR These values are automatically reset when a
REPLACED SPARE thermal array replacement has been logged via the
PARTS T/SOP to the printer.
Dots per head Printed pixels of the current thermal array
Dots per head 2 Printed pixels of the current thermal array 2 (rear
print)

Name Meaning
Transport meter per Paper transport of the current thermal arrays in
head meters
ACTUAL PRINTER Actual printer values
VALUES
Temperature of print Temperature of the thermal array in degrees Celsius
head and digital value of the AD converter (hexadecimal).
Celsius (41 to 149 Fahrenheit), which corresponds
to the control range of the thermal array.
Temperatures outside this value range are reported
back as minimum/maximum values. It is assumed
that no negative temperatures (use of heater in
device) and no temperatures above 65 degrees can
occur. The determined temperatures are subject to
the tolerances of the thermistor of up to 10%.
Temperature of print Temperature of thermal array 2 (rear print) in
head 2 degrees Celsius and digital value of the AD
converter (hexadecimal).
Celsius (41 to 149 Fahrenheit), which corresponds
to the control range of the thermal array.
Temperatures outside this value range are reported
back as minimum/maximum values. It is assumed
that no negative temperatures (use of heater in
device) and no temperatures above 65 degrees can
occur. The determined temperatures are subject to
the tolerances of the thermistor of up to 10%.
Form length (path 1/2) Document length of the paper in path 1/2 in 1/180
inch, "0" (=format-free)
Used mark types (path Paper mark used for path 1/2: "Undef" (undefined),
1/2) "No mark" (unmarked paper), "C" (mark C center),
"D", (mark D), "CL" (mark C available left in narrow
printing unit), "CR" (mark C available right in wide
printing unit)

Name Meaning
Current value of LS Current value of alignment photosensor path 1/2:
adjust (path 1/2) 0xFF (=0mA) .. 0x48-0x00 (=48mA)
Adjustment of alignment photosensors if there is no
paper in the path. The photosensor of a paper path
in an inactive or empty state is disconnected from
the power supply (0xFF) to protect the photosensor
from deterioration. The measured value is always
displayed in the test printout.
LS adjust
LS mark
Current value of LS Adjusted current values of mark photosensors for
mark path 1/2: 0x00 (=0mA) .. 0xFF (=48mA)
Path 1 Transmit currents for mark photosensors of path 1/2,
Path 2 mark position left (D), center (C), center right (CR)
and left (CL), depending on the printing unit.
All mark photosensors are adjusted with each newly
submitted paper and after each transaction (white
adjustment). The measured value is therefore
dependent on the paper.
CONFIGURATION Configuration settings path 1/2
SETTINGS (PATH 1/2") The following settings are implemented via the
Customizing software and the T/SOP. Further
information can be found in the manuals
"Generation and Tools" and "T/SOP".
Hor. pos. (ASCII) Horizontal first print position in ASCII text mode (in
1/180 inch), path 1/2.
graphics mode.
Paper width Paper width in 1/180 inch, path 1/2.
Paper grade Paper grade "0" .. "7", print quality optimized for
specific paper type
0= Default
6 = When using a blackening unit and WN paper
01750081601
Intensity mono Print intensity of black pixels "0" (= minimum) .. "7"
(= maximum)

Name Meaning
Print speed mono Print speed for monochrome printing: "Opt" (print-
optimized), "Max" (speed-optimized)
Mark type Paper mark type for path 1/2: "Auto" (automatic
setting), "No mark" (unmarked paper), "C" (mark C
center), "D", (mark D), "CL" (mark C left in narrow
printing unit), "CR" (mark C right in wide printing
unit)
Hor. pos. 2 (ASCII) Horizontal first print position on the rear in ASCII text
mode (in 1/180 inch), path 1/2.
graphics mode.
Vert. pos. (ASCII) Vertical first print position in ASCII text mode (in
1/180 inch), path 1/2.
graphics mode.
Paper type Paper type: "Mono" (single color print), "Color" (dual
color print), "Mono2" (single color, double-sided
print), "Color2" (dual color, double-sided print)
Page swapping Page swap: "N" (no page swap between front and
rear), "Y" (page swap between front and rear).
Intensity color Print intensity of colored pixels "0" (= minimum) .. "7"
(= maximum)
Print speed color Print speed for color printing: "Opt" (print-optimized),
"Max" (speed-optimized)
Mark value Mark adjustment in 1/180 inch

Tables with error messages Forms Printer TP20/TP22
Tables with error messages

Status information, warnings and error messages are displayed on the 7-
segment indicator of the printer. When error messages are displayed, the
7-segment indicator flashes.
This section contains an overview of possible error messages.
Reactions in the event of an error

Warnings are displayed on the status indicator by a permanently lit message
(i.e. without flashing) and do not affect operation. Errors that have caused the
current operation to be aborted are indicated by means of a flashing display.
If several errors occur, the last error situation is displayed. Once the cause of
the error has been eliminated, the error message can be cleared by pressing
either the TEST or the EJECT keys.
In case of error messages referring to the printing unit, the printing unit may be
initialized after a key is pressed.
Messages, warnings and error messages of the

printer
Messages at the beginning

Code Status Meaning
on All of the LEDs on the two 7-segment displays are
activated briefly when starting the printer (LED test).
on Power-up test active. The end of the power-up test is
indicated by the right-hand decimal point flashing briefly.
on Extended Power Up Test after the pressing of the TEST
button during the start up
on Printer is ready for operation

Forms Printer TP20/TP22 Tables with error messages
Warning messages
Code Status Meaning Explanation/action
on Reject tray early warning limit Empty the reject tray.
reached
on Thermal array is hot Check the ambient
conditions /
temperature and
reduce the
temperature if
necessary (e.g.
prevent direct
sunlight).
Error messages
flashing End of paper or paper jam in feed Remove the scraps of
1 paper and load a new
stack.
flashing End of paper or paper jam in feed Remove the scraps of
2 paper and load a new
stack.
flashing Reject tray blocked Empty the reject tray.
flashing Paper mark not recognized Paper has been

inserted incorrectly,
incorrect paper has
been used or the mark
is missing.
Re-insert the paper
and conduct a test
print.
flashing Document transport error (paper Eliminate paper jam.
jam in the feed channel)


flashing Reset/cutter error or an incorrect, Remove any scraps of
non-defined thermal array paper, check to make
detected (unknown head ID) sure that the cutter
module moves freely,
if necessary download
the new firmware (in
the head ID is
unknown)
flashing Drum cover is open or there is a Check the printer
reset error for the printer drum drum. Remove left-
(collecting tray) over paper and
documents. Check
whether the printer
drum is open.
flashing Paper jam reject tray / blackening Check the transition
unit from the printer drum
(collecting tray) to the
reject tray and
blackening unit.
flashing Reset error for shutter or Check whether the
shutter (document output) does shutter has been
not open tampered with.
flashing Hardware error in the printer Please contact the
controller service department. A
detailed error code can
be displayed by
pressing the TEST
button.
flashing Software error in the printer Please contact the
controller service department.
flashing External light when synchronizing Check whether the
the photosensors thermal array and
swivel unit are
mounted properly and
securely locked in
place. Check to see if
the photosensors are
dirty. Eliminate any
intense external light.

Forms Printer TP20/TP22 Tables with error messages

flashing Output slot busy Check the removal
tray. If it is not
occupied, a software
error has occurred.
Please notify your
system administrator.
flashing Printer drum (collecting tray) full / There is a system
incorrect software control by the error. Please notify
printer channel / paper web 2 not your system
present / interruption of graphics administrator.
transmission (transmission time-
out) / graphic data: Syntax,
parameter error
flashing Thermal array overheats (65 C) / Check the ambient
not operational. Abort the conditions /
transaction if necessary. temperature and
reduce the
temperature if
necessary (e.g.
prevent direct
sunlight).
flashing Paper jam in the output transport Eliminate paper jam.
area *
flashing Paper jam in the reject transport Eliminate paper jam.
area *
flashing Reset error for swivel transport Check the swivel
unit * transport unit and
eliminate the paper
jam.
* Error only occurs for cash devices

Loader messages
Code Meaning
Firmware and character generator (font) loaded, loader active
Character generator (font) loaded, firmware missing
Firmware loaded, character generator (font) missing
No firmware, no character generator (font) loaded
PGA file not loaded
Firmware is downloading, afterwards displaying of the loading

progress
Character generator (font) is downloading, afterwards displaying of
the loading progress
New loader is downloading, afterwards displaying of the loading
progress
FPGA is downloading again, afterwards displaying of the loading
progress
Loading progress in percent of the loading data bytes
until
New loader is reloaded (from the front area to the final loader
address)
Programming time-out
Programming error
Transmission error
Flash error
Data length error
Data error buffer overflow
Firmware error

Forms Printer TP20/TP22 Load function (printer)
Load function (printer)

The TP20/TP22 can be loaded with new firmware versions and other character
sets. Data may be transferred for the following reasons:
initial operation (production),
installation of a new printing unit (e.g. for service purposes),
loading a country-specific character generator,
loading new firmware.
i Loader files are supplied by the manufacturer. They cannot be

generated by the user.
The loading procedure is conducted automatically upon system start
or manually via the T/SOP.
TP20
File Comment
Loadable microcode:
TP20ASTD.MOD
TP20ALDR.FRM Loader
After the loader has loaded the character generator has
to be downloaded again.
TP20APGA.PGA PGA
Loadable character set:
TP20_437.FNT Standard code page 437 standard
TP20EURO:FNT code page ISO 8859/15 west Europe
TP20R437.FNT code page 437 with Euro at 0x9F, @ at 0x15, at 0x40
(0x = hexadecimal)
TP201252.FNT code page 1252 west and northern Europe

Features of thermal printing unit Forms Printer TP20/TP22
TP22
File Comment
Loadable microcode:
TP22ASTD.MOD
TP22ALDR.FRM Loader
After the loader has loaded the character generator has
to be downloaded again.
TP22APGA.PGA PGA
Loadable character set:
TP22_437.FNT Standard code page 437 standard
Features of thermal printing unit

Automatic identification of form length 4" 12"
Resolution: 300*300 dpi
Thermal printing unit with 2688 dots
Multi-level history control
USB port
Printing speed max. 100 mm/s (3.94"/s) for monochrome printing and max.
50 mm/s (1.99"/s) for color printing
2000 sheet supply (max. 12.5" fold length, max. form length 12")
Paper width: 148 175 mm (5.83" - 6.89") (TP20 narrow) or 175 216 mm
(6.89" - 8.50") (TP20 wide)
Optional second paper path
Optional weekend sensor and stack end sensor
Reject tray

Forms Printer TP20/TP22 Control logic
Collecting function
Printer drum capacity (collecting
tray): max. 10 documents of the same length
Retract/reject function
The printer can collect any documents that have not been removed as well as
documents from aborted print jobs in a reject box.
i For reasons of data protection, it must be possible for documents that

have not been removed from the output slot to be transported to the
reject tray. The capacity of the reject tray is system-dependent.
Control logic
Technical Data
TP20 electronics
Printing unit version TP20

Part no. Controller 01750148356
Microprocessor ATMEL AT91SAM7SE32
Memory 4 MB RAM
FLASH memory 4 MB
External memory (on 2 kB FRAM
the print module)
FPGA XILINX XC3SE500

Control logic Forms Printer TP20/TP22
TP22 electronics
Printing unit version TP22

Part no. Controller 01750204783
Microprocessor ATMEL AT91SAM7SE32
Memory 4 MB RAM
FLASH memory 4 MB
External memory (on 2 kB FRAM
the print module)
FPGA 2 x XILINX XC3SE500
Print buffer 16 MB PSRAM
Interface to system unit
Physical: USB standard 2.0 - full speed

Application interface: 1. Microsoft Windows GDI (Graphics Device
Interface) graphics printing (graphics mode)
2. Epson ESC/P emulation (ASCII-Mode) with
TP20/TP22 additional commands
Interface to printer mechanism
Actuators and sensors are connected directly.
Power supply
Power supply: + 24 V
Resident printer character generators
Roman, Sans Serif, DQ in 13 country versions each, 10, 12, 15 cpi, OCR A,
OCR B

Control logic connector arrangement TP20
1 Sensors for drum/reject 14 Paper tray paper level

2 NVRAM indicator
3 Mark sensors 15 TRU
4 Signals thermal array 16 Power supply
5 Motor roller 17 Control panel
6 Motor path 1 left 18 Motor path 2 right
8 Sensors path 1 and sensor 20 Motor lift
alignment path 2 21 Motor drum
9 Sensors path 2 22 Sensor lift
10 Sensor alignment path 1 23 Thermal array voltage
11 Transport shutter 24 Motor measurer
12 Reject trays 25 Motor clamp
13 USB

Control logic connector arrangement TP22
1 Sensors for drum/reject 16 Power supply unit thermal

2 NVRAM array bottom
3 Mark sensors 17 Power supply unit thermal
4 Signal thermal array top array top + motors
5 Signal thermal array bottom 18 Control panel
6 Motor roller 19 Motor path 2 right
8 Motor path 2 left 21 Motor lift top
9 Sensors path 1 and sensor 22 Motor drum
alignment path 2 23 Motor lift bottom
10 Sensors path 2 24 Sensor lift top
11 Sensor alignment path 1 25 Sensor lift bottom
12 Transport shutter 26 Voltage thermal array top
13 Reject trays 27 Voltage thermal array bottom
14 USB 28 Motor measurer
15 Paper tray paper level 29 Motor clamp
indicator

TP20 sensors
1 LS-PATH 1 Sensor for paper start/end path 1

2 ALIGN 1 Sensor paper alignment path 1
5 HP DRUM Sensor home position drum
6 RPATHFREE Sensor reject path free
7 RC EMPTY Sensor reject compartment empty
8 TRO-ABD L Sensor drum cover L
9 TRO-ABD R Sensor drum cover R
10 HP-SHU Sensor shutter home position
11 HP-CLA Sensor clamp home position
12 HP-BL L Sensor position blade left
13 HP-BL R Sensor position blade right
14 HP-MARK D Sensor mark D (WN)
15 HP-MARK CL Sensor mark C (NCR)
16 HP-MARK C Sensor mark C (NCR)
17 HP-MARK CR Sensor mark C (NCR)
18 HP-LIFT Sensor thermal array lift home position

TP22 sensors

5 HP DRUM Sensor home position drum
6 RPATHFREE Sensor reject path free
7 RC EMPTY Sensor reject compartment empty
8 TRO-ABD L Sensor drum cover L
9 TRO-ABD R Sensor drum cover R
10 HP-SHU Sensor shutter home position
11 HP-CLA Sensor clamp home position
12 HP-BL L Sensor position blade left
13 HP-BL R Sensor position blade right
14 HP-MARK D Sensor mark D (WN)
15 HP-MARK CL Sensor mark C (NCR)
16 HP-MARK C Sensor mark C (NCR)
17 HP-MARK CR Sensor mark C (NCR)
18 HP-LIFT TOP Sensor thermal array lift home position, top
19 HP-LIFT BOT Sensor thermal array lift home position, bottom

Forms Printer TP20/TP22 Paper specification
Paper specification
For more detailed information please refer to the paper specifications below:
Paper specifications TP20/TP22
Language Order Number

German 01750178191
English 01750204650
French 01750204651

Paper specification Forms Printer TP20/TP22

Intermediate transport TP20 Functions
Intermediate transport TP20

This chapter provides information on the function of the components as well as
on their sensors and motors.
Functions
The following block diagrams show the connections between the individual
components.
Retract transport
There are two ways to transport documents to the retract tray.
1. Documents that are still entirely on the drum are transported to the retract
compartment via the retract path of the printer and then via the retract
transport of the support frame.
2. a. Short document 4" and 4 1/6" long, which are in the removal position for
the customer and because of this out of the drum area, are transported
from underneath the printing unit directly into the retract compartment.
b. Documents 8" and 12" long, the removal position for the customer and
because of this still in the drum area, are transported out of the drum and
by swerving the output transport, they are transported directly into the
retract compartment.
Output (eject) transport

The presenter takes the documents from the drum and transports then to the
output slot. If the documents are not removed, the documents are retracted
after a predefined period of time and transported to the retract compartment.

Functions Intermediate transport TP20
Shutter
A shutter that closes and opens the output slot, has been integrated in the
front part of the support frame
Shutter TP20 assy. 01750179819
This sub-assembly is adapted mechanically to the support frame with 4
Plastite screws and connected to the presenter via a toothed wheel.
Electronics/sensors
The entire sub-assembly has its own electronics that control the motors and
the sensors. A cable connects it to the controller of the TP20 form printer.
There is only one electronic assembly for cash indoor and cash outdoor.
A cable code (coding plug at the sensor cable S07 of the retract transport)
recognizes whether a cash indoor or a cash outdoor system is in place.

Intermediate transport TP20 Motors and sensors
Motors and sensors
Position of the motors and sensors
Motors
M01 Shutter drive system (SHU_SM)
M02 Output transport drive system (OUT_SM)
M03 Lifting transport (LIF_SM)
M04 Rejecter drive system (REJ_SM)
Photo sensors
S01 Document removal (SHU_LEER_C)
S02 Shutter home position (GS_SHU_C)
S03 Cash presenter start free (AT_START_FREI)
S04 Presenter end free (AT_ENDE_FREI)
S05 Upper transport (LIFT_AT)
S06 Bottom transport (LIFT_RT)
S07 Reject path free (RWEGFREI_C)
S08 Reject tray empty (RF_LEER_C)
S09 Document motion (BEL_TAKT)

Motors and sensors Intermediate transport TP20
Shutter
1 Document removal photo sensor

2 Shutter home position photo sensor

Output transport
1 Output transport motor

2 Handle for the upper eject guide
3 Escrow tilt unit motor
4 Shutter motor
5 Knob

Reject transport unit
Reject transport indoor
1 Guide plate grip 4 assy.

2 Reject transport unit motor

Reject transport outdoor
1 Guide plate grip 4 assy.


Sensors
Motor M1 closure (shutter motor)
The shutter's working position "Open" and "Closed" are controlled via a timing
disk in combination with a hybrid photo sensor.
Motor M2 output transport (eject transport):
The drive system is controlled via 2 pairs of transmissive sensors LS3 and
LS4.
Document removal by the customer is detected by motion detector LS9 and
supported by motor M2 (applies only for documents which are bigger than 4
1/6").
The motion detector itself is a sub-assembly that basically consists of a hybrid
photo sensor and a stepping wheel.
Motor M3 - Swerve transport (eject up/down)
The upward and downward movement of the eject transport is controlled by

two hybrid photo sensors LS5 and LS6.
Motor M4 Retract transport
The status query - "retract path free" takes place via transmissive sensor
(LS7).

Intermediate transport TP20 Electronics
Electronics
Pin assignment
1 TP20 controller (controlling output transport and reject transport)

3 Reject transport sensors
4 Output transport sensors
5 Shutter sensors
6 Output transport motor
7 Shutter motor
8 Swivel transport motor

Electronics Intermediate transport TP20

Passbook module PUxx
A special service manual is available for the passbook module. This service
manual can be ordered from our print partner and is also available in the
intranet.
Language Order number

German 01750199881
English 01750202427

Passbook module PUxx

Reiner scanner
A service manual is available for the Reiner scanner. This service manual can
be ordered from our print partner and is also available in the intranet.

German 01750188310
English 01750202422

Reiner scanner

Barcode Reader 2D BR 02
2D Barcode Scanner MS4407 USB 01750137190

Important safety precautions Barcode Reader 2D BR 02
1 LED indicator 2 USB port

Barcode Reader 2D BR 02 Important safety precautions

Do not look straight into the laser beam (also see the warning sign: "Laser
beam - Do not look into the beam, Laser class 2")
Note that inside the laser the output power can amount to 1 mW.
Using optical devices, e.g. binoculars, microscopes and magnifying
glasses, while looking at the laser can cause considerable damage to your
eyes.
Information about the laser system
The barcode reader meets the following safety requirements:

IEC 60825 / EN 60825 for a class 2 laser product
US 21CFR1040 for a class 2 laser product
Description
The barcode reader contains an image sensor, who transfers digizised images
to an integrated decoder. This decoded data or image data can be transmitted.
The compact barcode reader is operated via a USB port on the system unit
(PC). This is realized with a 9pol Dsub connection at the Barcode reader. The
reader is activated by means of the application software.
The barcode reader integrated in our products, is always delivered with the
default settings (see section "Default settings").
The operating parameters and the barcodes to be evaluated can be changed
by control sequences or by scanning barcode sequences. For more
information please refer the manufacturer's "Integration Guide".

Description Barcode Reader 2D BR 02
The ready status and a successful reading operation are indicated by an LED.
MM Meaning
Red LED The barcode reader is ready.
Green LED The scanned barcode was recognized.
In Snapshot mode ist blinking in one
second clock.
The reader is integrated in all devices in such a way that the barcode can be
scanned.
The read area of the barcode reader is projected during the insertion of a
document with a laser diode and a diffractive optical element (DOE). A cross
line marks the middle of the read area. The barcode must be in this read area.
'

Barcode Reader 2D BR 02 Description
As an example, the Datamatrix barcode is displayed in the projected read

area. The direction of the barcode is arbitrary in the read area.

Connecting the barcode reader Barcode Reader 2D BR 02
Connecting the barcode reader

Pin assignment
DSUB, 9-pin M
Pin Signal
1 Trigger Starts a scan operation
2 nc
3 + Data USB
4 Connected with pin 8
5 GND
6 + 5.0 V + 10 %
7 - Data USB
8 Connected with pin 4
9 Beeper / Starts an external beeper / Starts a parameter
Download download

Barcode Reader 2D BR 02 Factory defaults
Factory defaults
The parameters are described in greater detail in the manufacturer's
"Integration Guide".
Programming
The default setting of the barcode reader can be changed in two different
ways:
The barcode reader is programmed by scanning certain barcodes. The
respective barcodes are listed in the manufacturer's "Integration Guide".
The parameters of the barcode reader are set via the programming
interface (Simple Serial Interface of the manufacturer) and loaded via the
USB interface.For a detailed description please refer to the manufacturer's
"Programmer's Guide".
The following parameters can be programmed:

Barcode reader function parameters
Communications parameters
Decoding parameters

Faults Barcode Reader 2D BR 02
Faults
Problem Cause / troubleshooting
The barcode reader is The glass of the barcode reader is dirty.
switched on but the barcode is
Clean the screen with a wet soft cloth.
not scanned.
The LED is red.
The selected barcode is not enabled in the
default setting or not implemented in the
application software.
The presented barcode does not match the
specification.
The barcode is damaged.
Test
The files SNAPIapp.exe and SNAPI.dll must be used for the test. They are in
the archiv MS4407.ZIP. This ZIP file is in the Intranet under
http://intranet.wincor-
nixdorf.com/cms/Products/Service/Software/Banking_Software/Testprograms/
Misc_Tools.
Only use for this test barcodes which are enabled by the customer.

Barcode Reader 2D BR 02 Technical data
Technical data
Parameters Specification
Input voltage + 5 V DC 10 %
Rated current max. 265 mA
consumption:
Interface USB 1.1
Optical characteristics
Light source for image sensor

Light source LED visible light (635 nm)
Laser power 0.9 mW 0.1 mW
Projection (DOE)
Light source Visible laser light (650 nm)
Laser power 0.7 mW max

Technical data Barcode Reader 2D BR 02
Image sensor
Optical resolution 640x480 Pixel
Image format BMP, TIFF, JPEG
Effect of light from an
external source 9,000 ft. candles (96.9 lux)
Sunlight
Angle of inclination 60 o
Angle of rotation 360 o
lateral angle of inclination 50 o
Physical characteristics
Weight 0.051 kg
Dimensions (W x L x H) 48 x 59 x 25 mm
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -20 to +50 C (-4 F to +122 F)
Storage temperature - 40 to + 70 C (- 40 to + 158 F)
Relative humidity 0 to 95 % (non-condensing)
(operation)
Relative humidity (storage) 0 to 85 % (non-condensing)
Safety standards
Laser safety IEC 60825 / EN 60825 Class 2
US 21CFR 1040 Class 2
CDRH Class II

Barcode Reader 2D BR 02 Technical data
Decoding
1D Barcode EAN / UPC *
Bookland EAN
UCC Coupon Code
ISSN EAN
Code 128 *
GS1-128
ISBT 128
Trioptic Code 39
Code 39 *
Code 93
Code 11
Interleaved 2/5 *
Discrete 2/5
Codabar
MSI Plessy
Chinese 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
Inverse 1D
GS1 Databar *
Composite Codes
MSI Plessey
2D Barcode PDF 417 *

MicroPDF417
Data Matrix *
Data Matrix Inverse
Maxicode *
QR Code *
MicroQR *
QR Inverse
Aztec *
Aztec Inverse

Technical data Barcode Reader 2D BR 02
Postal Codes US Postnet *
US Planet *
UK Postal *
Japan Postal *
Australian Postal *
Netherlands KIX Code *
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
UPU FICS Postal
With * marked codes are swichted at the factory.

2D barcode reader ED40
Barcode scanner 2D USB ED40 Intermec 01750248733

Overview 2D barcode reader ED40
Overview
1 USB port

2D barcode reader ED40 Description
Description
The ED40 2D barcode reader can be used to read barcodes which are located
on all kinds of documents.
The barcode reader features an image sensor which transmits digitalized
images to an integrated decoder. This decoded data or image data can be
transmitted.
During the insertion of a document, the read section of the barcode reader is
projected to the work surface with a red LED and a diffractive optical element
(DOE). The center of the read section is marked by crosshairs. The barcode
must be positioned in this reading area.

Technical Data 2D barcode reader ED40
Technical Data
Parameters Specifications
Input voltage via USB
Rated current 215 mA max.
consumption:
INTERFACE USB 2.0
Optical characteristics
Light source for the image sensor

Light source Visible LED light (617 nm)
Projection (DOE)
Light source Visible laser light (650 nm)
Image sensor
Optical resolution 1280x800 pixels
Image format BMP, TIFF, JPEG
Effect of light from an 9,000 ft. candles (96.9 lux)
external source
Sunlight

2D barcode reader ED40 Technical Data
Physical characteristics
Weight 0.010 kg
Dimensions (W x L x H) 34 mm x 19 mm x 6.15 mm
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -20o to + 60 C
Storage temperature -30o to + 70 C
Humidity (operation) 0 to 95 % (non-condensing)
Relative humidity (storage) 0 to 85 % (non-condensing)
Safety standards
Laser safety IEC 60825 / EN 60825 Class 1
US 21CFR 1040 Class 1
CDRH Class II
Malfunctions
Problem Cause / troubleshooting
The barcode reader is The glass of the barcode reader is dirty.
switched on but the barcode is
not scanned. Clean the glass with a moist, soft cloth.
The LED is red.
The selected barcode is not enabled in the
factory setting or not implemented in the
user software.
The presented barcode does not match the
specification.
The barcode is damaged.

Technical Data 2D barcode reader ED40
Decoding
1D Barcode EAN/UPC
GS1 Databar
RSS,
Code 39,
Code 128, UCC,
EAN 128,
ISBN,
ISB,
Interleaved/Matrix/Industrial and Standard 2 of 5,
Codabar,
Code 93/93I,
Code 11;
MSI,
Plessey,
Telepen,
Postal codes (Australian Post)
BPO,
Canada Post,
Dutch Post,
Japan Post,
PostNet,
Sweden Post,
2D Barcode Data Matrix, PDF417,
Micro PDF 417,
Codablock, Maxicode,
QR,
Aztec GS1 composite codes

Cash Media Dispenser (CMD-V4)
There is a separate service manual available for the cash media dispenser
(CMD-V4). The manual can be ordered from our printing partner. It is also
available in the intranet.
Order number of English edition: 01750060162

Cash Media Dispenser (CMD-V4)

Cash media dispenser (CMD-V5)
A special service manual is available for the Cash Media Dispenser (CMD V5).
This service manual can be ordered from our print partner and is also available
in the intranet.

German 01750214537
English 01750214538

Cash media dispenser (CMD-V5)

Shutter CMD horizontal
Shutter CMD V4 horizontal RL 01750053690
Shutter CMD V4 horizontal FL 01750056960
Shutter horiz. 8x CMD RL 01750166395
Shutter horiz. 8x CMD FL 01750166396
Shutter horiz. VBK 8x CMD RL 01750187300
Shutter_CMD_V4_horiz._RL_VBK 01750192728
Shutter_CMD-V4_horiz._FL_VBK 01750193245

Installation Shutter CMD horizontal
Installation
The shutter closes the cash output area of the Cash Media Dispenser (CMD)
component and consists of the following components:
Shutter flap
Drive mechanism with DC motor, gear mechanism and interlock
mechanism
1 photo sensor for the provisioning of a note bundle to the output
1 photo sensor for the monitoring of the money withdrawal
Connector board with two hybrid photo sensors to control of the shutter flap
Both versions (Frontload and Rearload) differ only in the so called 'ramp' in the
cash path and in the position of the photo sensors PS 27 and PS 28.

Shutter CMD horizontal Views
Views
CMD-V4 shutter
Rearload version view
Frontload version view
1 Ramp 3 Prism for the PS 28

2 Prism for the PS 27

Views Shutter CMD horizontal
i The structure of the shutter is shown with the Rearload version as an

example. The shutter structure is exactly the same in the Frontload
version.
1 Electronics board 6 Gear mechanism cover

2 Connection plug 7 Prism for the PS 27
3 Motor connection (-) 8 Prism for the PS 28
4 Motor connection (+) 9 Shutter flap
5 DC motor

1 Moving and latching mechanism 5 Motor connection (-)

(left) 6 Motor connection (+)
2 Switching flag for DPS 11 7 Hybrid photosensor DPS 10
3 Switching flag for DPS 10 8 Hybrid photosensor DPS 11
4 Drive shaft for shutter flap

Views Shutter CMD horizontal
CMD-V5 shutter
Rearload version view

i The structure of the shutter is shown with the Rearload version as an

example. The shutter structure is exactly the same in the Frontload
version.
1 Electronics board 5 Gear mechanism cover

2 Connection plug 6 Prism for the PS 27
3 Motor connection 7 Prism for the PS 28
4 DC motor 8 Shutter flap

Function Shutter CMD horizontal
Function
The shutter is controlled by the firmware of the CMD-V4/V5 controller and is
triggered by the application software.
Control data
CMD-V4/V5 Control cable
Shutter
controller
Voltage
The firmware evaluates the signals of the photo sensors PS 27 and PS 28 as

well as the hybrid photosensors DPS 10 and DPS 11 and controls the motor.
Photo sensor Function
PS 27 Monitoring the banknote removal
PS 28 Clamp stop position to the banknote removal area
DPS 10 / DPS 11 Position of the drive shaft for the shutter flap
i The designation of the photosensor and the electronic signal are

different (see the table in the section "Pin assignment").
The motor-driven shaft has a driving cam on the left and on the right side.
They are constructed in such a way that the shutter is locked by the catches
on the shutter flap bearings when the shutter is closed.
Shutter and drive mechanism are not directly connected.
When the driving cams turn, the shutter is forced open.
To close the shutter, the cam shaft turns the driving cams back but it is the
spring that actually closes the shutter flap.
The latching mechanism of the shutter flap can only be performed if the flap is
completely close beforehand.
This construction excludes the risk of injury for the user.

Shutter CMD horizontal Function
Banknote removal area CMD-V4

If the application triggers the command to dispense the banknotes, the shutter
slap opens completely at first via the firmware. After the transportation of the
banknotes into the removal position, the shutter flap closes slightly depending
on the thickness of the banknote bundle. The thickness of the banknote
bundle is evaluated by the thickness measurement in the CMD. The evaluated
value functions as a temporary control of the drive motor.
After the withdrawal of the banknotes the shutter flap is opened completely by
the firmware and the drive belts in the transport clamp are shortly running
backwards. After that the shutter flap closes completely and locks, if there are
not any external influences which get in the way.
Error code 28
If the locking procedure does not proceed in 1 second, the firmware turns off
the motor, signals an error code (displays error code 28 on the CMD-V4
controller) and messages the malfunction to the application.
Error code 29 (manipulation protection)
If the closing shutter flap covers photo sensor PS 27, the error code 29 is
shown on the display. The firmware tries anyway to close the shutter flap. If
this is not possible during 1 second, the motor gets switched off.
Banknote removal area CMD-V5

The banknote removal in a system with a CMD-V5 is controlled by the
application.

Function Shutter CMD horizontal
Meaning of the hybrid photosensors

DPS 10 DPS 11 ERROR
Open covered Shutter flap is completely open (position OPEN)
covered covered Shutter flap is opened
(Position between OPEN and BANKNOTE
DISPENSING)
covered Open The shutter flap is in the locking phase
Open Open Shutter flap is closed and locked
(position CLOSED)
Signal level at the plug:

covered = 1 (H) = + 12 V
open = 0 (L) = 0 V
The level of the DPS 10 and DPS 11 are 0 V and 5 V, if the shutter electronics
is connected to a CMD controller. If not, the measurement is not possible.

Shutter CMD horizontal Pin assignment
Pin assignment
JST PHD 12M

1 not used
2 not used
3 + 12 V
4 GND
5 Motor (+) Motor connection (+)
6 Motor (-) Motor connection (-)
7 DPS 10
8 DPS 11
9 PS 27
10 PS 28
11 Transmit current PS 27 and
PS 28
12 not used
Firmware designation Electronic signal

PS 27 LS 26
PS 28 LS 29
Maintenance
The shutter does not require preventive maintenance under normal operating
conditions.

Technical Data Shutter CMD horizontal
Technical Data
Dimensions:
Height: 128 mm (5.04")
Width: 304 mm (11.97")
Depth: 67 mm (2.64")
Weight: 820 g (1809 lb)

Check/Cash Deposit Module (CCDM)
A separate service manual is available for the check/cash deposit module.
The service manual can be ordered from our print partner. It is also available
in the intranet.
Language Order Number
German 01750061417 CCDM
English 01750062112 CCDM
German 01750237280 CCDM V2
English 01750227289 CCDM V2

Check/Cash Deposit Module (CCDM)

Deposit unit
A special service manual is available for the deposit unit. This service manual
can be ordered from our print partner and is also available in the intranet.
German 01750057322
English 01750057323

Deposit unit

Coin Dispenser Module CM2-O-4H/8H
A special service manual is available for the Coin Dispenser Module CM2-O-
4H/8H. This service manual can be ordered from our print partner and is also
available in the intranet.

German / English 01750203987

Coin Dispenser Module CM2-O-4H/8H

Camera IDS
i This component contains the HW inventory data.
Manufacturer: IDS
Camera type: Wincor-Nixdorf UI-1553-C-WN

Camera versions Camera IDS
Camera versions
IDCU camera
Part number 01750167490
Order name Camera_IDS_2008-02_IDCU
Lens focal distance 2.1 mm (0.082677")
Opening angle 159 (diagonal) x 130 (length) x
99.4 (width)
Focus 80 mm (3.15")
Label color Yellow
Terminal portrait camera

Order name Camera_IDS_2009-01
49.5 (width)
Focus 400 mm (15.75")
Label color White
Cash portrait camera

01750184996, 01750196300,
99.4 (width)
Focus 440 mm (17.32")
Label color Silver

Camera IDS Camera drivers
Cash slot camera

Part number 01750184997, 01750196299
99.4 (width)
Focus 440 mm (17.32")
Label color Silver
i The focal length of the camera is preset
Camera drivers
The drivers for the camera are part of the product-specific software provided
by Wincor Nixdorf.
Driver installation
i The software drivers have to be installed before the camera is

connected.

Technical Data Camera IDS
Technical Data
Manufacturer IDS
Type Wincor-Nixdorf UI-1553-C-WN
Video chip type 1/3" (8.46 mm) CMOS
Lens focal distance See camera versions
Pixels (H x V) 1600 x 1200
Frame rate Max. 18 fps
Camera setting parameters Frame rate, contrast, gamma correction,
brightness, color saturation, color on/off,
white balance, exposure control
Power consumption 150 - 200 mA
Operating temperature range -15 C to +55 C (+5 F to +131 F)
Weight 60 g (1.32 lb)
Dimensions (W x H x D) 33 x 40 x 70 mm (1.3" x 1.57" x 2.76")
System requirements
Operating system From Windows XP
Interface USB 2.0 high speed

Camera IDS Pin assignment
Pin assignment
Voltage supply
Type of connector:
Micro USB 5-pin
1
Contact Assignment
1 VCC + 5 V
2 - Data
3 + Data
4 nc.
5 GND

Pin assignment Camera IDS

Relay Panel for External Features USB
01750083012
Description
This relay panel for external features is a stand-alone Low Speed USB
component which - in combination with the application software - enables the
following functions :
Control of the self-service system by means of up to 4 external signal
devices (inputs 1 - 4).
Control of up to four external pieces of equipment via the self-service
system (relays 1 - 4)
Connection of a remote status indicator (RSI)
Power is supplied via the USB cable.
Operation of the remote status indicator, however, requires an additional 24 V
connection.
In a self-service system two relay panels for external features may be used.
The second relay panel for external features is addressed via a coding
connector (short-circuit bridge) which is polled by the firmware.

Technical data Relay Panel for External Features USB 01750083012
Technical data
Description of connectors
10
1 Connector X2, relay 1 6 Connector X5, inputs 3 and 4

2 Connector X3, relay 3 7 Connector X4, RSI
3 Connector X5, inputs 1 and 2 8 Connector X6, 24V
4 Connector X2, relay 2 9 Connector X1, USB
5 Connector X3, relay 4 10 Coding connector for the
second relay panel for external
features

Relay Panel for External Features USB 01750083012 Technical data
Connector X1
USB connector type B
Connectors X2 and X3
These two connectors serve to connect external actuators (e.g. a door opener)
which are controlled by the application software via the relay. The relays are
addressed via the microcontroller.
Connector X4
This 4-pin connector is reserved for connection of the remote status indicator
(RSI).
Connector X5
Via this connector up to four customer inputs (sensors or contacts such as

door switches, photosensors) can be polled by the microcontroller and
evaluated by the application software.
Connector X6
24V supply for RSI operation
Coding connector
Addresses the second relay panel for external features in the system by
means of a short-circuit bridge.
How the connector pins are used is shown in the following terminal
i diagram and pin assignments.

Terminal diagram
Relay 1 Relay 3
1 2
1 3 1 3 1 4
X2 X3 X5 X4
4 6 4 6 5 8 1 4
Relay 2 3 4 Remote Status

Relay 4
Inputs Indicator
Sample connection of customer feedback

Example for input 2
Contact bridged =
feedback is generated
1 4
X5

Pin assignment
X1, USB input
USB 4-pin (type B)
4 3
Contact Name Comment

1 5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
X2, customer relays 1 and 2
1
3
4
6

1 Relay 1 Default: contact open
2 Relay 1 Default: contact closed
3 Relay 1 Input contact

X3, customer relays 3 and 4
1 .
3
4
6

X4, RSI connection
1 .
4

1 Red LED
2 Yellow LED
3 Green LED
4 GND

X5, customer inputs
1
4
5
8

1 Input 1
2 GND
3 Input 2
4 GND
5 Input 3
6 GND
7 Input 4
8 GND
Connector X6, voltage supply
Type of connector:

1 24V switched
2 GND load

Replacement Relay Panel for External Features USB 01750083012
Coding connector
Type of connector:
Jumper strip 2M
This connector is used for the short-circuit bridge to code the second relay
panel for external features.
Replacement
Please note that in case of a relay panel replacement the coding
i connector (for the second relay panel in the system) must be detached
from the defective component and attached to the new one.
Technical data
USB data transfer rate: 1.5 Mbit/sec
Relay switching contacts: 24 V / 1 A load capacity

RSI interface: 24 V / 20 mA load capacity
Voltage supply: +5V
+ 24 V only for RSI operation
Length: 210 mm (8.27")

Width: 37 mm (1.46")
Height without terminal strips:
38 mm (1.5")
Height with terminal strips: 50 mm (1.97")
Weight: 0.240 kg (0.53 lb)
Weight with terminal strips: 0.270 kg (0.6 lb)

Remote Status Indicator
Part number Version
01750047663 Remote status indicator - standard
01750069332 Remote status indicator - audio
Remote status indicator - standard Remote status indicator - audio
Description
This display can be installed physically separate from the system. It serves to
inform the operator of the current status of the system. In contrast to the
remote status indicator - standard, the remote status indicator - audio also
features an acoustic signal generator. In the case of display (red) (see section
"Indicators and controls"), an additional continuous tone is generated. It can be
deactivated via the Audio Reset key. However, the optical display is still
output.

Indicators and controls Remote Status Indicator
Indicators and controls

Remote status indicator - standard Remote status indicator - audio
1
2
3
1
2 4
3
5
Pos. Indicator / Meaning Action

Function
1 Red SERVICE REQUIRED Follow the instructions on
the system's operator panel
or monitor.
2 Yellow SUPPLIES REQUIRED Follow the instructions on
the system's operator panel
or monitor.
3 Green IN SERVICE
(system is in service)
4 Acoustic Continuous tone for See pos. 1
signal 'SERVICE REQUIRED'
generator
5 'Audio Turns off continuous
Reset' key tone.

Remote Status Indicator Pin assignment
Pin assignment
Remote status indicator - standard
Pin Description
1 Service display 'red' (pin 11 on the relay panel for external features)
2 Service display 'yellow' (pin 12 on the relay panel for external features)
3 Service display 'green' (pin 13 on the relay panel for external features)
4 GND (pin 14 on the relay panel for external features)

Pin assignment Remote Status Indicator
Remote status indicator - audio
Pin Description
1 Service display 'red' (pin 11 on the relay panel for external features)
2 Service display 'yellow' (pin 12 on the relay panel for external features)
3 Service display 'green' (pin 13 on the relay panel for external features)
4 GND (pin 14 on the relay panel for external features)

Operator Panel USB (OP 04)
Operator Panel USB 01750076793
Operator Panel USB 01750109076
Introduction

Introduction Operator Panel USB (OP 04)
This component allows the operator of the self-service system or the service
technician to perform various operations and indicates the operating status.
Compared to the functionality of the V.24 versions used up to now the

following functions have been added:
Integration of the external control unit for the central USB special
electronics
Additional shift key to enter letters and special characters via the keypad
Additional key to switch between several logical application levels (e.g.
SOP and ProPxD)
The labeling of the keys and indicators can be customized using the supplied
sets of labels.
The contrast of the LCD can be set by means of the application software.
Connection to the IC bus of the central USB special electronics is only
needed for the functions of the external control unit.
i The ic port connector to the central USB special electronics may only
be attached or detached while there is no connection to the power
supply. Improper handling can cause irreparable damage to the
component.
The 5 V operating voltage is supplied via the central USB special electronics.

Operator Panel USB (OP 04) Introduction
Switching on
As soon as the supply voltage is applied via USB, the operator panel switches
on automatically and performs a power-on routine with an internal test.
At power-on the booter checks if valid firmware is available. If that is the case,
the firmware is started. The firmware performs a self-test at power-on (main
memory, USB port, LCD and keyboard).
The result of the self-test is shown on a start display for approximately five
seconds. Then the graphics display is deleted.
If an error occurred during the internal test, the red service LED is lit, provided
that it is not disabled by the application software.
i Replace the operator panel if the error keeps occurring after the unit
has been switched on repeatedly.
Operation settings
The operation settings are made via the application software.

Description of keys and indicators Operator Panel USB (OP 04)
Description of keys and indicators
1 8
2 9
3 10
4 11
5 A B C D E F 12
1 2 3
13
14
4 5 6 15
7 8 9 16
17
6 0
18
19
1 Function key 5 11 Function key 4

2 Function key 6 12 Keys for hexadecimal codes
3 Function key 7 13 ON/OFF key for ZSE USB
4 Function key 8 (central USB special electronics)
5 Service key 14 Status indicators for ZSE USB
6 Shift key 'a b c' 15 Speaker key for ZSE USB
7 Display 16 LCD Light key for ZSE USB
8 Function key 1 17 SOP key for ZSE USB
9 Function key 2 18 Status indicators
10 Function key 3 19 Standard entry keys

Operator Panel USB (OP 04) Description of keys and indicators
Keys and indicators for operator panel functions
Function keys F1 through F8
The functions of these keys depend on the application.
Service key
This key is used to toggle between different logical application levels during
the running application.
'a b c' key
This shift key for entering letters and special characters is not supported by all
applications. First press this key before entering letters and special characters.
The enter mode is maintained until the key is pressed again.
Keys A through F
Use these keys to enter hexadecimal codes.
Standard entry keys
These keys serve to enter letters, digits and special characters. The keys in
the right column of this keypad (e.g. the Confirm key) are used for entry
control.
Status indicators
Customer yellow LED

Cash yellow LED
Paper red LED
Service red LED
Operation green LED

Description of keys and indicators Operator Panel USB (OP 04)
Keys and indicators for functions of the external

control unit
ON / OFF key
If the central USB special electronics is in standby mode (red STANDBY LED
on, green ON LED off), pressing this key tells the system that you want to
switch it on. Switching on then takes place according to the application
software settings.
Pressing this key causes the green ON LED to flash in confirmation and to
indicate the restart phase which takes about ten seconds. At the end of the
restart phase, the system is switched on and the green ON LED shines
continuously.
Pressing this key in operating mode is interpreted as a request to switch to
standby mode, and the green LED flashes in confirmation. If this switchover
takes place according to the application software settings, the red STANDBY
LED shines continuously.
Speaker key
This key is used to adjust the volume of the system loudspeaker in eight steps.
The volume is increased by one step whenever this key is pressed. When the
highest volume is reached, the next keystroke will return the volume to the
lowest level. The last setting is automatically saved.
LCD Light key
This key is used to switch the LCD backlight on and off. Enabling of this
function is indicated by the yellow LCD LIGHT LED, and the backlight is
switched on permanently and cannot be switched off by a software request.

Operator Panel USB (OP 04) Description of keys and indicators
SOP key
Pressing this key tells the system that you want to switch on the application
program's SOP mode.
The yellow SOP LED lights up briefly to confirm that this key has been
pressed. SOP mode itself is called according to the application program's
settings.
Status indicators
STANDBY red LED

ON green LED
LCD LIGHT yellow LED
SOP yellow LED
Indicators for UPS operation
The operating state of a UPS is indicated by the following yellow LEDs.

UPS WORKING The power supply has failed and the UPS is active.
CAPACITY EMPTY The UPS' storage capacity is no longer adequate.

Replacing the label strips Operator Panel USB (OP 04)
Replacing the label strips

Labeling of the function keys F1 through F4, F5 through F8 and of the keys
and indicators which are located to the right of the standard entry keys can be
customized with the supplied label strips.
Perform the following steps to change the strips:
i To avoid damage to the logic by static, discharge the static by

touching a grounded surface.
Release the connector lock and unplug the connector from the operator
panel.
Replacing label strips in the upper section of the operator panel
On the rear side of the operator panel

remove screw (1) at the top and
remove the cover (2).
Replace the label strip on the right

side (1) and/or on the left.

Operator Panel USB (OP 04) Replacing the label strips
Replacing label strips in the lower section of the operator panel
On the rear side of the operator panel

remove screws (1) and (2) at the
bottom and remove the cover (3).
Replace the labeling strip (1).
Re-assemble in reverse order of removal.

Technical specifications Operator Panel USB (OP 04)
Technical specifications
Pin assignment
USB port
USB 4-pin (type B)
4 3
Pin Name Comment

1 5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND

Operator Panel USB (OP 04) Technical specifications
IC bus
Type of connector:
RJ45 8F
Pin Name Comment

1 5V switched Not connected
2 5V standby For the integrated external control unit
function
3 GND
4
5
6 IC data
7 GND
8 IC clock

Technical specifications Operator Panel USB (OP 04)
Technical data
LCD
LCD resolution: 240 x 128 pixel

LCD size: 108 x 58 mm (4.25" x 2.28")
Backlight: can be switched on via the
application program
Contrast: can be set via the application
program
Data interface
System connection: USB 1.1 full speed

Integrated external control unit: IC bus
Power supply
Integrated external control unit: 5 V via USB port

Connection of external control unit: 5 V standby from SE
Length: 240 mm (9.45")

Width: 170 mm (6.69")
Height: 29 mm (1.14")
Weight: 0.76 kg (1.68 lb)

Operator Panel 05
1 Operator panel 05 10.4" Small housing (without keypad) 01750101405
2 Operator panel 05 10.4" with keypad 01750104454
3 Operator panel 05 10.4" without keypad 01750125260
i This chapter lists the component's available versions. Which version is

deployed in the CINEO C2560 is described in the chapter "Function
and Integration".

Connections Operator Panel 05
Connections
i The ports are on the back side of the operator panel 05.
Operator panel 05 - with/without keypad
1 IC bus (connection of OP 05 keypad component to the central

USB special electronics )
2 Power supply connection (+12 V)
3 USB 2.0 (connection of OP 05 LCD/touch component)
i The connector of the IC port for the central USB special electronics
may only be attached or detached when the device is disconnected
from the power supply.

Operator Panel 05 Connections
i There is no IC port on the operator panel 05 without keypad!
Operator panel 05 - small housing
1 Power supply connection (12 V)

2 USB 2.0 (connection of OP 05 LCD/touch component)

Important safety precautions Operator Panel 05

mouth with water.
with this fluid with alcohol and thoroughly rinse them with water
afterwards.

The polarization filter screen is very delicate and must be protected

against scratches.
screen or to slightly dampen it with screen or window cleaner.

Operator Panel 05 Structure and functions

The operator panel 05 is connected to the system's monitor as a secondary
display with a resistive touch screen in front of it. The touch function is an
integral feature of the operator panel 05. In systems with a special electronics
USB the operator panel 05 with keypad is installed. The keypad has the same
function as the external control unit. The operator panel 05 with a small
housing is designed for systems with limited space and for systems with
special electronics USB.
The operator panel 05 is used to operate the application software. It enables
the operator of self-service systems or the service technician to perform
various tasks with visual support. It also serves to display the operating status.
Direct-X 3D functions are not supported.
The CSC-W software should at least be release 21.30. The calibration data
generated wit hit are stored in the controller of operator panel 05.
The 12 V operating voltage is supplied via a separate power supply unit. It is
fed via the systems power distributor.
The monitor and the touch function are connected to a USB 2.0 interface of
the system unit (PC).
i -Since the entire screen contents is transmitted via the USB 2.0 port,
make sure that the operator panel 05 is directly connected to the PC
via a high-speed USB 2.0 interface. Operation of the operator panel 05
connected to a USB 1.1 interface such as the special electronics USB
is not stable.
The keypad of the operator panel 05 is connected to the IC bus of the special
electronics USB.

Settings Operator Panel 05
Settings
When using the operator panel 05 for the first time or when retrofitting it, it
must be calibrated.
After changing the resolution on the system's monitor, re-boot the operating
system to force recalibration of the touch sensor. (The focus of the touch area
changes with the resolution of the system's monitor since the operator panel
05 is connected to the system's monitor as a secondary display).
For calibration you need the software
CSC-W Rel. 21.30 or higher. During boot-up of the CSC-W software there is a
pause for 10 seconds during which you can confirm calibration on the operator
panel 05. Then you can perform calibration by touching spots on the touch
screen displayed in a defined manner.
The generated calibration data is stored in the controller of operator panel 05
so that no calibration is required again after OP 05 has been repaired. Re-
calibration is only performed in exceptional cases.
Circuit diagram
System unit USB

(PC)
LCD +
Power Power + 12 V Touch
distributor supply
Central USB unit
special IC
Keypad + indicators
electronics

Operator Panel 05 Operator panel 05 with keypad
Operator panel 05 with keypad
Keys and indicators
1 ON/OFF key 6 Status display UPS WORKING

2 Status display ON 7 LCD LIGHT key
3 Status display STAND BY 8 Status display LCD LIGHT
4 SPEAKER key 9 SOP key
5 Status display 10 Status display SOP
CAPACITY EMPTY

Operator panel 05 with keypad Operator Panel 05
ON/OFF key
If the red STANDBY LED is lit, you can switch the system on by pressing the
ON/OFF key. After you have pressed the key, the green ON LED blinks to
confirm this. After approx. 10 seconds the system switches on and the green
ON LED stays on permanently.
Pressing the ON/OFF key in the operating mode, switches the device to
standby mode and the green LED blinks to confirm this. If the system is in
standby mode, the red STANDBY LED is on permanently.
SPEAKER key
This key is used to adjust the volume of the system loudspeaker in 8 steps.
Each time you press the key the volume is increased by one step. If the
highest step is reached, pressing the key the next time returns the volume to
the lowest level.
The last setting is automatically saved.
LCD LIGHT key
This key is used to turn the LCD backlight on or off in the boot phase. The fact
that this function is switched on is indicated by the yellow LCD LIGHT LED. If
the function is activated, the backlight is on permanently.
SOP key
This key is used to call the service and operation mode of the application
program. The SOP function can be generated via a key function or switch
function, depending on the application program settings.
Key function: After pressing in the key function, the yellow SOP LED lights
up briefly for confirmation.
Switch function: In the switch function, the LED indicates the state of the
switch. When the SOP function is on, the yellow SOP LED lights up.

Operator Panel 05 Operator panel 05 with keypad
Status indicators
red LED STAND BY

green LED ON
yellow LED UPS WORKING
yellow LED CAPACITY EMPTY
yellow LED LCD
yellow LED SOP
The operating state of the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is indicated by

the following yellow LEDs:
UPS WORKING Power supply has failed and the UPS is active.
CAPACITY EMPTY The capacity of the UPS is not sufficient.

Technical specifications Operator Panel 05
Technical specifications
Pin assignment
IC bus (only for version with keypad)
Type of connector:
RJ45 8F
Pin Signal Remarks

1 5 V switched Not connected
2 5 V stand by
3 GND
4
5
6 IC Data
7 GND
8 IC clock
i The connector of the IC port for the central USB special electronics
may only be attached or detached when the device is disconnected
from the power supply.

Operator Panel 05 Technical specifications
Pin Signal Remarks

1 GND External power supply unit
2
3 +12 V External power supply unit
4
USB port
USB 4-pin (type B)
4 3
Pin Signal Remarks

1 5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND

Technical data
General
Dimensions and weight of operator panel 05 (with/without keypad):
Width: 326 mm (12.83")
Height: 224 mm (8.82")
Depth: 38 mm (1.5")
Weight: 2.1 Kg (4.63 lb)
Dimensions and weight of operator panel 05 (small housing):

Width: 257 mm (10.12")
Height: 206 mm (8.11")
Depth: 38 mm (1.5")
Weight: 1.9 Kg (4.19 lb)
Operation:
Temperature: 0 to +40 C (+32 F to +104 F) (non-
condensing)
Humidity: from -20 to +60 C (-4 F to +140 F) less than
90 % rel.h. (non-condensing)
Storage:
Temperature: -20 to +80 C (-4 F to +176 F) (non-
condensing)
Humidity: from -20 to +60 C (-4 F to +140 F) less than
95 % rel.h. (non-condensing)

Operator Panel 05 Technical specifications
LCD
Screen diagonal: 10.4" / 26.4 cm
Resolution: 800 x 600 (SVGA)
Brightness: 190 cd/m (typically)
Response time: 10 ms (typically, shift from white to black)
30 ms (typically, shift from black to white)
Interfaces
IC bus Connection of OP 05 keypad component
to the central special electronics USB
Power supply Connection via the external power supply unit
USB 2.0 HighSpeedport Connection of the LCD/touch component
to USB
Operating system support

Operating system support for
OP 05 (Artista) driver: Windows XP SP2 and
Windows 2000 SP4
Emulation mode via USBIO: Windows NT


Operator Panel 06
Operator panel OP06 II 01750201871

Connectors Operator Panel 06
Connectors
i The connectors are located at the rear of the operator panel 06.
Operator Panel 06
1 For power supply connection with 12 V

2 VGA connector
3 UBS (connection of the LCD/touch component of the OP 06)

Operator Panel 06 Important safety precautions

mouth with water.
with this fluid with alcohol and carefully rinse them with water
afterwards.



Structure and functions Operator Panel 06

The operator panel 06 is as a secondary display connected to the system
display with a resistive touch screen in front of it. The touch function is an
integral part of the operator panel 06. The operator panel 06 is installed with a
keyboard in the devices with a special electronics module USB. The keyboard
features the same functioning as the 'External control unit.'
You can use the application software with the operator panel 06. It allows the
operator of the self-service systems or the service engineer to carry out
different activities with visual support by a graphically guided display.
The software is presented with the ProBase/C or ProBase/J versions which
support this component.
Direct-X 3D functions are not supported.
The operating voltage of 12 V is supplied by a separate power supply unit. It is
fed by the power distributor of the device.
The display is connected via a VGA interface and the touch function via the
USB interface to the system unit (PC).

Operator Panel 06 Operating settings
Operating settings
During the initial start-up and during retrofitting of the operator panel 06 you
should perform a calibration.
After the conversion of the system display resolution of the device, the
operating system needs to be restarted to force a recalibration of the touch
sensor. (The focus of the touch area changes along with the resolution of the
system display because the operator panel 06 is as a secondary display
connected to the display of the system.)
A corresponding product-specific software is necessary for the calibration, e.g.
ProBase/G or ProBase/J which support the OP06. During the start-up of the
software, the boot procedure stops for 10 seconds and on the operator panel
06 can confirm the performance of the calibration. After that you can perform
the calibration process by pressing defined displayed points on the touch
surface.
Circuit diagram
USB
System unit
(PC) VGA LCD +
Power Power Touch
distributor supply unit +12 V
Special
electronics Keyboard
module

Specifications of the keys Operator Panel 06
Specifications of the keys
1 Power on/off key 4 Select key down

2 Menu key 5 Enter key
3 Select key up
Power on/off key
The power key is used to switch the device on and off.

Operator Panel 06 Specifications of the keys
Menu key
The menu key is used to activate the "On screen display mode." Press the key
twice to deactivate OSD mode. After you waited 20 seconds, the OSD mode
switches off independently.
Select key up/down

These keys have to functions. If the OSD mode is activated, the keys are used
to select the adjusting settings. If an adjusting setting was selected, you can
change the values of the selected positions with the select keys.
Enter key
The enter key is used to confirm various menu functions.

Technical information Operator Panel 06
Technical information
Pin assignments
VGA connector
DSUB 15/09F
15 11
Pin Name
1 RED
2 GREEN
3 BLUE
4 NC
5 GND
6 GND
7 GND
8 GND
9 + 5 V FS
10 GND
11 NC
12 MONID 1
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 MONID 2

Operator Panel 06 Technical information
USB port
2 1 Connector type:
USB 4pin
3 4
Pin Name Remarks

1 VCC +5 V
2 - Data 3.3 V difference
3 + data 3.3 V difference
4 Ground
Connection for monitor power
Type of connector:
1 2 Jack plug
Pin Description
1 0V
2 +12 V

Technical data Operator Panel 06
Technical data
General
Dimensions and weight of the operator panel 06

Width: 251.2 mm
(9.89 ")
Height: 192 mm
(7.56 ")
Depth: 33 mm
(1.3 ")
Weight: 1.7 kg
(3.75 lb)
Operation:
Temperature: 0 to + 40 C (non-condensing)
(32 to 104 F)
Humidity: 10% to 85 % r.F. (non-condensing)
Storage:
Temperature: - 20 to + 60 C (non-condensing)
Humidity: 10% to 85 % r.F. (non-condensing)
LCD
Screen diagonal: 10,4 / 26,4 cm

Resolution: 800 x 600 (SVGA)
Brightness: 230 cd/m (typical)
Response time: 10 ms (typical, change from white to black)
25 ms (typical, change from white to black)
Interfaces
VGA connector Connection of the LCD to the system unit

Power supply Connection via the external power supply unit
USB port Connection of the touch component
of the OP 06 to USB

Operator Panel 06 Technical data
Operating system support
Operating system support for

OP 06 (Artista) - driver: Windows XP SP2 and
Windows 2000 SP4
Emulation mode via USBIO: Windows NT

Keyboard for the operator panel
Keys and indicators
1 ON/OFF key 6 Status display UPS WORKING

2 Status display ON 7 LCD LIGHT key
3 Status display STAND BY 8 Status display LCD LIGHT
4 SPEAKER key 9 SOP key
5 Status display 10 Status display SOP
CAPACITY EMPTY

Operator Panel 06 Technical data
ON/OFF key
If the red STANDBY LED is lit, you can switch the device off by pressing the
ON/OFF key. After you have pressed the key, the green ON LED blinks to
confirm this. After approx. 10 seconds the device switches on and the green
ON LED stays on permanently.
Pressing the ON/OFF key in the operating mode switches the device to
standby mode, and the green LED blinks to confirm this. If the device is in
standby mode, the red STANDBY LED is on permanently.
SPEAKER key
This key is used to adjust the volume of the device loudspeaker in eight steps.
Each time you press the key the volume is increased by one step. If the
highest step is reached, pressing the key the next time returns the volume to
the lowest level.
The last setting is automatically saved.
LCD LIGHT key
This key is used to switch the LCD backlight on or off in the start-up phase
(boot phase). If the function is activated, the backlight is on permanently.
SOP button
This key is used to call the service and operation mode of the application
program. The SOP function can be generated via a key function or switch
function, depending on the application program settings.
Key function
After pressing in the key function, the yellow SOP LED lights up briefly for
confirmation.
Switch function
In the switch function, the LED indicates the state of the switch. When the
SOP function is on, the yellow SOP LED lights up.

Status indicators
Red LED STAND BY

Green LED ON
yellow LED UPS WORKING
yellow LED CAPACITY EMPTY
yellow LED LCD
yellow LED SOP
The operating state of the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is indicated by

the following yellow LEDs:
UPS WORKING Power supply has failed and the UPS is active.
CAPACITY EMPTY The capacity of the UPS is not sufficient.
Pin assignments
Pin Name Remarks

1 GND External power supply unit
2
3 + 12 V External power supply unit
4

Plug-in Media Entry Indicators
Part number: 01750058806
Structure
The media entry indicators comprise a plastic frame, the LED board and the
optical indicator.
1 Plastic frame 3 LED board

2 Optical indicator

Pin assignment Plug-in Media Entry Indicators
The LED board includes the connector and an IC with the LED, which is the
light source for the optical indicator.
1 Connector
2 IC with LED
Pin assignment
Type of connector:
1 Dubox 3-pin, M
Pin Name
1 Source
2 Not used
3 GND

Heating control 01750190720
The heating control has an adjustment-free logic board that measures the
temperature using the connected sensor and controls up to two heating
elements with one 24 V fan each.
The direct currents required for the logic board are generated in the heating
control itself.

Pin assignments Heating control 01750190720
Pin assignments
1 Connecting the the two heating elements with Y-cable

2 Power supply
3 Fan 1 connection on the heating element
4 Fan 2 connection on the heating element
5 LED display (green and red LED)
6 Temperature sensor connection
7 Button

Heating control 01750190720 Control actuation points
Control actuation points

Heating on Temperature + 8 C (46F)
Heating off Temperature + 12 C (54F)
Response threshold of the safety Temperature + 130 C (266F)
temperature monitor in the
heating element
Voltage supply 90 - 264 V AC
Heating supply line fuse T 8 A, 6.35 mm x 31.75 mm
(0.25000" x 1.25000")
Fan control
The two fans that can be connected to the heating control are each fastened to
a one heating element and ensure that the heating output of the heating
elements is conveyed into the device. The heating control detects the number
of connected fans automatically during the power-on phase. The fans work
with a supply voltage of 24V DC and are fitted with a speed query that
switches an output in the case of a blocked fan wheel. This output is queried
by the heating control, and evaluated in such a way that the heating elements
are turned off and the error is displayed with a flashing green LED if the fan
wheel is blocked.
The heating control can switch off the two fans together during summer
operation and also to minimize possible dust swirls inside the device.
The fans may not be switched off under any circumstances when the
heating element is switched on. The heating elements could overheat
and become destroyed if this is not observed.
Heating elements with integrated 230 V/115 V fans can not be operated on
this heating control.

Operational readiness display Heating control 01750190720
Operational readiness display

The electronic status of the heating control is visually displayed using two
LEDs. Additional information can be found in the section "LED display".
Temperature sensor
In most cases, the temperature sensor is located on the control panel.
Maintenance
The heating control is maintenance-free. The function test takes place with the
internal test (see following section "Test"). The heating element fans must be
checked and (if necessary) cleaned as part of system maintenance (see
chapter "Maintenance and care").
Test
The button installed in the electronic control can be used to check the function
of the heating equipment even above the switching point. After the button is
actuated, a check is made to determine whether a sensor is connected and
whether the supply voltage is switched through to the heating elements. If the
sensor is not connected, the heating elements will not be able to be activated,
not even with the button pressed.
The heater is operated automatically for 5 minutes after the button was
pressed. The red LED is turned on for visual display purposes. A warm current
of air should start up during this time at the air outlets. If this is not the case,
check the LED display.

Heating control 01750190720 LED display
LED display
Status and error displays

2 LEDs are available for displaying the operating states. The table below
provides a summarized and somewhat simplified illustration of possible LED
displays and their significance.
Red Green
Status
LED LED
OK, heating control switched on, heating elements

switched off
OK, heating control switched on, heating elements
switched on, heating performance 100%
Heating element is running (100%) and sensor is still too
cold
Failure, heating element is off:
Temperature sensor too warm (temperature on the
sensor > +55C (131F))
Temperature sensor too cold (temperature on the
sensor < -35C (-31F))
Temperature sensor not plugged in or defective
Fan blocked or not plugged in
Failure:
No current or defective power supply unit
FW not loaded
HW controller defective
Undefined status, heating control defective
= on = off = flashing

Pin assignments Heating control 01750190720
Pin assignments
Temperature sensor
2-pin Molex Micro Fit
Contact Designation
1 P 24 V
2 SENSOR
Fan connections 1, 2
3-pin Molex Micro Fit
Contact Designation
1 GND
2 P 24 V
3 Blocked

UPS Powerware 5115
CINEO C2560 is described in the chapter "Function and Integration."
Type Part number Description

PW 5115 01750183553 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) for
120 V power mains
PW 5115 01750166849 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) for
230 V power mains
The Power ware 5115 prevents that power outages, voltage dips as well as
under and overvoltages can reach the connected devices. It filters low current

Important safety precautions UPS Powerware 5115
fluctuations and protects the connected devices by canceling the connection to

the voltage input cable internal and ensures an uninterrupted power supply
through an internal battery until the external power supply is safe again or
when the malfunction occurs a longer time, until the battery is empty.
i If the device is equipped with a heater or a climate control unit, these

components won't be connected with the UPS and so they won't be
supplied by it.

The UPS is equipped with a suitable energy source (battery).
Voltage can still be applied to the output sockets, even if the UPS is
not connected to a power supply system.
Do not disconnect or remove the power cord, when the UPS is
switched on because this would disable the safety grounding of the
UPS and all the devices which are connected to the UPS.
To decrease the risk of fire and electroshocks, the UPS should only
be installed in buildings with controlled temperature and humidity, in
which are no conducting contaminants.
The temperature of the environment should not be higher than 40C
(104F).
The UPS should not be operated near water or in extremely high
humidity (max. 95%).
To fulfill international standards and wiring specifications, the

devices, which are connected to the power outputs of the UPS,
should not exceed a total of a 3.5 mA ground fault current.

UPS Powerware 5115 Function elements
Function elements
Front view
1 ON/OFF button
2 TEST button
3 Input voltage (green LED)
4 Battery operation (yellow LED)
5 Service display (red LED)

Function elements UPS Powerware 5115
Rear view (120 V version)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Network protection 5 Fan

2 USB port 6 Power output
3 DIP switches 7 Power cable
4 V.24 port 8 Automatic circuit-breaker

UPS Powerware 5115 Function elements
Rear view (230 V version)
1
2
4
5
1 Network protection
2 USB port
3 Power outputs
4 DIP switches
5 Fan
6 Power cable

Initial operation UPS Powerware 5115
Initial operation
i After approx. 3 hours the battery has reached a charge of 90 %.
If the device is used the first time, the battery should continuously
charge for 6 - 24 hours.
Press and hold the ON / OFF key (1)

until the UPS issues a beep (for
1 approx. 2 seconds).
The UPS performs a self-test and
switches in the operating mode as
soon as this test is finished.
2 The LED for the input voltage (2) lights
up.
i If the UPS locates an error while running a self-test, this error will be
indicated by blinking of corresponding LEDs (see also section
"Indications/Troubleshooting" in this chapter).

UPS Powerware 5115 Switching on
Switching on
i After the UPS is connected to the power supply, it switches to standby
mode.
Press and hold the ON / OFF key (1)

until the UPS issues a beep (for
1 approx. 2 seconds).
The UPS runs a self-test and switches
in the operator mode.
The LED for the input voltage (2) lights
2 up.
The connected devices are
immediately supplied with power.
Switching off
Press and hold the ON/OFF button (1)
for 2 seconds.
1
i If the UPS is connected to the power supply, it switches in the standby

mode after switching it off.

Standby mode UPS Powerware 5115
Standby mode
In standby mode all LEDs are turned off and the connected devices are
supplied.
The battery can be charged again, if necessary.
Self-test
The self-test can be used to test the UPS operation.
i To run a self-test the battery of the UPS has to be charged completely

and the UPS should not be in charging mode.
Press and hold the TEST button (1) for

3 seconds.
i If the UPS locates an error while running a self-test, this error will be
indicated by blinking of corresponding LEDs (see also section
"Indications/Troubleshooting" in this chapter).

UPS Powerware 5115 Voltage selection switch
Voltage selection switch

i With the voltage selector on the rear side of the UPS you can
configurate the output voltages and the area of the input voltages of
the UPS (see also the following configuration table).
Output Area of the Voltage selection switch

voltage input voltage DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2
110 V 99 V - 116 V ON OFF/ON
120 V * 108 V - 127 V * OFF OFF/ON
220 V 198 V - 233 V ON OFF

230 V * 207 V - 243 V * OFF OFF/ON
240 V 216 V - 254 V ON ON
* Default setting
i Before you change the position of the DIP switch, you have to switch
the UPS off and disconnected it.
Switch off the UPS (see the section "Switching off") and disconnect the
UPS from power.
Set the DIP switch 1 (1) and the DIP
switch 2 (2) correspondingly to the
ON
configuration table.
OFF
1 2
Connect the device to the power supply again and switch the UPS back on
(see the section "Switching on").

Indications/Troubleshooting UPS Powerware 5115
Indications/Troubleshooting
Resetting the alarm
i Before the alarm can be reset, the error should be fixed (see section
"Malfunctions").
Press the TEST button (1) to stop the

beep sounds.
When there is a change in the

1 operating status of the UPS the
accrual is canceled and you may hear
the audible alarm again.

UPS Powerware 5115 Indications/Troubleshooting
Malfunctions
Display Meaning
LED is off
LED is permanently on
LED is blinking
LEDs and acoustic Causes Action

signals
The UPS runs on The circuit-breaker (120 Switch the UPS off and
battery although line V version only) jumped disconnect all connected
voltage is available. out. devices from the UPS.
Check for power
affecting malfunctions.
Solve the error, connect
the devices again and
press the automatic
circuit breaker on the
rear side of the UPS
inside.
The UPS does not The battery has to be Charge the battery for 24
provide the expected charged or replaced. hours. Press the TEST
operating time in button. When you hear
battery operation. an alarm, replace the
battery.
Normal operation None
+
Battery operation Prepare the device for
switching it off.
1 sound each
4 seconds


signals
Battery operation: Switch off the device.
+
Battery is weak The alarm cannot be
The battery mode can reset.
1 sound each only be kept up for max.
2 seconds 2 minutes
+
Battery operation: Check the input voltage.
The power supply voltage The UPS is in the battery
is too high or too low. mode as long as the
error is fixed or the
battery is empty.
1 sound each 4 If it is not possible to
seconds remedy the error, replace
the UPS.
The UPS is overloaded Check the connected

or the battery charger is devices.
defective. The UPS Switch the device off and
switches off automatically charge the battery. Wait
after 3 minutes. at least four hours to the
1 beep each battery can charge
Second properly. Run a self-test.
+
Battery operation: Check the connected
The UPS is overloaded devices.
or the battery charger is Switch the device off and
defective. The battery charge the battery. Wait
mode can only be kept at least four hours to the
1 beep each up for max. 30 seconds battery can charge
Second properly. Run a self-test.
If it is not possible to
remedy the error, replace
the UPS.


signals
+
The battery testing is Check if the battery is
faulty. charged and, if
necessary, charge the
+ battery completely. If it is
not possible to remedy
the error, replace the
Continuous beep battery. If this does not
work, replace the UPS.
UPS internal temperature Switch the system off.

is too high. Switch the UPS off and
run a general power
+
interruption. The alarm
cannot be reset. Clear
the vents of the device.
+
Check if the heaters
inside the device are a
Continuous beep possible reason for the
high temperature. Switch
the device off and wait 5
minutes. Reconnect the
power supply and switch
the device on. If it is not
possible to remedy the
error, replace the UPS.


signals
The fan of the UPS is Switch off the device.
defective. Switch the UPS off and
run a general power
+ interruption. The alarm
cannot be reset. Replace
the UPS.
Continuous beep
The attempt to switch in Charge the battery for at

the battery mode failed. least 24 hours.
Run a self-test.
The alarm cannot be
+
reset. If the indicator !
still blinks, replace the
battery.
If it is not possible to
remedy the error, replace
the UPS.
+
3 beeps each 10
seconds
The output wave is Switch the system off.

abnormal while the UPS Switch the UPS off and
is in battery mode. run a general power
interruption.
+
The alarm cannot be
reset.
Replace the UPS.
+
Continuous beep


signals
The output voltage of the Switch the system off.
+ UPS has exceeded the Switch the UPS off and
limit or it doesn't reach run a general power
the limit, while the UPS is interruption.
+ in battery mode. The alarm cannot be
reset.
Continuous beep Replace the UPS.

Pin assignments UPS Powerware 5115
Pin assignments
V.24
D-SUB 9F
Contact Description In/Out Function

1 Low Batt Out Low battery relay contact
2 TxD Out Transmit Data
3 RXD In Receive Data
4 DTR In Data Terminal Ready
5 GND - Ground
6 DSR Out Data Set Ready
7 NC - free
8 AC Fail Out AC Fail relay contact
9 Power source Out 8 V -24 V DC
The UPS is connected to the special electronics in these systems. The

UPS operating state is checked via PIN 1 and PIN 8 of the V.24
interface.

UPS Powerware 5115 Pin assignments
USB
USB 4-pin
3 4
Contact Assignment
1 +5 V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND

Technical data UPS Powerware 5115
Technical data
120 V version
Rated power
PW 5115 750 VA 500 W
Input
Voltage 120 V (default) / 110 V, 120 V
(selectable)
Rated frequency 45 - 65 Hz
Power input fuse AC electric-surge arresters
Output (battery mode)
Output voltage -10 % to +6 % of the nominal voltage
Waveform Sinusoidal wave
Accumulators
Battery type Lead, sealed and maintenance-free
Charging time approx. 3 h until 90% of the capacity is
reached
Ambient conditions
Electrical safety UL 1778 / UL 497A /
CSA C22.2, No. 107.1
Electromagnet. compatibility ICES-003 / FCC Part 15
Ambient temperature
(operation) 0 to 40 C with max. 95% r.h.
Dimensions
Height x Width x Depth 150 x 190.3 x 330.5 mm
(5.91" x 7.49" x 13.01")
Weight
PW 5115 12.40 kg (273.37 lb)

UPS Powerware 5115 Maintenance
230 V version
Rated power
PW 5115 750 VA 500 W
Input
Voltage 230 V 230 V (default) / 220 V, 230 V, 240 V
(selectable)
Rated frequency 45 - 65 Hz
Power input fuse Resettable power input fuse
Output (battery mode)
Output voltage -10 % to +6 % of the nominal voltage
Waveform Sinusoidal wave
Accumulators
Battery type Lead, sealed and maintenance-free
Charging time approx. 3 h until 90% of the capacity is
reached
Ambient conditions
Electrical safety UL 1778 / UL 497A /
CSA C22.2, No. 107.1 EN 50091-1-1 /
IEC 60950
Electromagnet. compatibility ICES-003 / FCC Part 15 / EN 50091-2
Ambient temperature
(operation) 0 to 40 C with max. 95% r.h.
Dimensions
Height x Width x Depth 150 x 190.3 x 335 mm
(5.91" x 7.49" x 13.19")
Weight
PW 5115 12.40 kg (273.37 lb)
Maintenance
The UPS is maintenance-free.

Replace the battery UPS Powerware 5115
Replace the battery

Type Part number Description
Battery kit 01750183641 UPS battery, EATON PW5115 750VA
Voltage can still be applied to the power outputs, even if the UPS is
not connected to an AC source.
Because of the short circuit current batteries can cause electric
shocks and burns. Therefore remove watches, rings and other
metallic objects, before replacing the battery. Only use tools with
insulated handles.
The battery has to be properly discarded. Follow the national
regulations.
Never burn a battery, as it may explode.
Do not open or damage the battery; effluent electrolyte is harmful
for skin and eyes.
Replace batteries only with the same type of batteries as originally
installed in the UPS.
Run a general power interruption (see the chapter "Introduction", section

"General power interrupt").
Open the CINEO C2560 and pull the printer carriage as far as possible out
of the UPS (for its position in the CINEO C2560 please refer to the chapter
"Device Overview", for its accessibility to the chapter "Basic Operation").

UPS Powerware 5115 Replace the battery
Pull the housing cover on the left side

to the front and remove the housing
cover.
Slide the battery cover upwards and

remove it.

Disconnect the red cable (1) from the

battery kit.
Pull out the battery kit (2) and put it on

a hard and even ground.
Turn around (3) the battery kit to
disconnect the rest of the cables.

UPS Powerware 5115 Replace the battery
Disconnect the black battery cable.
Insert the new batteries in the same position as the battery poles.
Follow the single steps in reverse order.
Reconnect the device to the power supply.
Switch the CINEO C2560 on again.
Close the CINEO C2560 and exit the product-specific software.
Charge the battery continuous for 6 - 24 hours and perform a self-test after
that (see section "Initial operation").


Removal/installation of components
Device views
i The following illustration shows all service relevant views of the
device. Please refer to the operating manual for further views of the
device and for the basic operation of the device.
The CINEO C2560 is supplied with a CMD V4 or CMD V5 and the

ProCash 8150 with a CMD V4. The following illustrations show a
ProCash 8150 with CMD-V4. Differences in the procedure for the
various systems will be pointed out.
The following illustrations show only an excerpt of the possible device

versions. The appearance of the device depends on the version you
ordered.

Device views Removal/installation of components
Power supply
1 Ventilation openings 5 Locking/release handle of safe

2 Lock for operator panel 6 Key-operated lock
window
of the operator panel 7 Operator panel window
3 Lock of the 8 Handle to open the
Operating unit operating unit door
4 Number combination lock 9 Safe door

Removal/installation of components Device views
Customer panel pulled out
1 Audio loudspeakers 7 Passbook module shutter

2 Cash slot camera 8 Portrait camera
3 Receipt printer shutter 9 LCD monitor
4 Card reader shutter 10 Fan of LCD monitor
5 Control panel lighting/spotlight 11 Shutter CMD
6 Console electronics

Door of operating unit open
1 Release button of 9 Capacitor

Operator panel 10 Locking/release lever of the
2 Operator Panel Equipment carriage A
3 Power supply unit 11 Handle for equipment carriage A
4 Power distributor 12 System unit (PC)
5 Special Electronics CTM 13 Scanner
6 Locking/release lever of the 14 Journal printer
Control panel 15 Locking/release lever of the
7 SOP button Equipment carriage B
8 External drive 16 Grip for equipment carriage B

Removal/installation of components Device views
Safe opened
1 CCDM head module 5 Relay panel for external features

2 Locking/release lever of the 6 Locking/release lever of the
CCDM head module Cash Media Dispenser (CMD)
3 CCDM cassette module 7 Cash Media Dispenser (CMD)
4 Locking/release lever of the
CCDM cassette module

Pulling out / pushing in the Cash Media

Dispenser
Open the safe door.

Pulling it out
Pull the Cash Media Dispenser as far
as possible out of the safe by using
the green release lever (1).
Pushing in
Push the cash media dispenser into
the safe until it locks in position.
Emergency release
i It may not be possible to pull out the Cash Media Dispenser as

described above.
If this is the case, proceed as follows:
Check to see whether parts of the

stacker (e.g. the clamp) protrude
above the reject/retract cassette (see
arrow).
If they do, try to reposition the parts
carefully so that they are not damaged
when the CMD is pulled out.
Then press the emergency release (1)

and pull the CMD out of the device by
the green lever (2) keeping the
emergency lock button pressed.

Removal/installation of components Lock of the Operator Panel window
Lock of the Operator Panel window

Open the door of the operating unit.
Remove the nut (1), the locking lever
(2) and the nut (3).
Remove the lock.

in reverse order.
Door lock of the operating unit

Remove nut (1).
Remember the key classes.
i
Remove the bar (2).
Remove nut (3) and remove the lock.

in reverse order.

Fan in the operating unit door Removal/installation of components
Fan in the operating unit door

Disconnect the fan's plug connection
(1).
Remove screws (2) and (3) and

remove the fan.

in reverse order.
Fan in the operating unit

Pull out the customer panel.
Disconnect the fan's plug connection
(1).

remove the fan (4) with the pipe up
and forwards.

Removal/installation of components Fan in the operating unit
Detach the connector (1) from the

plate.

remove the fan.

in reverse order.

Gas pressure spring of operating unit doorRemoval/installation of components
Gas pressure spring of operating unit door

i The operating unit door will not stay in an open position without the
gas pressure springs.
When you let go of the door, it will drop shut.
The two gas springs are removed in the same way. Removing the
springs is described for the right gas spring by way of example.
First remove the rear locking plate and
washer (1), and then remove the front
locking plate and washer (2).
Support the door of the operating unit.
Unhook the gas spring first in back (1),

then in front (2).

in reverse order.

Removal/installation of components Power distributor
Power distributor
Disconnect the device from the network (see chapter "Introduction").
i Be sure to remember the position of the connectors on the power

distributor (mark if necessary).
Detach all connectors from the power

distributor (1).
Loosen the screw (2), push the power
distributor slightly in the direction
shown by the arrow and remove it
towards the center of the device. (The
power distributor is hooked in at the
rear only.)
in reverse order.

External DVD drive Removal/installation of components
External DVD drive

Remove screw (1) and (2).
Remove the drive with its frame to the
front (see arrow).
Detach the cable clamp (1) at the rear.

Detach the connectors (2) and (3) at
the rear.
Remove screws (1) and (2) on both

sides.
Pull the DVD drive out of its frame
(see arrow).

Removal/installation of components External DVD drive
Reinstall it by following the same steps in reverse order. Please note the
following installation instructions.
Installation instructions
Position the frame (1) behind the metal

bracket (2).
Guide the mounting screw (1) into the

longitudinal hole (2).
Push the frame backwards and secure
it with screws.

Central power supply unit Removal/installation of components
Central power supply unit

Remove the device cover.
i Be sure to remember the position of the connectors on the central

power supply unit. Mark them if necessary.
Detach all connectors from the central

power supply unit (1).
Detach the connector (1).
Undo screws (1) and (2).
Remove the central power supply unit

upwards.

in reverse order.

Removal/installation of components System unit (PC)
System unit (PC)

Detach all connectors from the system
unit (PC) (1) and remove the PC.

in reverse order.
i Before installing the new PC, restore the existing hardware

configuration.
You may have to transfer add-on cards or memory components from
the old PC in the new one.

Receipt printer Removal/installation of components
Receipt printer
Open the door of the operating unit and pull the equipment carriage A out.
i Transfer the printer consumables (e.g. paper roll) to the new printer
and if necessary set the new receipt printer to the used paper roll core
diameter (see operating manual).
Detach connectors (1) and (2).

Push the receipt printer backwards in
the direction of the arrow and remove
it upwards.
Reinstall it by following the same steps in reverse order.

Removal/installation of components Journal printer
Journal printer
i Transfer the printer consumables, e.g. paper roll, to the new printer
(see operating manual).
Detach the two connectors (1).
Loosen screws (2) and (3), push the

printer a little in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.

Capacitor Removal/installation of components
Capacitor
Remove cable ties (1) and (2).
Loosen screw (1) and remove the

cable.
Remove the cable tie (2) and the

rubber cap (3), loosen the screw
underneath and remove the cable.

in reverse order.
When removing the capacitor, do not touch the contacts, since the
capacitor may still have a residual current.
Avoid any short circuit at the contacts.
When installing the capacitor, be sure to take note of the polarity of
the connecting cables.
Make sure that the rubber cap on the positive pole is secured with a
cable tie.

Removal/installation of components Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)

i When replacing the CHD V2CU (CHD V3x) card reader check if there
is a SAM module in the SAM module mounting. If there is one, remove
the SAM module and place it in the new card reader.
i Make sure the device is installed in the correct position.

The position of the track is clearly identified by the connections.
Open the door of the operating unit and pull the equipment carriage out.
Detach all connectors from the card
reader and remove the connection to
ground.
The position of the connectors
i depends on the track position of
the card reader.
Remove the screw (1) and push the
card reader in the direction of the
arrow until you can remove it with the
holder.
Turn the retaining bracket with the

card reader around and remove the
two screws (1) and (2). Use the
screws to mount the new card reader
on the old retaining bracket (3).

in reverse order.

Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x) Removal/installation of components
Disassembling the CIM board
i The CIM board must be removed from the removed card reader and
mounted on the new card reader. Before detaching the CIM board
connector, contact the bank's administrative staff and follow the
instructions.
Remove the card reader (see section "Card reader CHD<V2CU (CHD
V3x)").
Detach the connector from position (1)
after consultation with the bank's
administrative staff.
Remove screws (2) and (3) and place

the CIM board with the sheet (4) next
to the card reader.
Remove screw (1) and undo screw (2).

Open up the card reader.

Removal/installation of components Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)
Remove the CIM sensor with its holder

(1).
During installation, make sure

i that the cable is positioned in
the cable guide (2).
Mount the CIM board on the new card reader in the reverse order of steps.
i Lay the CIM sensor cable along the card reader so that the cable does
not extend to the side.

Operator panel 05 Removal/installation of components
Operator panel 05
Pull the latching mechanism of the
operator panel 05 upwards and tilt the
operator panel down by the green grip
(2).
Remove the screw (1).
Detach all connectors from the

operator panel (1) and remove the
connection to ground.
Remove the screws (2) and (3).
Remove Operator Panel 05.
in reverse order.

Removal/installation of components 24 V distributor
24 V distributor
i Be sure to remember the position of the connectors on the 24 V power

distributor. Mark them if necessary.
Detach all connectors from the 24 V

distributor (1).
Remove screw (2) and remove the 24
V distributor.

in reverse order.

Special Electronics CTM Removal/installation of components

i The connectors of the IC ports may be attached or detached only

when the device is disconnected from the power supply.
Be sure to remember the position of the connectors on the Special

Electronics CTM (mark if necessary).
Remove the screws (1) and (2)

underneath the special electronics
CTM.
Detach all connectors from the special

electronics CTM (1). Loosen screw (2).
remove the strain relief. Detach all
connectors (5).

Removal/installation of components Special Electronics CTM
When installing it, make sure that the

Special Electronics CTM is hooked in
at positions (1) to (3).

order.
i During installation, make sure that the strain relief is pushed in front of
the Special Electronics CTM as far as possible.
i When attaching the connectors to the Special Electronics CTM make

sure that the marked connectors are plugged in the appropriate
sockets.

Heating unit Removal/installation of components
Heating unit
Heating unit (left side)

Remove screws (1) to (3).
Remove the angle bracket (4).
Push the heating unit toward the

center of the device and remove it.

in reverse order.

Removal/installation of components Heating unit
Heating unit (right side)

Remove the angle bracket (4).
Disconnect the heater cable's plug

connection (1).
Remove screws (2) to (4) and remove
the heater with the mounting plate.

Push the heating unit from the
mounting plate and remove it.

in reverse order.

Relay panel for external features Removal/installation of components
Heating control
Open the safe.
Pull the Cash Media Dispenser out of the device, if necessary.

Disconnect all connectors from the
heating control (1).
Loosen the two screws (2) on both

sides, push the heating control slightly
to the back and remove to the right.

in reverse order.
Relay panel for external features

Open the safe door.
Pull the Cash Media Dispenser out of the device.

Detach all connectors from the relay
panel for external features (1). Loosen
screws (2) and (3). Push the relay
panel for external features slightly in
the direction shown by the arrow and
remove it upwards.

in reverse order.

Removal/installation of components CMD output transport
CMD output transport

Open the safe door.

Detach connector (1) from the CMD
controller.
Remove the screws (1) and (2) on the

opposite side.
Press the two side panels outwards a
little (see arrows) and remove the
output transport (3) upwards.

in reverse order.
i For installing the new output transport, you may only use the screws
previously removed or screws of the same type.

CMD stacker Removal/installation of components
CMD stacker
Open the safe door.
i Be sure to remember the position of the connectors on the controller of

the Cash Media Dispenser (mark if necessary).
Detach all connectors from the CMD

controller (1).
Remove the reject/retract cassette (1).

Removal/installation of components CMD stacker
Release the stacker by lifting the

locking/release lever (1) a little,
pressing it in the direction of the arrow
and pushing it down again slightly.
Push the stacker in the direction of the

arrow (1) towards the device as shown
in the illustration.
Take hold of the stacker by the bar (1)

and the board (2) and remove it with
the controller and the output transport
upwards.

CMD stacker Removal/installation of components
Set the stacker down and pull the

CMD controller (1) off the securing
pins.
Remove the screws (1) and (2) on

the opposite side.
Press the two side panels outwards a

little (see arrows) and remove the
output transport (3) upwards.
Reinstall it by following the same

steps in reverse order.
i To fasten the output transport only use the screws removed earlier or
screws of the same type.

Removal/installation of components CMD controller
CMD controller
Remove the CMD stacker with the CMD controller and the CMD output
transport (see section "CMD stacker").
Pull the CMD controller (1) off the
mounting pins.
The controller is replaced with the
protective cover.

in reverse order.
CMD distributor board

Open the safe door.

Remove the cash-out cassettes (1) to
(4) (see the chapter "Cash Media
Dispenser (CMD-V4) - Vertical Cash-
Out", section "Removing the cassette"
in the operating manual").

CMD distributor board Removal/installation of components
Detach the tab connectors (1) and (2)

from the CMD controller.
Detach connectors (3) and (4) from the

CMD distributor board.
Open the four covers (5) to (8).
To do so, press catches (1) and (2) in

the direction of the arrows and open
the hinged cover (3).

Removal/installation of components CMD distributor board
On all four connectors, press catches

(1) and (2) in the direction of the
arrows while pulling off connector (3).
Pull the CMD distributor board (1) off

the securing pins and remove it
downwards.
The distributor board is replaced with
the protective cover.

in reverse order.

CMD dispensing units Removal/installation of components
CMD dispensing units

Open the safe door.

Remove the screws (1) to (4) and
remove the protective cover.

Removal/installation of components CMD dispensing units
Lower dispensing unit

Remove the cash-out cassettes (1)
and (2) (see the chapter "Cash Media
in the operating manual).
Release the lower dispensing unit by

turning the locking/release levers (1)
and (2) each 90 degrees
counterclockwise.

CMD dispensing units Removal/installation of components

distributor board and remove the lower
dispensing unit in the direction of the
arrow.

in reverse order.
Upper dispensing unit

Remove the cash-out cassettes (1)
and (2) (see the chapter "Cash Media
in the operating manual).
Detach connector (1) for the thickness

measuring station from the CMD
controller.

Removal/installation of components CMD dispensing units
Release the upper dispensing unit by

turning the locking/release levers (1)
and (2) each 90 degrees
counterclockwise.

distributor board and remove the
upper dispensing unit in the direction
of the arrow.

in reverse order.

CMD chassis Removal/installation of components
During installation of the upper

dispensing unit, make sure that the
loop of the double note detection unit
cable sits in the cutout (1).
CMD chassis
Open the safe door.
Remove the stacker with the controller and the output transport (see
section "CMD output transport").
Remove the dispensing units (see section "CMD dispensing units").

Remove the securing screws (1) and
(2).

Removal/installation of components CMD chassis
Grasp the chassis at the front (1) and

rear (2).
Lift it at the rear (2) a little and remove

it to the rear in the direction of the
arrow.

the hang up rail (5).
Mount the hang up rail on the new

Cash Media Dispenser.
Remove the CMD distributor board (6)

(see section "CMD distributor board").
Remove screws (1) to (4) on the

opposite side of the chassis and
remove the hang up rail (5).
Mount the hang up rail on the new

Cash Media Dispenser.

in reverse order.
i Before installing the reject/retract cassette, make sure you mount the
two securing screws.
For further information about the CMD please refer to the service
manual for the CMD which is available in German and English.

Logo lighting Removal/installation of components
Logo lighting
Pull the customer panel out of the device.
Disconnect the plug connection (1).
Bend the retaining clips slightly
upwards (see arrows) and remove the
lighting unit (2).
Bend the retaining clips once more

slightly upwards (see arrows) and
remove the diffuser screen (1).
Insert the required logo (1).

in reverse order.

Removal/installation of components Audio loudspeakers
Audio loudspeakers
The two audio loudspeakers (1) and
(2) are removed in the same way.
Remove the screw (2), remove the

sheet and two further screws. Remove
the audio loudspeaker.

in reverse order.

Customer panel light Removal/installation of components
Customer panel light

Disconnect the plug connection (1).

remove the customer panel lighting.

in reverse order.
System loudspeaker
Remove the screws (1) and (2) inside
the customer panel.
Detach the connectors from the

loudspeaker and remove the system
loudspeaker.

in reverse order.

Removal/installation of components Console Electronics CTM
Console Electronics CTM

i The connector of the IC port for the Special Electronics CTM may
only be attached or detached when the device is disconnected from
the power supply.
Detach all connectors from the

console electronics (1).
Loosen screws (2) and (3), push the

console electronics a little in the
direction of the arrow and remove it.

in reverse order.

Portrait camera Removal/installation of components
Portrait camera
Remove the screws (2) and (3) and

remove the portrait camera.

in reverse order.
Cash slot camera

Loosen the screws (2) and (3) and

remove the cash slot camera.

in reverse order.

Removal/installation of components Monitor fan
Monitor fan
Remove connector (1) and screw (2).

Remove the fan box (3).

in reverse order.

LCD monitor Removal/installation of components
LCD monitor
Remove the cable holder (see section "Removing the cable holder").

Loosen the knurled screw (4).
Open the cable clips (1) and (2) and

remove the cable.
Loosen the knurled screw (3).
Remove the monitor upwards at a

slant.

in reverse order.
i When installing the new monitor, remove any protective foil from the
display.
Pane/Soft keys

Removal/installation of components Pane/Soft keys
i The two soft keys are always replaced together.
Remove the LCD monitor (1) (see

section "LCD monitor").
Disconnect the plug connections (2)

and (3).

the screws of the ground straps (7) to
(10).

Touch controller Removal/installation of components
Remove the eight screws (1) and

remove the soft keys and/or the
screen.

in reverse order.
Replace the sealing tapes if

necessary.
When installing the soft keys, be

i sure to take note of the polarity
of the tab connectors; they are
not coded.
Touch controller

Removal/installation of components Touch controller
Detach all connectors from the touch

controller (1) and remove it.

in reverse order.

Headphone jack Removal/installation of components
Headphone jack
Remove the screws (1) to (6) from the
headphone jack on the rear of the
customer panel and detach all
connectors.
Remove the headphone jack.
Remove the silicone and clean the contact surface.
Apply silicon and mount the new headphone jack.
Continue with the installation by following the same steps in reverse order.

Removal/installation of components Optical indicator
Optical indicator
Push the catches in the direction

shown by the arrow and remove the
optical indicator.

in reverse order.

CMD shutter Removal/installation of components
CMD shutter
Remove screw (1) and remove the

ground strap.
Remove the screw (2) and remove the
CMD shutter (3).

Loosen screw (2) and unhook the
ground cable.

in reverse order.

Removal/installation of components Keypad (EPP V6)
Adjust the CMD shutter so that the flap

is in the center (see arrows).
Keypad (EPP V6)

i The keypad (EPP V6) is removed from the underside of the customer
panel.
Remove the cover (1). Disconnect all

connectors from the keypad (2).
Detach the ground connection (3).
the keypad.

ASKIM module Removal/installation of components
ASKIM module
i The screws removed during de-installation of the equipment are also
required for installation.
Switch off the device.
ASKIM sensor
Detach the four cables of the ASKIM
sensor from the anti-skimming base
unit (1).

Remove the operation panel shutter.

Removal/installation of components ASKIM module

Lay cable (3) free.
Remove the ASKIM sensor.

in reverse order.
When you have replaced the ASKIM sensor or the anti-skimming base unit,
test the ASKIM module as described in the chapter "Anti-Skimming Module
(ASKIM) 01750080047", section "Function test".
Anti-skimming base unit

Detach the cable (1) and (2) from the
anti-skimming base unit.
remove the anti-skimming base unit
(5).

in reverse order.
When you replaced the anti-skimming base unit of the ASKIM module as
described in the chapter "Anti-skimming-module (ASKIM) 01750080047",
section "Function test."

Scanner Removal/installation of components
Scanner
Open the door of the operating unit and pull the equipment carriage B out.
Loosen screws (1) and
(2) ...
... and screws (3) and (4).
Detach connector (1), loosen screw (2)

and push in the lever (3).
Lift the scanner and tilt it sideward.

Removal/installation of components Shutter of presenter

in reverse order.
Shutter of presenter
remove the shutter (3).

in reverse order.

CCDM shutter Removal/installation of components
CCDM shutter
Open the flap of the shutter by
pressing the lever (1) down in front (2)
and lifting the flap (3).
Then press the lever (1) down in back

(4) to fix the flap.

remove the 'end piece outdoor assy.'
(3). (3).
The 'end piece outdoor assy.'

i (3) must be mounted on the new
shutter.

Removal/installation of components CCDM shutter
Move the drain hose for the condensed

water a little to the right (see arrow).
Detach the shutter cable (1).
Remove screws (2) and (3) and remove
the shutter.
i Manually open the new shutter's flap before installing the new shutter.
Continue with the installation by following the same steps in reverse
order.
Adjust the shutter so that the flap is in

the center (see arrows).

CCDM head module Removal/installation of components
CCDM head module

i This section describes the removal of the components which must be
removed before the CCDM head module can be removed.
How to remove and install CCDM components is described in the
service manual for the CCDM.
Open the safe door.
Pull out the head module.

Push the cover (1) in the direction of
the arrow until the catch (2) is
released, and remove the cover.

push the runner in the direction of the
arrow.

Removal/installation of components CCDM head module
Detach connector (1) from position (2).

Detach connector (3) and remove the
screw of the cable lug of the ground
connection (4).
The cable lug can also be

i plugged in and in that case only
needs to be pulled off.
Loosen the ground connection (2) by

removing the Taptite fillister head
screw (1) and the lock washer.
The cable lug can also be plugged in

and in that case only needs to be
pulled off.
i Note during the installation that

the lock washer must be
between the controller housing
and the cable lug.

CCDM head module Removal/installation of components
i The upper right telescopic runner is attached to the CCDM head

module with three screws in total.
Push the CCDM head module into the

device far enough so that you see the
bore hole (1) for the rear fastening
screw.
Remove the screw.
Pull the telescopic runner out as far as

possible.
Remove the screws at positions (1)
and (2).

the CCDM adapter plate (1).

Removal/installation of components Safety Shutter form printer TP20
Detach the FireWire cable's connector

(1) if that cable is present.
i For further information about the CCDM please refer to the service
manual for the CCDM which is available in German and English.
Safety Shutter form printer TP20

Push the customer panel upwards.
Remove the optical indicator (1) (see section "Optical indicators").
Remove the portrait camera (2) (see section "Portrait camera").

Remove the two screws (3) and move
the rain channel slightly to the side.
Remove the two screws (4) and
remove the Safety Shutter form printer
TP20 (5).

in reverse order.

Forms printer TP20 Removal/installation of components
Forms printer TP20

i Transfer the printer consumables (e.g. paper) to the new printer.
Disconnect connectors (1) to (4).

Remove the printer upwards.
First insert the printer in the front near the mounting screws (5) and (6) into the
device.
Let it go from the rear side. The shaft
on the bottom side of the printer will
then automatically find the shaft
mounting (see arrow).

Removal/installation of components Forms printer TP20
Shutter
Remove the form printer TP20 (see section "Forms printer TP20").

Pull the shutter in the direction shown
by the arrows out of the device.

in reverse order.

Reject transport unit

Remove the cables incl. the cable
guides (see arrows) from the plate.
Lift the output transport slightly (1) and

remove the reject transport upwards
with the handle (2).

Guide the bar of the reject transport

into the guide ways (see arrows).
Lift the output transport slightly (1) and

let the reject transport down with the
ledge until the threaded pin is inside
the guide (3)

Output transport
Disconnect connectors (1) to (4).
Remove the reject transport (see section "Reject transport").
Remove screws (1) and (2) on the

right side.
Remove the plate outwards (see
arrow).
Remove the plate on left the same
way.

Remove the cable from the holder (2).

Guide the cables downwards through

the opening into the tub (1).
Slide the output transport in the

direction shown by the arrow (1) and
remove it upwards (2).
Loosen screws (1) to (3).

Slide the output transport in the
direction shown by the arrow and
remove it.

Insert the output transport in the cutout

(1).
Slide it slightly in the direction shown
by the arrow (2) and move it into the
opening (3).
Logic board
Disconnect all plugs (1) from the logic
board.
Loosen screw (2).
Remove the metal plate with the logic
unit.

in reverse order.

Power supply unit
i Be sure to remember the position of the connectors on the power

supply unit (mark if necessary).
Detach all connectors from the power

supply unit (1).
Loosen the screws (1) on both sides of

the power supply unit.
Slide the power supply unit in the
direction shown by the arrow and
remove it.

in reverse order.

Uninterruptible Power Supply Removal/installation of components
Uninterruptible Power Supply

Before removing the UPS, first detach the battery connector at the rear
of the device and push the ON/TEST button to drain the capacitors
inside the UPS.
i Removal is described later.
Barcode reader
Loosen the knurled screws (1).
Remove the screws (2).
Remove the barcode reader with

holder and remove the connected USB
cable.

remove the barcode reader.

in reverse order.

Removal/installation of components Hybrid DIP reader
Hybrid DIP reader

Open the customer panel.

the mounting.

the hybrid DIP reader.

in reverse order.

Alpha combi keyboard with trackball Removal/installation of components
Check if there is a chip card in the

SAM socket (1) of the defective
module.
If so, remove the chip card and insert

it in the new module.
Alpha combi keyboard with trackball

i The removal/installation of the fan is described later.
Passbook module PMxx

Card reject module

Forms printer TP20

Observe the ESD measures.
i Check the function of the printer after installing/removing a component

and conduct a test print.

Installing/removing the printer

Installation/removal of the TP20 is device-specific and is described in the
service manuals of the corresponding devices.

Installing/removing the logic board

Press the catch and then remove the
cover (1) to the left of the printer.
Disconnect the seven connectors from

the left-hand side of the logic board.

Disconnect the nine connectors from

the right-hand side of the logic board.
Remove the three connectors on the

front of the logic board.

Undo the screws on the left and right-

hand side (1) of the logic board and
remove the board.

in reverse order.
Make sure the cables are not

i pinched during installation.

Installing/removing the control panel

Disconnect the connector (1) from the
board.
Remove the control panel and press

the new panel in place until it
engages.
Reconnect the connectors to the logic
board.

Installing/removing the thermal array

Press the catch and then remove the
cover (1) to the left of the printer.

left-hand side of the logic board and
remove the cable from the mount (see
arrow).

right-hand side of the logic board.

Press the two green buttons (arrows 1)

and slide the thermal array downwards
from its mounting (arrow 2).
You can then tilt the thermal array

forwards and remove it.
When removing the array pay

i attention to the right-hand cable.
Then reassemble the thermal array in

reverse sequence.
When doing this make sure that the

thermal array re-engages into position
in its mount (see arrows).
Relay the cables and reconnect the

connectors to the logic board. Close
the cover again.
If T/SOP is present, use it to enter the

date. If not, enter the date in KDIAG.


The information required for carrying out troubleshooting and maintenance on
the individual components can be found in the sections on the various
components in this manual.
When carrying out work on components and modules that carry an
electrical charge, these pieces of equipment must first be
disconnected from the power supply. Due to construction, it is not
enough to switch off the device using the power switch on the power
distributor. In addition, the rubber plug must be disconnected from the
power distributor.
If the system is equipped with a UPS, you should note that the UPS
continues to supply power even after it has been disconnected from
the power supply network.
Additional equipment such as heaters or UPS (uninterruptible power

supply) are connected to the power supply by means of separate
power cables.
In the case of devices with UPS, see also the chapter "UPS PW
5115".
i If the devices heating unit is out of service, be sure to comply with

the environmental conditions for storage (see chapter Appendix,
section Environmental conditions).
Levels must not fall below or exceed these conditions because
irreparable damage may be caused to the device otherwise. In the
event of non-compliance, WINCOR NIXDORF International GmbH
shall not assume liability for any damage that is caused to the
device.

Test options Maintenance and service
Test options
All components of the system unit (PC) can be tested using the SDIAG test
program.
As a rule, the integrated components can be checked with KDIAG or, in
individual cases, with PDIAG.
It is also possible to carry out a check of the components with DSP
(Diagnostics and Service Package). This requires that DSP has been
installed on the hard disk of the system unit (PC) either during the system
installation or later by a service technician.
The current versions of the test programs are available in the intranet/extranet.
Intranet: http://intranet.wincor-nixdorf.com
Extranet: http://extranet.wincor-nixdorf.com
Maintenance
Journal printer
The printers are maintenance free.
Remove any paper scraps, paper dust and foreign material in the printing
area. You can use tweezers, a brush or a vacuum cleaner to do this.
The operator should perform maintenance work at least with every change of
paper. Pin heads have to be replaced after about three years (subject to a
charge).

Maintenance and service Maintenance
Receipt printer
The printer is maintenance-free.
Remove any paper scraps, paper dust and foreign material in the printing
area. You can use tweezers, a brush or a vacuum cleaner to do this.
The operator should perform maintenance work at least with every change of
paper. A thermal print array has to be replaced after about
50 km of paper (subject to a charge).
Card reader
Clean the card transport rollers with isopropanol or isopropyl alcohol.
Clean the shutter (switch, magnetic track pre-recognition unit) with a brush
or with isopropyl alcohol.
Clean the sensors with a high-pile card.

In the event of problems, the operator has to clean the magnetic heads/chip
contacts using the universal cleaning card for ID card readers.
Hybrid DIP reader
Remove residues of dirt from the card insertion slot using a brush.
In the event of problems, the operator has to clean the magnetic heads using
the universal cleaning card for ID card readers.

Maintenance Maintenance and service
Keypad (EPP)
The keypad is maintenance-free.
For cleaning the operator should use the professional cleaning set for IT
equipment.
Soft key keypads and operator panel

The keyboards are maintenance free.
For cleaning the operator should use the professional cleaning set for IT
equipment.
CIM
Remove the sensor head. Clean it with a brush or cloth, or with a specific
cleaning brush.
Use test cards to check the functioning of the read head.

The operator has to clean this with the cleaning brush. This is subject to a
charge if the operation is requested by the technician.
Preventive maintenance should be carried out twice a year.

System unit (PC)

The system unit is maintenance-free.
Check whether the fan works and moves easily.
Clean the fan using a brush or vacuum cleaner.
Housing
Clean the housing with a vacuum cleaner or cloth.
Repair damage to paint if necessary and possible.
Portrait camera/cash slot camera/IDCU camera

The cameras are maintenance-free.
Heater
Check the function using an internal test.
Optical indicators
Check whether they function.
Fan
Check the functioning and easy movement of the fans, and clean them.

Monitors, LCD boxes

The operator has to clean the touch panels and protection screens as required
using the professional cleaning set for IT equipment.
General
Check whether the components have been installed correctly.
Check all cables for safe installation and correct attachment.
Check the gas springs of the device doors and replace them if necessary.
Check the ground connections and replace them if necessary.
Check the parts protecting the cables and replace them if necessary.
Check whether the UPS functions (self-test).
Check the functioning of locks and make contacts and adjust them.
Check whether the telescopic runners work.

Approved maintenance products

You can order the items listed below electronically or from our service partner.
Orders: http://extranet.wincor-nixdorf.com
http://www.wincor-nixdorf.com/mediaservice
E-mail address for
logistics questions: mailto:serviceslogistic@wincor-nixdorf.com
E-mail address for
technical questions: mailto:servicesupport@wincor-nixdorf.com
Commercial name / product name Part number

Screen cleaner ECS-260 01750035530
Cleaning fluid 03224600952
Compressed air duster with extension tube 01770007430
WM flat paintbrush 1" 01770005440
Cleaning card for hybrid readers 01750016388
WN Hybrid test card 01750066226
Cleaning tool for MM 01750012317
Universal cleaning cloth 01770005406
Pre-saturated cleaning card CHD Austria 01750057227
You will find a list of all the cleaning and maintenance materials released by
Wincor Nixdorf in the intranet or extranet.
i Please note the manufacturer's specifications on the packaging and

on the information sheet included in the package.
The product can be damaged or soiled if non-approved materials are
used or if the product is handled improperly.
Dispose of the packaging and empty containers in accordance with
locally applicable regulations.


Index
Cash media dispenser 8-1
A Cash Media Dispenser 8-3
Anti-Skimming Module 2-15 CHD V2CU 5-27
Anti-Skimming module II (ASKIM CHD V3x 5-27
2) 5-1 Check/Cash Deposit Module
ASKIM 2-15 (CCDM) 8-17
Audio loudspeakers/headphones CIM 06 5-4, 11-20
2-13 CIM board 5-4, 11-20
CMD shutter horizontal 8-5
B
CMD-V4
Barcode reader 7-169 Cash Media Dispenser Version
Block diagrams 4 8-1
Cash Media Dispenser 2-, 2-4 Coin dispenser module CM2-O-4H
CCDM 2-4 2-21
Check/cash deposit module 2-4 Coin Dispenser Module CM2-O-
Headphones 2-5 4H/8H 8-21
Journal printer 2-3
Coin dispenser module CM2-O-8H
Loudspeakers 2-5
2-21
Receipt printer 2-3
TH60 2-4 Coin dispenser module
Uninterruptible Power Supply Overview 2-21
2-5 CrypTA 1-14
UPS 2-5 Customer panel special electronics
CTM 2-10
C
D
Camera monitoring 2-13
Card reader D&S 1-15
CHD V2CU 5-27 Deposit unit 8-19
Card Reader Description of the device 1-9
CHD V3x 5-27
DIP-Hybridleser ICM330index
Card readers 5-49
Overview 2-22
Door switch 2-16
Card reject module 5-77
Cash Media Dispenser 2-25
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual II-1

Index
E Monitor
12.1 6-1
EC 15'' LCD Box DVI 6-17
European Community 1-34 15LCD-Box DVI 6-9
Embedded SEQ chapter \h \r Touchscreen for LCD 6-25
4 PC A4 4-1 Monitors
EPP V6 5-87 Overview 2-17
Ethernet adapter Intel PRO/1000
GT 01750107095 4-25 N
NP06 7-1
F
NP07A 7-45
FireWire card PCIe x1 FWA2414A
01750167156 index 4-31 O
Flat displays 2-19
OP 04 10-13
H Operator panel 05 10-25
Operator Panel 05 10-39
Headphones 2-13
Operator panel 05 11-22
Heating control 01750190720
Operator Panel USB (OP 04)
10-55
10-13
HW Inventory 1-10
Optical indicators 2-23
Assignment 2-12
I
Intrusion protection facility 2-15 P
PC
K Overview of PCs 2-14
Keyboards 2-24 Embedded 4-1
PCI
L Peripheral Component
Interconnect Express 4-32
Lock 11-, 11-7 PGA Programmable Gate Array
Loudspeakers 2-13 7-145
Plug-in media entry indicators
M 10-53
Maintenance and Service 12-1 Power distributor 01750150107
3-33
MM/CIM86/CIM06 5-73
Power supply
II-2 CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Index
DC voltage 2-7 CMD controller 11-33

Supply voltage 2-6 CMD dispensing units 11-36
Printer CMD distributor board 11-33
TP06/NP06 7-1 CMD output transport 11-29
TP07A-2 7-45 CMD stacker 11-30
TP07A/NP07A 7-45 CMD-V4 shutter 11-5, 11-54
Console electronics 11-45
Printers
Customer panel light 11-44
Overview 2-21
Device views 11-1
Protective screens 2-18 Door lock of the operating unit
11-7
R DVD drive 11-12
EPP keypad 11-55
Relay panel for external features External DVD drive 11-12
USB 01750083012 10-1 Fan 11-8
Relay panel for external features Fan (operating unit) 11-8
Overview 2-20 Fan box 11-47
Remote Status Indicator 2-15 Form printer TP20 11-66
Remote status indicator 10-9 Forms printer TP20 11-76
Gas pressure spring 11-10
Removal/Installation of Headphone jack 11-52
components Heating control 11-28
24 V distributor 11-23 Heating unit (left side) 11-26
Removal/Installation of Heating unit (right side) 11-27
Components Journal printer 11-17
Alpha combi keyboard with Keypad (EPP V6) 11-55
trackball 11-76 LCD monitor 11-48
ASKIM module 11-56 Lock of the Operator Panel
Audio loudspeakers 11-43 11-7
Barcode reader 11-74 Logo lightning 11-42
Capacitor 11-18 Monitor 11-48
Card reader 11-19 NP06 11-17
Card reject module 11-76 NP07A 11-16
Cash slot camera 11-46 Operator panel 05 11-22
CCDM head module 11-62 Output transport 11-70
CCDM shutter 11-60 Pane 11-48
Central power supply unit Passbook module PMxx 11-76
11-14 Portrait camera 11-46
CHD V2CU 11-19 Power distributor 11-11
CHD V3x 11-19 Power supply unit 11-73
CMD chassis 11-40 Receipt printer 11-16
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual II-3

Index
Reject transport 11-68 TP07A 7-45

Relay panel for external TRU Thermal Reject Unit 7-122
features 11-28
Scanner 11-58
1-15
Shutter 11-67
Shutter of presenter 11-59
Softkeys 11-48
U
Special Electronics CTM 11-24 UPS Powerware 5115 RM 10-61
System loudspeaker 11-44
System unit (PC) 11-15 USB assignment 2-14
Touch controller 11-50 Console Electronics CTM 2-10
TP06 11-17 USB Multi DVD drive external
TP07A 11-16 01750199695 4-21
Uninterruptible power supply
11-74
UPS 11-74
Logic board 11-72
Optical indicator 11-53
Safety Shutter form printer TP20
11-65
S
Shutter 8-5
Softkey pads 2-19
Softkeys 5-99
SOP button 2-16
SOP switch 2-16
Special Electronics CTM 2-8
assignment 2-9
T
Temperature control 2-25
Touchkit for LCD monitor 6-25
Touchscreen
Overview 2-18
TP06 7-1
II-4 CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Notes
01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual

Published by
D-33094 Paderborn
Order No.: 01750186621 C 1 GB

Cineo 2560servicemanual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Cineo 2560servicemanual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Self-Service

Do you have ...

... any questions or suggestions

Please contact the following address

Fax: +49 (0) 52 51 693-62 09

CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

May Edition 2014

WINCOR NIXDORF International GmbH 2014

All rights, including rights of translation

All rights, including rights created by

All names of hardware and software

This manual was

CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 0-1

01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-I

Environmental conditions .................................................................. 1-31

Function and integration ............................................................................. 2-1

I-II CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

SOP button/SOP switch ............................................................................... 2-16

Power supply unit CMD 01750160689 ........................................................ 3-1

Power Supply Unit CMD-CCDM 01750160690 ......................................... 3-13

01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-III

Voltages of the second part .............................................................. 3-16

Power supply unit 2x38 V/395 W 01750203483 ....................................... 3-25

Power distributor 01750150107 ................................................................ 3-33

Special Electronics CTM 01750147868 .................................................... 3-35

I-IV CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

supply ..................................................................................................... 3-41

Console Electronics CTM / CTM II ............................................................ 3-55

01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-V

X15- I/O 2 (ASKIM / DIP) .................................................................. 3-63

Embedded PC A4 ......................................................................................... 4-1

USB Multi DVD drive 01750199695........................................................... 4-21

Ethernet Adapter Intel PRO/1000 GT 01750107095 ................................ 4-25

I-VI CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Installation .................................................................................................... 4-27

FireWire card PCIe x1 FWA2414A 01750167156 ..................................... 4-31

Anti-Skimming module II ............................................................................. 5-1

01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-VII

Card reader CHD V2CU (CHD V3x)........................................................... 5-27

Hybrid DIP reader ICM330 ......................................................................... 5-49

Contactless card reader Multi-ISO compact ........................................... 5-59

I-VIII CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Cable connection ......................................................................................... 5-63

Contactless card reader EMV/NFC ........................................................... 5-65

MM/CIM86/CIM06 ........................................................................................ 5-73

Card Reject Module ................................................................................... 5-77

EPP V6 ........................................................................................................ 5-85

01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-IX

Green LED ........................................................................................ 5-92

Softkeys ...................................................................................................... 5-99

12.1 LCD-Box DVI ....................................................................................... 6-1

15 LCD-Box DVI .......................................................................................... 6-9

15" DVI High Bright TFT monitor.............................................................. 6-17

I-X CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Pin assignment ............................................................................................ 6-21

Touchkit for LCD monitor ......................................................................... 6-25

Journal Printer TP06/NP06 .......................................................................... 7-1

01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-XI

Test level 4 (reset EEPROM parameters to default values) ............. 7-23

I-XII CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual 01750186621 C

Removing / installing the components ......................................................... 7-41

Receipt printer TP07A/NP07A ................................................................... 7-45

01750186621 C CINEO C2560 / ProCash 8150 - Service Manual I-XIII